Home

9210B Xlite Data Logger

1. The ports and baud rate to use are configured from this menu Each port can be configured as None Direct Radio Modem Voice SSP or RS 485 Checking the checkbox next to each port will tell the Xlite to enhance and manage the port above and beyond what Remote alone does This includes sending out alarms on the port as well as handling speech dial in and dial out and support for SSP blocks which can be used to send and retrieve tags or set the time Typically com1 would not be checked as it is used for Xterm communications to setup the station You would check it if you wanted to connect a communications device to com and see alarm data go out that port The Master ID which is the name of the PC Base Station in an SSP system is specified here too Other SSP parameters can be specified in the Setup menu and pressing the Test button will test communications SSP Settings Pressing Setup button displays the following SSP Settings menu This dialog allows you to configure additional settings for SSP communications over a variety of devices All entries except retries are in units of seconds Carrier Delay fi A 7 Reply Delay Bo A Cancel Ack Delay fio isa Retries Bo A Retry Delay bo M Carrier Delay When the com port is set for RADIO communications this is how long to key the transmitter assert DTR to warm up the radio before sending data With Sutron radios typically 1 second or le
2. EZSetup Measurements Graphical Setup 01 IntBat 00 15 00 Next unknown New I O Modules LAN Settings Log files Satlink Self test v Compile edit The details of whatever measurements have been graphically defined will be displayed underneath the Graphical Setup main branch Some of the details shown for each measurement include sensor name channel usage last data value and quality quality only if it is bad and scheduling information including the time of the next measurement Ld Selecting a measurement sub branch and pressing Edit will cause the system to display the measurement graphically i e in terms of the blocks that define it Only the blocks of the measurement selected will be displayed To display the blocks of all measurements that have been defined graphically select the Graphical Setup branch and press Edit Press the View button to view the block diagram in read only mode To define a new measurement graphically select New and press Edit This causes the system to display the graphical setup page with no blocks yet defined To remove an entire graphical block chain click it click EDIT and then click the left most block and do a delete right 1 0 Modules The I O modules branch displays the I O modules currently connected to the system These modules are used for hooking up all sensors to the system except SDI 12 sensors Up to ten modules can be stack
3. 300 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com APPENDIX H SATLINK TX FORMATS Satlink transmissions can be configured to transmit the data in several different formats 1 SHEF format conforms to NESDIS Standard Decimal format specifications The format is ASCII and readable by persons without the aid of a computer Sensor data has a label a time offset how many minutes old the data is the interval of the data and then a variable number of data items recent data first to left EXAMPLE HG 0 15 10 20 10 15 PC 0 15 50 49 TA 0 15 22 1 22 0 23 5 23 0 2 SHEF Fixed is a special version of the SHEF format where numbers are fixed to seven character Sensor data has a label a time offset how many minutes old the data is the interval of the data and then a variable number of data items recent data first to left EXAMPLE HG 0 15 12345 12345 1 PC 0 15 12345 1 1234 11 3 Bin Int is a binary interleaved format identical to the 8210 binary transmission format The data are in the 6 bit pseudo binary format required by NESDIS EXAMPLE 2 GtEGS Sx Sr i e i 4 Bin NonInt is a binary non interleaved format This format also uses the 6 bit pseudo binary format but allows different amounts of data to be sent for each sensor The data is not interleaved i e one sensor s data set app
4. SDI 12 WavProc The acquisition characteristics of WavProc block are defined using the WaveProc Properties dialog as seen in the illustration below The Interval property defines how often to run and typically should be no less than every hour 01 00 00 The Time property allows you to specify an offset for the interval Note sample duration is fixed to 2400 samples or 34 minutes 8 seconds WavProc Properties Sensor ZMinig eee OK Time 00 00 00 e Cancel l Interval 01 00 00 B Files Log Use the WavProc Files dialog to specify where to save the Time Domain sensor input data and Spectrum domain output data An archive directory can be defined to host all the data files Note the most recent files are overwritten every measurement Interval whereas the archive directory stores all files generated WavProc Files V Custom most recent df file name Flash Diski WaveData txt BB Cancel V Custom most recent sf file name Survey Flash Disk WvaveSpec tit B M fso Card wWayProac lex 224 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com The WavProc Survey dialog allows you to define installation site specific details These details are included in the input and output data files automatically WayProc Survey Station num 3ch ood ae Stream label ch 01 T Canc
5. Zip up the results of a show and transfer it to the PC using Ymodem Flash Disk gt SHOW ZIP Ready to send YModem file s press ESC to abort 298 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Show all the sensor values in comma separated format Flash Disk gt SHOW CSV SENSOR BATVAL Battery 12 7813835841049 G V BATVAL Temp 28 7679583945093 G C STAGE 1 23 G f t AIRTEMP Temp 78 3253939059343 G F AIRTEMP Humid 25 3246839763986 G PASSTHRU Command Example Flash Disk gt PASSTHRU COM3 2400 N 8 1 Passthru operation has begun press ESC ESC ESC to abort AT OK RECORDING Command Example Flash Disk gt RECORDING OFF Stopping Recording is OFF Flash Disk gt RECORDING ON Running Recording is ON SET Command Example The following turns a pump called PUMPON on set it to 1 Flash Disk gt SET PUMPON 1 Flash Disk gt SHOW PUMPON TAG PUMPON 1 G OK Turn a pump called PUMPON off set it to 0 Flash Disk gt SET PUMPON 0 Flash Disk gt SHOW PUMPON TAG PUMPON 0 G OK SHUTDOWN Command Example Flash Disk gt SHUTDOWN Stopping The Xpert application has been shutdown STARTUP Command Example Flash Disk gt STARTUP Xpert has been started STATION Command Example Flash Disk gt STATION sitel123 The stati
6. ccccccccesssceceessececseececessneeecseaececsesaeeeceeaeeceesaeeecsenaeeeceeeeeeseseeeenesaees 186 Soil Mstt Soil Moisture T 187 Soil Temperature SoulT emp scsi hscsecsss cesses nee EE estes Seas Nee ie heb SUA aes 189 OS D Solar Radiation SolRad 0 0 0 cee ccesscecsscceceessececeesaececeseeeeesaececsenaececseeeecsesaeeecseaaeeessneseseeaeeesseaueessseseeenenes 190 P Submersible Pressure Transducer SubPres cccesssecessesceceeseeecssseecesseeeceeaececseseecesseeecseaeeesseeeeeess 192 Tp Tipping Bucket Sensor Precip 0 c cc ecceeceesceescesecesecesecesecseecaeeeseeeneeeeeeseesseceaecsaecsaecsaecsaecaeeeaeseaeeeeeeeeees 193 YDC Volt Meter VoltMeter cccccccscscssesesesesscscscscscevsssecscsvsvevsvssesnsscacecevavessssecavavavavsvsvsnsesacacsvevevsssesesecevavaes 196 Ea YWire Vibrating Wire Cy Wille ite ee ee rr nran nt konnten rnan rea rrarena 197 PROCESSING BLOCKS scious cistiivici win E ve Rs Ses EE E ed EE E E E a 198 vii AV ADIN Sentech eceeeth a Ov nachos ORR RAS tt AE 198 S Accumulator CACCUM asse cvnccs estes seese ereere eee eepe ee rar SeS a E ENRE ieee oe pEr Gidbececetebecdesbelecbeatebecend 200 n 2 AVETABE AVELABE Jime ia gesveerepicee th bout eens E E E dame meas heens bulge uae N E R eases 201 ee TBool Boolean c c ceesescsscscscsssssscecscsvsvecsvsvsusscacececevsvsusecavsvavavavevsvsnsacacavavavevsesecavavavavavsvsnsacacavevevevseseceeaeas 203 CS S CS625 Water
7. Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Display Values This function displays the last value processed for selected items in the setup The Display Block that can be added to the setup identifies which data to show The display appears similar to the one below Stage Meas 12 34 FT G In this example the name of the value is Stage The value is 12 34 The units are FT and the quality is G The name and precision number of digits after the decimal point are both defined by the display block The value units and quality all come from the item the sensor block is connected to in the setup The quality can be G GOOD B BAD or U UNDEFINED Quality status of UNDEFINED generally means that the system has not tried to measure the sensor yet The Meas is a hint to press the SELECT button to force a measurement or update the value This is useful to know what a sensor or value is reading right now Calibrate Calibrate will run a sensor specific calibration routines for sensors These routines set the current value for a sensor enter an offset or follow a specific calibration procedure When Calibrate is selected the system looks for any setup blocks that have a calibration procedure note in Graphical Setup Display blocks must be connected directly to sensor blocks in order for the calibration routines to be detected The system builds a list
8. NOS sll This SLL implements a reporting mechanism for NOS stations using the user login and a data file to determine the report contents In addition this sll adds average and measure blocks that allow data time stamps to be centered on the interval Pflow sll This SLL implements custom pump flow rate and duration calculations PPP sll This SLL adds support for PPP and SLIP protocols as well as support for SSP messaging over related devices Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com PPSaver sll This SLL implements custom power saving measurement and communication algorithms for Poland Power project QFE sll This SLL adds a sensor block used to calculate standard atmosphere based on elevation QuadW sll This SLL adds the QuadW sensor block used to measure a quadrature sensor connected to a Weeder Tech WTDIN M module The WTDIN M module is capable of tracking quadrature at much faster rates than the normal Quad block in the Xpert A single QuadW block reads all four channels of the Weeder Tech module The WTDIN M will retain its measurement of position until power is removed For more information see the document Xpert QuadW SLL User Manual doc available separately RDI sll This SLL Implements RDI protocol Relay sll This SLL contains a block intended to control a relay Th
9. 2 zoom Dg wire Add gt Exit Edit P Insert Select Input RM Young Clear sel Dir Delete Delete Right Rename Now click the Add button at the top of the screen click Processing to show the processing blocks select the Measure block and click OK Now we see another measure block has been placed under the first Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com F zoom Dg wire F Add Exit Measur Although it seems as though we would now hook this measure block up the to the log block already placed in the setup we actually now want to add another log block below the first This is because a setup blocks input cannot accept a signal from more than one block However this results in no loss of functionality as the new log block can be configured to log to the same log file as the previous one So to add this second log block click the Add button select Logging to bring up the logging blocks select the Log block and then click OK we didn t have to select the output from processing as it was already selected from above Now both of the signals from RMYoung will be sampled and logged F zoom Dg wire F Add Exit MeasureLog Changing Block Properties Sensor Block Example Now that all the setup blocks have been placed and the flow of data established all
10. ATDisplay sll The purpose of this SLL is to allow users to display information from and Xpert Xlite LOG file on an Adaptive Technologies display device Adaptive Technologies offers a variety of indoor and outdoor displays that can be used to make information in a 9210 easily accessible to the public AtoN sll Adds ability to select sensor values for inclusion into an AIS Message 8 broadcast over an AtoN Aid to Navigation radio e g the Mando 3 by Alltek AWOS sll This SLL implements custom processing blocks and reporting mechanisms to support AWOS weather stations CoOp sll This SLL implements custom sensor and processing blocks to support CO OP weather stations Sensors include OTT Rain gauge and Stevens Soil moisture probe Processing block for the Geonor Rain gauge is also included DGH sll The purpose of this SLL is to connect any DGH output module typically a 4 20mA or 0 5V to a com port The DGH module simply needs to respond to the following output string 1 AO0 0yyyy yy Followed by a CR Refer to App note 33 for details on use of this Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com block Evapotran sll The purpose of this SLL is to add an Output block to weather stations that will calculate daily potential evapotranspiration ETO GPRS sll This SLL adds support for GPRS cell modem communicat
11. Digital 1 0 Module f z A Channel fi lt ancel Enable Channel 2 bad 160 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com GetTag Inputs Outputs Data Description This block gets the requested data from another station using Sutron Standard Protocol SSP communications The properties for the block specify the port to use for the communications and the path or station name The port can be specified only if you have first set up ports in the Coms SSP CL entry on the Setup tab The path can be a simple station name or a station with full path information included such as patha pathb stationx When the Port selection is TCP IP enter the URL to the destination The Tag property must match the name specified in a COMS Tag in the named station For example Station is measuring water level and Station 2 wants to get the water level for its own use Add a COMS Tag after the measure of the water level in Station 1 Set the COMS TAG Name property as WaterLevel In Station 2 add a GetTag block connected to a measure In the GETTAG properties set the Tag property to WaterLevel Also set the port and path for the link between the two stations Now whenever the GetTag block runs the code will communicate to the named station and ask for WaterLevel The station will reply with the data for WaterLevel and then the GetTag block will provide
12. Warmup ms the number of milliseconds the I O module should wait before taking the measurement This wait time allows the module to settle in order to make an accurate measurement Solar Radiation Analog 1 0 Module Channel Units Calibration Warmup rns Normal Gain Hi Gain x128 Gain With the exception of the 5600 0604 the Hi Gain setting is typically used for solar radiation sensors It is possible to use the x128 setting if the expected range of irradiance is low enough to ensure that the output voltage will be less than 19 mV but due to the high resolution of the analog to digital converters used there is rarely a need for the x128 range 190 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com When using Hi Gain the input voltage should be less than 78mV when using the internal Analog I O Module or the 8080 0007 Analog I O Module and less than 312mV when using the 8080 0003 Analog I O Module When using x128 Gain the input voltage should be less than 19mV when using either the internal Analog I O Module or the 8080 0007 Analog I O Module and less than 39mV when using the 8080 0003 Analog I O Module See the table below for the voltage ranges of Sutron Solar Radiation sensors A check v in a gain column means the selected gain is appropriate for that sensor An x in a gain column means the selected gain is
13. 1 Spectral data SP file 2 Time series data df file The CDIP file format can be found here http cdip ucsd edu nav documents amp sub index amp units metric amp tz UTC amp pub public amp map_st ati 1 2 3 amp xitem product files Sample Spectral Data file File Name sp07601199801091641 Analyzed UTC 2013 06 25 0103 hrs Station Name Sutron Sterling Office Location 35 12 50 N 120 51 60 W Sensor Type Sutron Radar Level Recorder Water Depth m 23 MLLW Sensor Depth m N A Sensor Elev m 230 Shore Normal deg N A Source File df07600199801091708 Sample Length s 2048 Sample Rate Hz 1 0 Hs m 1 27 Tp s 15 38 Dp deg N A Ta s 5 56 freq Band energy Hz width m m Hz 0 015625 0 03125 0 18 0 046875 0 03125 2 75 0 078125 0 03125 0 85 0 109375 0 03125 1 45 0 140625 0 03125 0 90 0 171875 0 03125 1 28 0 203125 0 03125 0 84 0 234375 0 03125 0 56 0 265625 0 03125 1 18 0 296875 0 03125 2 70 0 328125 0 03125 0 21 0 2359375 0 03725 2 32 0 390625 0 03125 2 66 0 421875 0 03125 0 41 0 453125 0 03125 2 00 0 484375 0 03125 1 23 226 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Sample Time series data file Name SCRIPPS PIER Station 07301 Channel description SINGLE POINT Deployment latitude 32 52 000 N Deployment longitude 117 15 400 W Water depth cm 680 Sensor elevation from sea floor cm 230
14. 9210B Xlite Data Logger Operations and Maintenance Manual Part No 8800 1172 Rev 3 18 August 14 2015 Sutron Corporation 22400 Davis Drive Sterling Virginia 20164 TEL 703 406 2800 FAX 703 406 2801 WEB http www sutron com Table of Contents CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION sscsscsssssssscssssssssssssccssssssscsssnessssnescesnsssssssnsssssnessessessessossssnssnesssssessessessosenses 1 PRATURES orsss sni ctesncesdcscnshssvtsnes EE S EEEE EEE E TO E OOE 2 A ELE AAE E TOE E EROE AEE EOE E EOE AE ET 2 J ELANET SAES E EEE TOA E E EA E ATE EA E E E E A T 2 HIGHLIGHTS oeseri sanae eioi areen ANRE Eea arie E SRAN ES EEEREN Ea pae ESE S aa Aenea ania iesea iana 3 EzSetup and Graphical Setup The Key to Flexibility esesseeeseseseseeeseseessssrrrrssesrrsrestenrsseerrssesrensertenrenreneeseeerses 3 VO Modules The Key to Ex pansion esses sssesessdedeensnsdneds sopdtees dope cean Aamen a e E rE SaaS Eaa E a 3 DELS The Key to Modularity scc s lt ssesoc stescssa ea ara a r IRS E S arn annette anges 3 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION si sivisncesevetawesissspsuyccecndosecatnskceucencestgrigdurevevndess ENP EE ee N Eare ESKES N i edtetnentovesscegtessnderevenceseys 4 Modele aa a a n r aes 5 CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED 0 cscssssscrsssessencesesssnensesceneseceseeeseesesescesenseseesenessseseneeseseesesseseesesseseesessesees 7 UNPACKING oeer eneen oa NEOS rE eOr E EOE EEE Ea EOE E SERET ELOS AKEE guasdeuecensuneburendesnevesc
15. HOSTED SERVICE PORT PROTOCOL BY DESCRIPTION Serial and Telnet connections make use of Xterm s proxy REMOTE 52733 TCP Remote Used by Xterm to access and GUI screens and perform Xterm file transfers Xterm also hosts this port in order to support proxy connections Serial and Telnet connections make use of Xterm s proxy AUTO DETECT 52733 UDP Remote Used by Xterm to detect 9210s running on the network SSP 52734 TCP 9210 Used by Remote when it needs to communicate with the 9210 application This port is used locally by the 9210 and there s no reason to open the port on the PC or in a firewall Doing so may create a security risk TELNET 23 TEP Remote Used to support telnet based command line or GUI access screens and file transfer WEB 80 TCP 9210 Used by the 9210 s web and server and Xterm s proxy Xterm web server Configuring the PC modem for use with Xterm Most PC modems will work with Xterm without any additional configuration needed simply select the com port the modem is using from the com port drop down box select the hardware type as modem and set the baud rate if needed and enter the phone number If Xterm gives this dialog AN Unable to open the COM port Please make sure it s not in use by another application Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection
16. High Error warning and status messages All or On Debug error warning status and SSP messages from serial ports 1 through 9 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 295 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Debug Debug error warning and status messages I2C Decoded I2C messages The SSP Decoder displays the time of a message the source and destination the sequence number the operation code the size of the message and partial decoding of the contents of the message SSP Decoder Example Flash Disk gt report SSP2 7 16 38 COM2 RTU gt XCONNECT 4865191 TimeTag 16 09 18 2006 4 00 String BAT Real 12 529999 TimeTag 20 09 18 2006 00 String AirTemp Real 72 799988 TimeTagEnd 0 2 39 COM2 XCONNECT gt RTU 11720692 Ack 1 TimeTagEnd 2 39 COM2 XCONNECT gt RTU 720942 SetClock 6 09 19 2006 17 16 42 2 45 COM2 XCONNECT gt RTU 11721942 CurdataReq 0 17 16 45 COM2 RTU gt XCONNECT 4871422 Curdata 30 BAT 2 0 Nil 1 Alarm OK i ba pe pe pa arn 7 7 AAOH ABOUT Command Example Flash Disk gt ABOUT File Version Xpert 3 2 0 4 Kernel Talig Monitor 5 1 8 Mon 09 15 2008 14 02 13 60 Loader Foleg Remote 3 2 0 4 Xpert exe 3 2 0 4 Windows Engine dll 3 2 0 4 Windows Logger dl 3 2 0 4 Windows
17. Wiring Connect one side of the tipping bucket switch to the selected digital channel Note do not use channel 1 If using channels 7 or 8 you must apply an external pull up resistor to 5V prot 12 will also work Connect the other wire to GND Description This block works with reed wetted reed and magnetic tipping buckets The tipping bucket output hooks to one input of a Digital I O module Set Tip to the amount of rainfall associated with one bucket tip The supported Tips are 0 1mm 0 2mm 0 25mm 0 3mm 0 5mm 1 0mm 0 01 and 0 008 Filter can be increased to eliminate extra readings due to bucket bounce however the default value should suffice for most units The output of this block is the total amount of rain that has fallen since sampling began Tipping Bucket Properties Digital 1 0 Module Channel 2 x Cancel Tip 0 1 mm 7 Reset Filter value 3 lis Reset The tipping bucket block can reset to 0 0 according to a schedule you specify if desired Press the Reset button to bring up the following dialog to configure the reset Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 193 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Reset Options Reset mode Yearly v OK fio sis Cancel FIL 5 Next reset 10 01 2012 00 00 00 Set Reset mode to either None Yearly Monthly or Daily Set Month Day and Hour to indicate the
18. XLITE DIGITAL MODULE B TERMINAL STRIP The connections for the B terminal strip are as follows GND IN HF 1 Channel for frequencies up to 8KHz Cannot be used for tipping bucket digital inputs or shaft encoders VO 2 Standard I O channel GND 1 03 Standard I O channel 1 04 Standard I O channel GND 1 05 Standard I O channel 1 06 Standard I O channel GND VYOLL7 I O channel with programmable level GND IN LL 8 Input only channel with programmable level GND SW D 12 Switched 12 Battery protected with self resetting fuse 500 mA max GND PROT 12 Protected 12 protected with self resetting fuse 500 mA max RS485A Idles High Standard RS 485 nomenclature this would be B RS485B Idles Low Standard RS 485 nomenclature this would be A SDI 12 GND SDI 12 Connections SDI 12 12V SDI 12 Connections protected with self resetting fuse 500 mA max SDI 12 DATA SDI 12 Connections Note The 9210 provides a very weak bias to maintain the RS 485 idle condition If the connecting device is expecting strong bus biasing then external biasing resistors can be added one resistor between the RS485B and GND terminals with a second resistor between RS485A and PROT 12 terminals For mild biasing use 100K resistors For much stronger biasing use 10K resistors 264 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporatio
19. which is a 1 byte binary encoded number indicating the number of minutes ago the most recent data was recorded Note that the number of minutes is calculated about 15 seconds prior to transmission MEASUREMENT Measurement data collected by Satlink Logger This data contains only those measurements set up to be included in the scheduled transmission The data values are 3 byte binary encoded signed DATA numbers allowing a range of 131072 to 131071 The actual 6 bit binary encoded format is described later The value transmitted is taken directly from the 32 value measurement buffer in Satlink Logger The value transmitted will be value 10 RightDigits The string will be sent if the data was never measured or was erased The number of values sent for each measurement is set separately for each measurement in the Scheduled Transmissions Num values to Tx field Note that this is different from the 8210 where the num values to Tx was the same for each sensor As a result Satlink Logger sends all the required values for one sensor most recent first before proceeding to the next measurement In the 8210 values were interleaved BATTLOAD BATTLOAD is appended if the Append Quality box is checked This is a 1 byte binary encoded number representing the battery voltage of Satlink Logger under load during the last transmission If the battery reading is zero then that is the first transmission since bootup The range of the number will
20. A block with an input can accept data from another block and a block with an output can send data to another block To see this more clearly we ll zoom in on our example using the Zoom button on the top of the screen Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 2 zoom Dg wire Add gt Exit Input Count iy 115 We can now clearly see the inputs and outputs each block has available along with which are being used and which aren t It is now evident for example that only the pressure from the BP block is being sampled not the temperature and that only the maximum value of this pressure is being logged Block Connectability The graphical setup allows any two blocks to be connected together as long as the first has an output and the second an input However this does not necessarily mean that any constructed setup will work For example even though the system will allow a sensor block to be hooked directly to a log block no data will necessarily be logged unless there is an active block to control when processing takes place active blocks are those with darkened borders see the example in the next section Active Blocks and Push Pull Active blocks are blocks that make the other blocks connected to them execute or perform their function This results in data being pushed and pulled from and into the other b
21. AIO 1 Ch 1 02 RH AT Humidity New Sensor New Measurement H Graphical Setup 1 0 Modules Log files 7 sel sH E EzSetup Measurements l Delete URES Lo vect vgLog Graphical Setup I O Modules The Key to Expansion The 9210 epitomizes the concept of expandability By itself the 9210 has a built in 10 channel 16 bit A D an 8 channel digital module a SDI 12 v1 3 port three RS 232 ports and one RS 232 RS485 port If this isn t sufficient connect external analog or digital modules using the I2C port Support for a nearly unlimited number of analog and digital I O modules makes sure running out of I O is never an issue DLLs The Key to Modularity The software is modular and utilizes Windows DLLs Dynamic Linked Libraries DLLs are additional software components that can be added to the system at any time without having to update the main software This makes adding features that were not available when the unit was purchased easy simply download the new DLL from the Sutron web page and send it to the 9210 This might be done for example to add support for a new sensor or to add some newly released communication capability to the unit Some customers can even create their own DLLs using Microsoft Visual C and a Software Development Kit SDK provided by Sutron Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http w
22. DIMENSIONS sccsssssssosscsscsscsscsssnessssnescessossescsssnsssssnensessssossossnsssssnessesscssossossnssssssesssssessossoees 315 AMALITE DATA LOGGER ssicwsy sieve cucessusevesh e a E e A E E E 316 EXTERNAE VO MODULES ss irinn N S E E a N E E A N 317 EXTERNAL MODEM sanien N R E a S 318 Chapter 1 Introduction FEATURES Sutron s 9210 is designed to be the heart of a wide range of remote monitoring and control systems The 9210 is a highly modular design that is scalable to handle simple to complex requirements Key Features Intuitive EzSetup and a graphical block oriented setup Unlimited expansion with I O Modules Software extensibility with DLL libraries Features Built in high performance 10 channel 16 bit A D module Built in 8 channel digital module Built in 2 line backlit LCD display with 3 navigation buttons USB and SD card support for log memory expansion Multiple independent log files Changes to setup do not affect logged data Modular design build the logger from modules offered by Sutron Expandable additional modules can be added as needed Scalable handles simple as well as complex sites Low power consumption sleep modes with low quiescent power low operating power Battery operated each module operates off of 10 to 16 VDC Wide temperature operation 40 to 60C High reliability and robust no fuses fault tolerant lightning protection Multiple telemetry
23. LONE Lt IEEE AEE E AES EE EEE OE SEEE EATS E ASE EEE A EE 266 ADD ON ANALOG I O MODULE 8080 0003 ns ssssssssesessissssssssesessrsssrsssseseeressnsnseseseenisssnsseneseenenensesenesnenenensesenete 267 Features merer enie aE E RT E E AE E ER EE EE rA T AE E S EE EE 267 Specifica onsa e AE rs ives E E uaa ste A a lente stevia AE E dese E ESS aber ee 268 Opetational States iini R AEE tae eed ia ed A EEE AEE a ERE EIE PE ERE ESY 269 RUNNA ss oie icc etare S EE E EE EE EEEE E E ERE S ESE EE E E EE EEE A 269 SO pida en or ra Ee aera rE E dined as Sache EEE E EEEE E E E E EE E E a 269 Inputs OUtpUtS eet oe Sh eere r E Reheat eed EE EEEE E A E ee A a 269 JEn E E E E E EE EE EE EE E A eats 269 O EAE oi IEE E E E EEE E ee a 269 A log Meas remenis n sieseio oreesa e EEEE TEE EEEE E EE as ER eae este 269 ACCUTAC Yo a e a a e EE EOE EEEE E KEE EE E E EEE E E E A E a 270 Example Configurations Using the 8080 0003 Analog I O Module ssssseesseeseseseseeesssreesssrerrsserrrnresreeresreresse 271 ADD ON ANALOG I O MODULE 8080 0007 0 cee ee ceeecesecssecseecneecseeeseeeeeeeeeseeesecssecsaecsaecsaecsaecaaecseseaeseneeeeeeneeees 272 LANTI E E E duatene owt ceatnedsdecbanceuhuaswenuecs E E ET 272 Transient Protection Installation Note ee ceesseceseceeseeceseeeenceceeeeeneeceseeseacecueeesaeecsaceeeaeecaeeseaeecaseseaeeceaeeneneees 272 Specifica OMS sess esses sore sones e desu deucescos foaesee put eekeusdes snes secovnvovesae duvees
24. POOR SSeS SSeS Soc cSS Offset time hose SS SS RSSe SSeS SSS SsS S55 Sensor Name TA pe oe See eee eee ee eenenenaaenae PC 2 PC 1 li a ll a edd Interval HSS SSS Se Se SSS SSeS Se SS SSS SSeS Offset time SSSSSS SSS SS ers ses T TST esac TSS Sere Sensor Name PC eSSsSsSsSsssSss2Ss5 4 2 9 2298 SSSSSs HG 2 HG 1 aa a Raa ee Interval WHSTSRSSSSSSSSS SSS Ss SSS sess SSSR SS SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS SS Ssscas Offset time PSS SSS SS SSS SS SSS SSS SS SSS SS SSeS Ss Se see esse ses asssesssHas Sensor Name HG Note the names HG PC TA are the measurement labels assigned by the person setting up Satlink Logger These did not get transmitted Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 309 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SIX BIT BINARY ENCODED FORMAT The six bit binary format is used to encode numbers into displayable ASCII characters Notice that fractional numbers cannot be represented so for instance a battery voltage of 13 04 volts set up with 2 right digits will be sent as 1304 A 1 byte encoded number can range from 32 to 31 A 2 byte encoded number can range from 2048 to 2047 A 3 byte encoded number can range from 131072 to 131071 Binary encoded numbers are always sent most significant bytes first The number itself is broken down into 6 b
25. The Web Server check box selects whether or not XTerm should act as a web server proxy for the 9210 When this box is checked any web pages on the 9210 will be made available as if they were actually hosted on your PC For instance in Internet Explorer you could enter the URL Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 117 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com http localhost to access the 9210 s homepage If your PC is on a LAN WAN or the Internet then the 9210 s home page can be reached by other users by entering http your PorURL Auto Update The auto update checkbox causes XTerm to continuously request screen updates When the checkbox is clear XTerm will conserve the 9210 s power and CPU by only requesting updates for a short time after a key press or a touch Station Operations Right clicking the mouse on the right hand pane where the Right click for more options is displayed will bring up the Station Operations menu The menu has options to perform a Startup Shutdown or Reboot A confirmation dialog will be displayed before any of these commands are sent to the station If the operation cannot be supported due to insufficient access rights or a lack of support in the RTU firmware a message will be displayed Startup The startup option may be used to start up the main application of the RTU ex Xpert exe This will also re configure the Autoexec bat file on the s
26. and all standard sll files those files with sll extension that do not appear in the extra sll directory Of course you may also use one or more sll files in the extra sll directory 110 Start hyperterm or other terminal program on a PC Set the baud rate to 115 200 Connect the COM serial port to the Xlite If you intend to transfer files via ethernet connect the Xlite to a network that supports DHCP using an ethernet cable 111 Power up the Xlite Press Ctrl C in response to the message Press Ctrl C to skip execution of Autoexec bat You should then see Bypassing flash disk Autoexec bat running Remote in the next few lines If you do not simply repeat this step until you do 112 If you intend to use ethernet and the ethernet port lights are off issue the command lanon If you intend to perform serial transfers close the terminal program In any case run XTerm and connect to the Xlite 113 Press the XTerm File Transfer button on the right of the XTerm display This will bring up a dialog showing a list of Xlite files in the right pane and a list of PC files in the left pane Make sure the right pane is showing files in the Flash Disk subdirectory 114 Change the directory in the left pane to the directory containing the upgrade files and select the files you want to send to the Xlite note you can select multiple files by holding down the Ctrl key with each new selection 115 Press the gt butt
27. button at the bottom of the screen Flash Disk segar log 49920 Yes Flash Disk log lag 65536 Yes Log Properties For each log file this window lists the name of the file location name log the size of the file and whether or not the file should wrap You can create a new dialog by pressing New or edit Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com the properties of a log file by highlighting the file and pressing Edit In both cases the following dialog is shown Log File Properties free 27271 KB Size bytes A wra 262144 _ Ignore Bad Datz Expt Opt OK Cancel The file size is the maximum size of the log file in bytes Wrap specifies what should happen once the file has been filled up to its maximum size If wrapping is set to Yes and the file fills up the system will delete some of the old data to make room for the new data This way the log file will always be full of the most recent data If wrapping is set to No and the file fills up the system will not store the additional data in the log and the new data will be lost Note that Wrap can only be set when creating a new log Ignore Bad Data when checked means don t log any data unless it has good quality G Pressing the Expt Opt button will bring up the Export Log Options dialog See below for a description of thi
28. http www sutron com Sensor offset SNS Primary water level WL Aquatrak sigma SIG Aquatrak outlier cnt OUT Aquatrak temp 1 AQT1 Aquatrak temp 2 AQT2 Wind speed WS Wind direction WD Wind gust GST Air temperature AT Water temperature WT Barometric pressure BP Battery voltage BAT For NFDRS the labels tell the formatter how to format the data The following table shows what labels are recognized by the NFDRS formatter and how they are formatted Sensor Label Format Rainfall PCH XX XX 10 Min Avg Wind Spd USH XXX 10 Min Avg Wind Dir UDH XXX Air Temperature TAH XXX Fuel Temperature MTH XXX 10 Min Avg Rel Hum XRH XXX Battery Voltage VBH XX X Barometric Pressure PAH XX XX Peak Wind Direction UGX XXX Peak Wind Speed UPH XXX Fuel Moisture MMH XXX Solar Radiation RDH XXXX For INSAT the labels are used to identify the sequence and formatting parameters to use when formatting the message For each label an id offset and scale are associated The standard INSAT message encodes the id in an unsigned 4 bit integer and encodes the data value in an unsigned 10 bit integer The id is a unique integer from 0 to 19 and is used to determine order note however that since INSAT only uses 4 bits to encode ids ids appear to start over after 15 this typically requires that decoders consider position in addition to id Encoded values are computed as in the following B
29. normal sense occurs when the box is not checked In this case Move is selected when the input Point is lower than Set Point by more than Deadband Move is selected when the input Point is higher than Set Point by more than Deadband When the Invert Outputs option is checked Move is selected instead of Move and vice versa Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 217 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Set Point Control SetPoint Inputs Level Outputs Control Description This block compares the values coming in on its input with Set Point and outputs a 1 or O depending if the condition under Trigger is met The Deadband allows hysteresis to be added so that the output will not keep change unless the input moves away from the Set Point by a meaningful amount This block implements a function similar to that of a household thermostat For example say we want to output a value of 1 if the input from an Air Temp sensor block crosses 40 C except that we want there to be a deadband so that the output won t change from 0 to 1 until the input reaches 41 C and the output won t change from 1 to 0 until the output reaches 39 C We would set Set Point to 40 Deadband to 1 and Trigger to Above Set Point Properties Set Point b Hl Deadband b sa Cancel Trigger above Below 218 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the
30. return for maximum common mode rejection of bridge sensors One switched battery sensor power output Industrial temperature range operation 40 to 60 C Multiple sampling rates and digital filtering Ability to make resistance measurements without additional external resistors Viewing the card from the front the plug assignments are as follows 4 Gjl G 2 G 3 G 4 G 5 6 Auxl EX N IG G Bat SwBat fae 34 13 54 5 i G Ground Bat 12 volts out SwBat switched 12 volts out Aux1 switch to ground EX negated excitation voltage NC No Connections Differential channel pairs are 1 2 3 4 5 6 The higher voltage line goes to the odd line Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 267 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Specifications Parameter Min Typ Max Units Input 25 C 0 0015 IFS 40 C to 60 C 0 03 FS Ratiometric Error Pf 0 0015 FS CMRR ee fe 60Hz Rejection 100 B Rin Single Ended 20 Meg Q Differential 20 Meg Q Common Mode 20 Meg Q Excitation Range so po fo Output Current Oo ooo o Ee mA Output Impedance juo lg Absolute Error 40 C to 60 C 0 03 FS Ratiometric Error Pf 0 005 WFS Frequency o dlo Hz Sensor Power VBAT from Data Logger Curent P00 Fina Protection Static Discharge a S 2000 Volts Conducted 400 Volts Error which will not cancel when two measurements are expresse
31. sec 110 2f Smart Modem Ack Delay sec 3 B 1200 Baud Retries sec 3 2 Slow amp Smart Below is a description of each option and is the same description provided when the corresponding help button is pressed Carrier Delay seconds When the com port is set for RADIO communications this is how long to key the transmitter assert DTR to warm up the radio before sending data With Sutron radios typically 1 second or less is needed but this may need to be increased if hardware repeaters are used in the network as each hard repeater in the network needs time to warm up Default 1 sec Reply Delay seconds This is how long the XTerm will wait for a reply before timing out This delay includes the time needed for all retries to occur so it s typically set to the value of AckDelay Retries Default 10 seconds Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Ack Delay seconds This is how long to wait for a response to a message aka an acknowledgement before attempting a retry The default value is 3 seconds which is suitable for a 115 2K baud direct connection 10 seconds is recommended for a single hop 1200 baud system connection It should be increased if lower baud rates or store and forward repeater hops are necessary Retries More precisely this is the total number of tries When an SSP request is ma
32. simply define them in the Coms SSP CL entry in the Setup tab Tthe system will then reconfigure remote to start running the new configuration immediately and update the autoexec bat for the next power cycle The Coms Tag block in the graphical setup is used to name SSP cur data points in the system and to specify speech phrases for Voice Modem if defined The Alarm block in the graphical setup is used to define what levels are considered in alarm which may trigger alerts transmissions over SSP CL comms devices Alarm A condition when one or more sensors exceed their alarm limits Alert A condition which when triggered will cause the system to transmit immediate messages Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com An Alert can be configured to occur when a sensor goes in to alarm out of alarm or both When an Alert occurs the Alarm Status on the Main menu turns to ALERT The system will then attempt to send an alarm message to the various configured devices By default the software will try a Direct Connect first then a LOS Radio a Speech Voice modem and then finally a Data Modem If at any time the ALERT is acknowledged the system status will change to ALARM or NORMAL and the transmissions will stop OFF will be displayed if alarm transmissions have been disabled by for instance a voice modem user or a Basic program The Di
33. 1 Connect to I O 2 103 Connect to I O 4 105 Connect to In 8 T O 6 Connect to I O 7 RS 485A Connect to middle of 3 9Kohm and 1Kohm divider from SW D 12 to GND SW D 12 Connects to 3 9K resistor of above divider RS 485B SDI 12 Data SDI 12 1 Mohn resistor to SDI 12 12 DATA Setup File The Setup File branch in the setup tab is used to manage the setup file containing the system setup and configuration The setup file contains all of the system s settings except for station name Xpert display contrast settings and log export historical data Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status Log files a Satlink Self test E E Open Save As Append Users New Open Save As New The New option is used to reset all settings to a default state with a name specified by the user After selecting New the system prompts for the name of the new setup file If the file specified exists the system warns that it will be overwritten Open The Open option is used to open existing setup files Save As The Save As option is used to save current settings to a file with a different name A large number of setups can be stored limited only by the available Flash memory To save a setup under a new name select the Save As and click Edit The following window will appear Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www su
34. A DB9 M F serial cable for I O Modules Optional I O modules Optional termination boards System enclosure box Lead acid battery Solar panel regulator Other Optional Items One or more of the following might also be included Analog digital or SDI 12 sensors Modem Line of Site Radio or Satellite transmitter Antenna 8 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com INITIAL CHECKOUT Powering Up Connect power 10 16Vdc to the PWR IN GND and 12 connections These connections are also labeled A21 and A22 When power is applied the 9210 will perform some important initializations for about a minute and then flash a brief message on the LCD Verify Xlite Display Works To verify the display works press any key and release it The system will turn on the display and then display the station name date time recording status data and menus If no other keys are pressed the system will turn off the display after a few minutes Adjust the Contrast optional To adjust the contrast press the SELECT button and then use the RIGHT or LEFT buttons while holding SELECT to adjust the contrast up RIGHT or down LEFT Verify XTerm Works XTerm is a PC program used to setup and test a 9210 See Chapter 6 for the details on how to install and run XTerm Verify I O Modules Work The 9210 comes with three built in I O modules a display an
35. Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com DATA TAB The Data tab shows all the data values that have been tagged with either a Coms Tag or FieldVar setup block If this window is empty it means that neither Coms Tags nor FieldVar were used in the setup The data in this window are the values that will be transmitted in response to a request for current data If the data results from a Coms Tag that is connected to an Alarm block the Alarm status will show up under the column labeled Alarm This window provides three controls Refresh Measure and Change Refresh updates the window with the latest information When the current selection is a Coms Tag Measure causes the system to make a live reading of the sensor to which the Coms Tag is connected see Note below and Change alters the current value for the value that is displayed Change will also kickback the value to blocks to which it is connected e g if a Coms Tag is connected to a Constant Block change will alter the value of the constant When the current selection is a FieldVar Measure has no effect and Change changes the value of the displayed property Main Setup Sensors Log Data l Status AT 74 33 RH 23 21 Note Coms Tag blocks can only measure sensors with which they are inline if there are no active blocks between the Coms Tag and sensor block Generally speaking this means
36. Data type Water column cm Gauge type Sutron Radar Level Recorder Sample rate Hz 1 000 Field software version N A Field station type N A Method of analysis N A Radio modem no Energy basin processing no Surge filter processing no Number of records 2048 Start time 20020201000514 UTC End time 20020201011913 UTC Sample length hh mm ss 00 34 08 483 5 483 5 476 1 467 5 462 7 463 6 462 3 465 3 479 1 484 8 480 9 473 5 469 2 473 1 479 1 474 8 462 3 456 7 458 0 465 7 480 0 489 1 483 5 469 2 459 3 463 1 474 8 485 2 485 6 476 462 7 452 3 454 9 467 9 483 5 482 6 472 2 467 0 472 2 481 7 483 5 483 5 476 1 467 5 462 7 463 6 462 3 465 3 479 1 484 8 480 9 473 5 469 2 473 1 479 1 474 8 462 3 456 7 458 0 465 7 480 0 489 1 483 5 469 2 459 3 463 1 474 8 485 2 485 6 476 1 462 7 452 3 454 9 467 9 483 5 482 6 472 2 467 0 472 2 481 7 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 227 2 1 XY Function XYFunct Inputs X Y Outputs Z Description The XY Function block is for doing math between two inputs to produce an output value The two inputs may be from a single block or from two different blocks To use a constant in an equation for example to perform x 4 use the output from a Constant sensor block as one of the inputs or use the Polynomial block The Units button will set the outp
37. L G DCE COM RJ11 318 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 5600 0600 190 5600 0601 190 5600 0602 190 5600 0603 190 5600 0605 190 56 109 Submersible Pressure Transducer 192 8080 0002 1 5 275 8080 0003 Analog I O Module configuration examples 271 8080 0003 1 5 267 8080 0005 1 5 279 8080 0006 1 160 8080 0007 Analog I O Module configuration examples 274 8080 0007 1 5 272 9 9210 models 5 9210 0000 1 5 279 A access levels 20 accounts managing 59 overview 20 accuracy Analog I O module 270 ADC block 136 42 Air Temperature sensor block 134 Air Temperature Relative Humidity sensor block 136 Alarm block 25 198 alarms block 198 configuring 25 42 53 161 198 237 239 249 Digital I O Module features 275 XLite Digital Module features 265 alerts 25 42 Analog block 136 42 Analog I O Module accuracy 270 inputs 269 measurements 269 operational states 269 outputs 269 plug assignments 267 272 Append Lat Long 304 307 309 Append Quality 306 309 appending random transmissions 53 self timed transmissions 51 Aquatrak block 184 ASCII Column Formatting 311 ASCII Sensor Formatting 312 AT RH block 136 Auto Update 118 autoexec bat 130 286 Average Block 201 B bad data quality 68 Barometric Pressure sensor block 143 battery Internal Battery block 1
38. LogMgr dl1 3 2 0 4 Windows LZ0O d1 3 2 0 4 Windows SDI dlJ 3 25004 Windows Utils dl 3 2 0 4 Windows Deflib sll 3 2 0 4 Get Command Example The Get command shows the data logged picking up where the last Get left off or end of log if the first time run Flash Disk gt GET SSP LOG 10 26 2005 13 45 00 STAGE 1 20 G ft 10 26 2005 13 45 00 AIRTEMP 78 20 GF 10 26 2005 14 00 00 STAGE 1 21 G ft 10 26 2005 14 00 00 AIRTEMP 78 25 GF 10 26 2005 14 15 00 STAGE 1 22 G ft 10 26 2005 14 15 00 AIRTEMP 79 10 GFE 10 26 2005 14 30 00 STAGE 1 20 G ft 296 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 10 26 2005 14 30 00 AIRTEMP 79 00 GFE 10 26 2005 14 45 00 STAGE 1 20 G ft 10 26 2005 14 45 00 AIRTEMP 78 60 GE The following shows the most recent data followed by older data Flash Disk gt GET NEWEST REVERSE SSP LOG 10 26 2005 14 45 00 AIRTEMP 78 60 GE 10 26 2005 14 45 00 STAGE 1 20 G ft 10 26 2005 14 30 00 AIRTEMP 79 00 GFE 10 26 2005 14 30 00 STAGE 1 20 G ft 10 26 2005 14 15 00 AIRTEMP 79 10 GFE 10 26 2005 14 15 00 STAGE 22 G ft 10 26 200
39. Measurement L Graphical Setup Sampling Interval 00 00 01 on 1 0 Modules Samples to Average fo as Log files E a L Satlink Measurements per Log p ves Self test M Enable Log ID iis Setup File LakeTop ssf hd Add the new measurement interval by clicking the plus sign next to EZSetup Measurements then highlight New Measurement and click EDIT From here all parameters for setting up a schedule are shown For the purpose of this setup the default values already meet the schedule so just click OK Now that the schedule is defined a plus sign appears to show that sensors may be added Click this plus sign to expand the tree then select New Sensor and click EDIT 102 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Main Setup Sensors Data J Log Status Sensor Configuration Hl Basic Name Level va Coms SSP CL Sensor QuadSe 7 More j Cancel E E2Setup Measurements 01 00 15 00 Next 00 00 00 Milog C avg DSP SAT M ST ORo Ores New Measurement com fracl O AMi Bta B 7 Graphical Setup acm DIGI a 4 1 0 Modules value onkno Modute 1 7 AN Sange k Slope p fed Channel 2 7 Edit Offset ob Ea For this example select a name Level select the sensor as a QuadSE notice the Log and DSP display on LCD are already chec
40. Next is the measure block This tells the system how often to take readings 106 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Directly after the measure is the MIN MAX block This block also has a schedule that tells the system how often it should compute minimums and maximums every 24 hours starting at midnight in this example The rest of the blocks are wired to the output of the MIN MAX block The values are displayed on the LCD and logged The only output not wired is the COUNT output this output tells the number of samples used for calculations and was not needed for this setup Notice the blocks have been renamed renaming the blocks will help in maintaining the setup by making it easier to read In this example no satellite transmissions have been defined Adding transmission parameters is easy Simply select the output data to transmit by selecting a point typically a log block and selecting its output Then add a self timed parameter or random trigger block as needed Unlike the EZSetup every block in the Graphical setup must have the parameters defined separately EZSetup will pass through many of the parameters from one screen to another because all data is maintained and entered in a specific order In the Graphical setup the order of the blocks is not known and in some cases one output may go to several other blocks For example in t
41. Period the greater the accuracy of the frequency because of averaging but the less instantaneous the reading with be When the frequency is being sampled frequently by a Measure or Average block it might make sense to only take one time count reading from the I O module every pass and calculate the frequency from the current and previous readings For a sampling interval of 1 second this would be the same as having the Period set to 1 000 If this is desired un check Take Two Readings at a Time and set Period to 1 000 The 9210 will use the previous reading as long as it was taken within the time range of Period Period 4 of the current time Be careful how you set Period when Take Two Readings is unchecked The smaller you make Period the more likely the system will still take two measurements even though Take Two Readings is not checked You should not make Period longer than the sampling interval of your measure or average block or you will slow down data to the block If you always want to use the previous reading to compute the frequency regardless of when it was measured use the COUNTER block The block scales the outputs according to the values of S ope and Offset using the equation output reading slope offset The user can change the units for all the outputs by changing the Units field to the desired value The block supports calibration from the Sensors page and the Xlite front panel display For the calibration the us
42. Port Baud 115200 To i TCPIP URL TELNET B From Pe To C Hedirectar a From User Name MV 640x480 Name P d oaii Telnet Port Password Phone 7 23 Phone Sample Command Line Create Desktop Shortcut TelPort Term COM1 115200 Exit Oo A Use the controls on the screen to select the com port baud rate type of connection direct modem radio TCP IP Telnet 640X480 big screen mode when selected and related values Setup is an advanced option that allows the SSP timings to be modified to accommodate different types of connections Select OK and XTerm will begin operation with the type of communications selected Connection types are as follows Direct Serial cable from Xpert to PC Modem Allows XTerm to dial out on a pc modem to a Xpert with modem Radio Allows XTerm to control a line of site radio to talk to a Xpert TCP IP Allows XTerm to communicate with a networked Xpert2 If the Xpert2 is connected to a firewall and TCP IP access is desired than the firewall must be configured such that connections on TCP port 52733 will be allowed to the Xpert2 This option may also be used to connect to an Xpert indirectly through another copy of Xterm running on a PC at the IP address specified Useful to assist other users since all actions performed on remote pc are viewed at the pc connected to the Xpert 9210 Telnet Allows XTerm to communicate with a networked Xpert2 running V
43. Select All 05 16 2002 4434419005 MSDOS SYS 10 NTDETECT COM 34724 11 2 Satlink sll 134144 12720 2002 13 17 12 Delete 4 gt 4 gt Get from Xpert Sel aij Delete gt lt Run Sel All Delete Run The list on the left top for PocketPC shows the files on the PC The list on the right bottom for PocketPC shows the files on the 9210 The folder that is displayed is changed by simply double clicking on a folder in the window Selecting the three dots control at the top of the window next to the folder name or in the list of files will go to the parent folder All operations on the file lists can be selected from the file transfer popup menu shown in the images above This menu is accessed on the desktop PC by right clicking in the list This menu is accessed on the PocketPC by tapping and holding the stylus on the list for a second or two The desktop PC version also provides buttons to access these operations To move a file from the PC to the 9210 select the file in the PC window and either press the button or select Send to 9210 from the menu To move a file from the 9210 to the PC select Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 115 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com the file in the 9210 window and either press the lt button or select Get from 9210 from the menu On the desktop PC select multiple files by pressing CTRL
44. States are Binary 1 switch on ground Binary 0 switch off Pull up to internal V depends on channel see appendix for detailed specs Binary Output Properties Digital 1 0 Module Je Invert Output Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 247 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Pulse Out PulseOut Inputs In Outputs Out Description This block is used to generate a pulse on a digital output for a short duration defined by Pulse time A new pulse will be output each time the block is executed with an input value that is non zero The normal state of the digital output pulse will be OFF ON OFF If invert is selected the pulse will be ON OFF ON Where ON input grounded OFF Pull up to internal V depends on channel see appendix for detailed specs Note any pulse in progress when recording is stopped is terminated and so may end prematurely Pulse Properties Digital 1 0 Module p x OK Channel 2 Cancel Pulse Width fs fi Invert Pulse 7 Use the Digital I O Module and Channel properties to set the module and channel Do not use channel 1 or channel 8 Set the width of the desired pulse in the Pulse Width property fractional seconds are accepted e g 0 1 NOTE If using a digital io module with version 2 03 or earlier DO NOT use pulses of 1 second or less e g use 1 1 or more Starting with 2 5 more accurate
45. Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Thermistor 4 wire Select differential measurement set the excitation channel to be different from the input channel Connect the sensor as shown below Select an odd number channel 1 3 9 and an odd number excitation channel 1 3 7 The even number pair is the next higher number so in the example below if the channel selected is 1 then the EVEN channel is 2 The same thing applies for the excitation channel if the excitation channel selected is 3 then the EVEN excitation channel is 4 URE E WREF Even excitation pair Selected excitation channel 1 10 Kohm completion Selected odd Excitation Channel WIRE Even Channel Pair Selected Channel 1 Thermistor Selected odd Channel wre nono Double Volts Set the excitation channel to be different from input channel DoubleVolts is intended for making ratio metric measurements for a potentiometer and other similar ratio metric devices The output value is the ratio of the input voltage excitation voltage Since both voltages are measured the measurement is called DoubleVolts and the exact value of the excitation is not needed measurements should be between 0 and 1 Agnd or full scale aie EXCITATION CHANNEL Potentiometer CHANNEL AGND Description The Analog block is a general purpose setup block for making voltage current resista
46. Tag waterLevel a Cancel Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 249 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com MISCELLANEOUS BLOCKS Display Display Inputs Input Outputs Output Description The Display block is used select data that gets displayed on the I2C Display The data displayed is the last measured value for the block connected to the display block The data is displayed at the requested precision right digits with the selected Label Display Properties Label LEVEL a Right Digits fd k Cancel GUI Placement This block can be placed into the setup anywhere data is passing thru However if the intended use is to calibrate sensors as well the block must be connected directly to the sensor block 250 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Fvar __ Field Variable FieldVar Inputs Input Outputs Output pass through Description The FieldVar block is used to tag properties in the setup so that these properties can be changed in the same way as other system tags ComsTags Basic tags etc System tags can be changed via the Data tab via a Basic program via the set command and via SSP command Note that changing the value of a property is reserved for users having setup access priveleges The FieldVar
47. The VW DSP can be used by itself to measure temperature and pressure from two vibrating wire sensors e g those made by Geokon The VW Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com DSP can also be wired to one or more Canary Systems MiniMuxes providing the capability to measure from additional sensors in increments of 16 or 32 per MiniMux VWireMux sll The purpose of this SLL is to allow user to log multiple pressure transducer and optional thermistor readings by using a Canary Systems MiniMux digital switch Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com PREPARING FOR SET UP This section discusses various issues important to know before setting up the 9210 Analyze the System Chapters 3 and 4 describe all the elements that go into setting up the 9210 Before jumping in to setting up the unit it s useful to think about the nature of the problem the 9210 is being used to solve The following questions can help guide that thinking What data needs to be collected What sensors will give this data What is the raw output of these sensors DC voltage AC voltage frequency Serial etc Can the built in I O handle all of these sensors or are additional modules needed How often should this data be collected What processing is n
48. World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com amp Solar Radiation Accumulator SRAcc Inputs SolRad Outputs Accumulation Accum Sunshine HrsSun Description This block is designed to do the measurement and processing of data from a solar radiation sensor in order to compute the accumulated value and duration of sunshine The user set properties of time interval and sample interval Smpl Intvl control the execution of the block Sample Interval sets how often the block will ask for data from the block connected to it Typically this block will be a solar radiation block but it can also be a voltage block or any other input processing block that is not scheduled The Time and Interval control when the accumulator is reset back to 0 With an interval of 24 00 00 and a time of 00 00 00 the accumulator would be reset every 24 hours at midnight Hourly resets or resets at times other than midnight are also possible The basic computation of the block is Accum Accum sample smpl_intvl 3600 smpl_intvl in seconds This calculation is done every Smpl Intvl number of seconds If the sensor connected to the block has output units of W m2 the output of the block will be WHr M2 So the block adds the dimension of Hr to the units of sensor it is connected to You can set the desired units for the output using the Units property field The Acc Thrshld Accumulator Threshold sets the threshold for accumula
49. a hexadecimal number 8 digits long assigned by NESDIS EUMETSAT or some other authorizing agency Comm Port The Com Port property identifies the COM port to which Satlink is connected Satlink connects to the comm port using a standard DB9 serial cable Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Local Time Offset The Local Time Offset property defines the difference between the current local time and UTC Universal Time Coordinated This offset is sent to Satlink at recording start The offset is specified in number of minutes and may be negative The 9210 uses the local time offset and the UTC time received from Satlink to set the 9210 s clock In addition the offset is sent to Satlink Satlink 2 s use this value to determine local time Initialize Satlink The Initialize Satlink check box controls whether or not to send transmission settings to Satlink at the start of recording When this box is checked the transmission settings times rates channels etc are sent to the Satlink whenever the unit is started otherwise settings are not sent to the Satlink but assume instead that Satlink has been configured by some other program e g Satlink Communicator Self Timed Dialog The Self Timed dialog allows the setting of the Self Timed transmission properties The properties correspond to settings that will be sent to Satlink to configu
50. amp Htr AIO Chan Post cal delay m f feal The calibration procedure involves periodically turning on a heating element to generate a known heat flux that can be measured to obtain a correction for measurements of unknown environmental heat fluxes HAAA pg snared M Relay j Specify how often to perform a self calibration in Interval hours and the length of the calibration in Duration minutes Specify the value of the completion resistor in line with the heater power supply 10 ohm typically Specify the Rself value provided by the manufacturer s data sheet with the sensor Specify the digital I O module and output channel used to control power to the heater in Htr DIO Mod Chan Specify the analog input channel to which the resistor tap is connected in Htr AIO Chan Use Post cal delay m to specify the number of minutes to extend the calibration cool down period Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 165 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com When Shared Relay is checked the system assumes the relay this HeatFlux block uses to control power to the heater is shared with other HeatFlux blocks There may be only one shared relay When Shared Relay is not checked then the system assumes the relay for this block is not shared Note when sharing a relay make sure the measurement schedules and Interval and Duration propert
51. analog and a digital module If separate I O modules are purchased connect the I O modules together and then use a 9 pin cable to connect them to the PC port To verify all I O modules are working select the tab labeled Setup If it is not visible as one of the tabs use the scroll buttons to the right of the tabs to bring it into view Now press the in front of the I O Module branch A list of the installed modules connected to the system is displayed If the in front of I O Modules is not there the system was not able to detect any I O modules If external I O modules are connected check the cable If not make sure that nothing is plugged into the I2C connection Refer to the troubleshooting section for help to get the system to find the I O modules NOTE If using external IO modules the Xlite modules MUST be configured as module number 1 as the system will take certain readings from these modules about the system All external modules should be renumbered starting at 2 from the IO module list in the Setup tab See Naming I O Modules for details on renumbering XLite IO modules are the LCD Analog IO and Digital IO and can be identified by a serial number of Lxxxxx Axxxxx or Dxxxxx where the Xxxx is the IO board serial number The initial checkout of the 9210 is complete Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 9 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Optional SLL Library Sutron
52. averaging for only a portion of a measurement interval To ensure the sensor is not powered off before the next sample set Interval to a value greater than the measurement interval If instead you wish the sensor to power off after each sample and therefore force the sensor to wait the Warmup time on every measurement then set Interval to some small value e g 0 Sync to GPS Time This property determines whether the PB200 block should set the 9210B system time to the UTC time obtained from the PB200 200WX sensor Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 177 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com PT 3 Ra Platinum RTD PlatRTD Inputs lt none gt Outputs PlatRTD Wiring Connect the sensor as shown below If the sensor only has 3 wires then Jumper excitation channel to channel and use a single wire from channel to the sensor You may use a 1K completion resistor for greater accuracy If using a 1K completion resistor set the OC Ohms to 10x the calibrated value for the sensor NOTE DO NOT USE CHANNELS ABOVE 8 FOR EXCITATION VREF EVEN EXCITATION CHANNEL 10 Kohm ODD EXCITATION CHANNEL EVEN CHANNEL ODD CHANNEL AGND 4 Wire Mode VREF EVEN EXCITATION CHANNEL 10 Kohm ODD EXCITATION CHANNEL WIRE EVEN CHANNEL RTD ODD CHANNEL AGND 3 Wire Mode Description The Platinum
53. be 32 to 31 and can be converted to volts by multiplying by 0 234 and adding 10 6 allowing a range of 3 1 to 18 1 volts Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com LAT LONG This is an optional field it will be included only if Append Lat Long is selected for random transmissions LAT LONG can be decoded into D M S format by converting the binary values to decimal and applying the following formula Degrees latitude 64 1st byte AND 63 2nd Byte AND 63 180 Minutes latitude 3 byte AND 63 Seconds latitude 4 byte AND 63 Degrees longitude 64 5th byte AND 63 6th Byte AND 63 180 Minutes longitude 7 byte AND 63 Seconds longitude 8 byte AND 63 For example BAAODAXe would be decoded as Lat N 390 1 15 79 Long W 770 24 37 19 EXAMPLE Here is a message with three active measurements each one is set to include two readings The scheduled buffer contains the string EXT This string was given by an external device through the RS 232 port B1 Gt Gs Sx Sr i iEXTIBAAODAXel Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Lat Long optional Battery optional External Temp 2 Temp 1 Precip 2 Precip 1 2 1 Time ID ID 307 SCHEDULED SHEF DATA FORMAT The fo
54. be used for some other purpose Example the following command runs remote exe to support a direct connection on COM and a Sutron voice modem on COM3 flash disk remote exe coml 115200 voice3 115200 It s usually not possible to place special command line options for Remote in the Autoexec bat file because whenever a com port setting is changed in the Xpert application the settings you make will be replaced For this purpose extra command line options may be placed in a file called Remote opt This is a simple ASCII text file that can be created with notepad and transferred to the 9210 and placed in the Flash Disk folder It can contain a single line of options that are concatenated to the parameters passed to Remote in the Autoexec bat So for instance if you wished to enable AUTOLOGON and disable H W handshake on port 2 you would place the following in the Remote opt file AUTOLOGON HS2 Bypassing Autoexec bat by pressing Ctrl C will also bypass any options in the Remote opt file as of version 3 2 Remote exe is designed to communicate with Sutron s XTerm program to provide a wide range of functions In addition you can use a terminal emulator with remote and issue one of the following commands Note if you have set up any usernames and passwords in the 9210 you will be prompted to enter a username and password in order to issue commands to remote exe Table of remote commands ABOUT Shows t
55. block has one input and one output Connect the output of the target block to the FieldVar input Viewing the properties of the FieldVar block shows a list of changeable properties of the target block Below is an example of the FieldVar properties screen when hooked up to a Measure block Select Field Variables Internal Name Public Name OK v Interval Measure Interval _ Time Cancel Label Put a check next to the property you want to tag Checked properties must have unique Public Names This name defaults to the Internal Name when OK is pressed The Public Name for a property is changed by clicking the property name and then clicking Label Below is an example of how the Data tab looks when a Measure block has been connected to a FieldVar block with Interval checked and assigned the public name of Measure Interval Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 251 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status Name Yalue Alarm MEASURE INTERVAL 00 15 00 Refresh Meas Change 252 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Appendix B Updating the Firmware UPDATING THE FIRMWARE From time to time Sutron will make available new versions of firmware in order to introduce new features and fix the occasional b
56. configuration dialog for the selected sensor See Appendix A for details on how to change the configuration Note Most sensors have many more important settings than can be shown on the EzSetup Sensor Configuration dialog The additional settings are accessed by pressing More LOG When checked the system logs the output to ssp log Logging to ssp log as opposed to a log specified by the user ensures the data is available through legacy telemetry channels When ssp log does not exist the user is prompted to create it when leaving Setup AVG When checked the system averages the sensor according to the sampling schedule defined in the measurement schedule NOTE When using EzSetup to average both speed and direction of either the RMYoung or GillWind sensors the system computes a unit vector average of wind direction and a scalar average of wind speed However this is only the case when the sensors have been set up properly where the system considers speed and direction as coming from the same sensor i e the sensor outputs are linked You can verify proper setup by ensuring the speed and direction parameters are grouped together under the sensor entry The following shows a proper setup for RMYoung El EZSetup Measurements G01 00 15 00 Next 00 00 00 E RMYoung 410 1 Ch 1 O1 WD ir 02 WS Speed See the section Multi Output Sensors for more information on how to ensure sensors with multiple outputs are set
57. data for alarms The Alarm Properties allow the Alarm block to be configured to detect Hi Alarms Lo Alarms and ROC Alarms The same deadband applies to all types of alarms The Alarm block is also used to configure the unit to send out ALERTS transmissions due to alarm See the following chart for details OFF Do not send out an alert only go into alarm ABOVE Send an alert when the value goes above the HI limit deadband a BELOW Send an alert when the value goes below the HI limit deadband PON Meee BOTH Send an alert when the value goes above the HI limit deadband OR when the value goes below the HI limit deadband Alert on Checked Send an alert based on the ROC mode Above or ROC Alarm Below Unchecked Do not send out an alert Alerts will only occur when the conditions set above are met and will continue until acknowledged note alerts over Iridium and or GPRS are effectively acknowledged once the transmission completes Once in alarm the unit will stay in alarm until the conditions are no longer met Certain devices under the COMS SSP CL menu can have alert disabled see the section under COMS SSP CL for more information If the unit is configured under the COMS SSP CL menu to send data at an ALARM interval anything other than 00 00 00 the unit will continue sending out that data 198 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2
58. defined it is saved automatically after making changes to EzSetup and leaving the Setup tab You may also explicitly save the setup by selecting the Setup entry and pressing the Save As button Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Measurement Schedules To create a new measurement schedule select the New Measurement entry and press the Edit button To edit an existing measurement select the entry in the tree and click Edit To delete a measurement schedule select the entry and click Delete When creating or editing a measurement schedule the following dialog is shown Measurement Schedule Measurement Interval foo is 00 Measurement Time 00 00 00 Sampling Interval 00 00 01 Samples to Average 60 Measurements per Log j1 nt V Enable Log ID Cancel Differences from an 8210 Editing an EzSetup measurement is very much like the measurement schedules on the 8210 with a few differences The 8210 has two fields named Power Time and Sampling Time which are not supported and the order of processing has also been changed a little Specifically on the 9210 all the non averaged sensors are measured first so these measurements occur as close as possible to the measurement time Then averaging starts immediately following and continues until either the Samples to Average is exceeded or
59. e A nig espe anA pas oe T NSRS n 273 Example Configurations Using the 8080 0007 Analog I O Module 0 ee eceeceecceeceseceseceseceseceecaeesaeseneeeeeees 274 ADD ON DIGITAL I O MODULE 8080 0002 ccecccsscscesesessssssesesssscsesssssessssssecessssssesssesesssasessessassssssssesseases 275 JEn PNE NARESE E ATSE EEE E N EE EE geveesledea dhs oc Ades hdee cota au veveuslvagaaeas dau EEEE EET 276 1X COELHA IPE ss fea Seta ast ee eet AR aed E hiee Bee G Geese a ae aes 277 APPENDIX D SPECIFICATIONG scsssssssssssssssessssseresssssesenssscesensescesensssceseneesessensesceseneeseseenesseseesessesessesseses 278 9210 0000 2B Xites ss insane okie ait Ai oh AG Raa We bead Misa AM aia h AG OARNE ANE i 279 Mai boarde enii codt eee Seth cw ea esau a svebunneeuinh debs e A te tuhs E Ea e E e Ea E 279 RS232 MOdUICS sie ie e eae arena e oe E ea oE A A SoA Eero Ee AG o Ee Ie Gabinete leas 279 Speech Modemi iei oare i etd Ah Rea e earo aaea eo A ean ae BAL aa ea E eles 279 LOS Radios ico 23 52 05 AOR ARG SHA Sash oe tee tid A Bo AR BRIA MEL Sues bn Bastin te ae 280 Satink Trans Meer ess esses S 65 seca een kc Caesh cece teh ba stb ea havoc oh cae cabeo tyke Uucase aa e chu decebde tobi decudoncubA bebe cetens 280 APPENDIX E SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT KIT SDK _ ssssscssssscsscssessssssnssesssesescsssnessssnessessessessoees 281 OVER VIE Weakest sere E E Satna tebe eee oat evil ual cata Sti ashe ui Gy cana tay E Wetec tenets ey aes
60. eeseessseeessereesesrrrrssrstterestertsserrrsertesresrentesrertnsestentertenteseerteseerrs et 255 Storage Card Upgrade SD or USB eee cece csecneeeeeeseceeecesseesecesecsaecsaecsaecaaecaeecseseaeeseeseeeaeesecsaessaecnaeenaesaae 258 Customizing a Storage Card Upgrade cece esceesecesecssecsseceecaeeeseeeaeeeseeseeesessecsecsaecsaecsaecaaecaeesaeseaeeaeees 258 Manual Component Up erade csc 2 icciccscuscie cc caueteus coaths sheseed a oea EEEE EE cas SEEE EE EEEE E E EEE R i n 259 Upgrade the Boot Loader iine eeose eari Ee bested E EEEE EEE EOE EE E E S EEEE E ES 259 Upgrade th Kernel nieres eeen oeroet nsen EE EEE EErEE E E i 259 Upgrade th Appheationissn ineeie E a E E E a N a a E a 260 APPENDIX C VO MODULES scscsssssssssssrsessssereessssssenseseesenseceseseseesessseessneescssensescsseneesesssnesseseesessesessessesess 261 XLITE ANALOG MODULE A TERMINAL STRIP s sssssesssesesesesresssestsesteresssnesesesrentsssseseresreneseesesesesrenesesseseseeeses 262 XLITE DIGITAL MODULE B TERMINAL STRIP ccccscccesscssesseseeescssecesesecseessceeescssesssesecseesscseseessesesesesseeseeneees 264 Features enen sae dee E E duces E dev EE EE EEA EE cuban vuaeeuenteysesenbanduned enone 265 PUS a E E tala dea idea a dees EE S ES 265 IEI KEE LE CG Te ASE EE Sods eel gee ei eH OEE AEE EELSE oa ae Avg ah a ae a eed eee 266 Shaft enc detS enni n tea ceden seedeen eae celia ea caves E E EE devs Wenseeetsdnege E EE E E NETRE 266
61. has written several custom sll s for various customers These sll s are provided in all upgrades for convenience While most of these sll s are specific to certain sensors special processing etc other customers may find a use for them Listed below are all the extra SLLs that are provided in a standard upgrade zip file along with a short description of their purpose If you find that one of these sll s may be of some use to your application and you want more information please contact Customer Service NOTE In some of these sll s a serial interface is needed In most cases the blocks that are created or setup tab entries that are made will need to have full control of the com port This is accomplished by leaving the com port set to NONE in the Coms SSP CL branch under the setup tab Refer to the specific documentation for the sll to see if the com port is to be defined in coms or not Aanderaa sll The purpose of this SLL is to receive data from an Aanderaa logger but may also be used to parse any space or comma separated numeric data using an RS 232 com port AirGap sll The purpose of this SLL is to allow users to connect a MIROS Air Gap water level sensor to one of the COM ports AlohaHazmat sll Formats and outputs messages specific to the Aloha Hazmat PC desktop software via com port Supports Aloha weather station ASWellL sll This SLL implements a custom processing block to support Alamosa Salvage Well control
62. helpful to Sutron support staff in figuring out what s going wrong E SSP Message Decoder 13 08 59 PC a ScreenReg 5 13 08 59 XP Screen2 6006 3 13 08 59 xP VersionInfo 8 3 1 0 4 13 08 59 PC 3870643 OK ScreenDetect 5 3 30 Special Command Line Options XTerm supports some special options which are not configurable through the CONNECT screen and must be passed on the command line NOHS disables H W Handshaking flow control allowing Xterm to be used over a 3 line serial port STATS causes the Communication Status screen to be displayed on startup DECODER causes the SSP Message Decoder screen to be displayed on startup 122 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Chapter 7 Installation STEPS TO INSTALL A 9210 Al 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 6l 124 Connect Earth Ground to the Earth connection on the 9210 The earth connection is labeled GND WARNING Failure to ground the 9210 can make it susceptible to malfunction or damage by surges and other types of interference Optional Wire sensors to the SDI 12 port on the 9210 You can insert multiple wires into each connection If the connection is awkward to use run wires to a separate terminal strip Optional Wire sensors to the terminal strips as needed Optional Connect SATLIN
63. http www sutron com INTRODUCTION The power of the 9210 is in its setup blocks These blocks do the work of measuring processing logging and telemetry Sutron will regularly develop new setup blocks to provide an expanding support for new sensors and updated processing Customers will also be able to create setup blocks using optional software available from Sutron Following is a list of setup blocks that are provided with the system The blocks are grouped as sensor blocks processing blocks log blocks telemetry blocks control blocks and miscellaneous blocks If additional AIO modules are added on to the 9210 then whenever VREF or AGND is referenced on the connection drawing it is always referring to the VREF or AGND connection of the AIO module that is performing the analog measurement Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 133 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SENSOR BLOCKS i Air Temperature Sensor AirTemp Inputs lt none gt Outputs AirTemp Wiring Connect the thermistor as shown below The sensor needs a completion resistor Rx connected between the input and Vref 10K is used in the example below other values around 10K may be supplied The input channel is Vi NOTE DO NOT USE CHANNELS ABOVE 8 FOR EXCITATION Description This block supports temperature sensors based on the YSI44006 YSI44032 YSI44005 and YSI44036 thermistor The AirT
64. http www sutron com in and Dial out messages to be configured Speech phrases are stored in the Flash Disk speech English directory or Flash Disk speech language directory depending on which language is selected By default the voice modem will speak the specified Dial Out message If the modem is unable to detect ring back it may start speaking a phrase before someone answers the phone Because of this the message spoken should either be repeated or wait for a button to be pushed before speaking the alarm data If a Dial Out message is not defined or the letter D is placed at the beginning of a phone number then a data alarm will be sent The data message will try to automatically detect a PC Base Station and send an SSP message otherwise a simple text message is sent and a prompt is made asking for the alarm to be acknowledged Create Speech Phrase SpeakPhrase Thank you Pause 1 0 Branch USER O Label DTMF ANY English x OK Cancel Above is an example of the speech phrase editor screen The combo box in the top left is used to select a speech command such as SpeakPhrase The combo box in the top middle is used to select any optional parameters such as the phrase to speak in this example The button is used to edit and or add the command to the command list is used to move a phrase up in the list and is used to move a phrase down x can be used to delete a phrase from t
65. implement this in a Polynomial block the 25 would be entered next to kO for the 0 order of the equation and the 50 entered next to k for the 1 order Fields k2 through k5 would be left at zero since we are only implementing a first order equation A general purpose Voltmeter or ADC sensor block would be used to input the sensor voltage into the system in this case Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 215 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com PtCtrl Point Control Inputs Point Enable 1 Enable 2 Outputs Move Move Stop Status Description The Point Control block is used to control the position of some device using a feedback control loop The current position of the device is wired to the input Point When the position of the device differs more than a user defined amount the outputs are set to attempt to bring the position of the device back to the desired point Point Control Properties Offset foo 00 00 whi Interval foo os 00 ae Cancel Pulse Time 00 00 05 000 Set Point fio Deadband fio Invert outputs 7 Latched outputs W HUHHH The control loop executes on a schedule set by the user The Offset and Interval properties determine when and how often respectively the loop executes Each is specified in seconds relative to a 24 hour clock Both enable inputs must be true for the control loop to execute When Enable 1
66. in the case of the PocketPC in the 9210 portion of the display and the software will respond accordingly The only exception to this is on the PocketPC tap and hold the stylus against the screen for a few seconds to display XTerm s main menu The options on this menu are the same as those provided by the buttons on the right hand side of the desktop version Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 113 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Select type of access File Transfer Set Clock Retrieval Access for data retrieval Connect Upgrade Setup Access for station setup Status V Web Server IV Auto Update If the screen is blank or becomes unreadable or garbled right click in the 9210 display area This sends a command to retrieve again the contents of the display To do this on the PocketPC tap and hold the stylus on the screen to access the main menu and then select Update Now XTerm is very smart when it comes to knowing when and how to update its display However the nature of serial communications sometimes causes screen updates to lag slightly or become garbled As an example login to the 9210 and select the different tabs across the top Notice that it takes time to switch from one tab to another If connected at a baud rate slower than 115 200 the display update can be even longer If a control is selected but doesn t immediately respond
67. in this field EEE IP port selects the TCP port to be used for connecting to the server and must not conflict with other TCP ports used by the system the default value is 52735 Header interval defines how often a header is output in a separate line before the data record 0 for never 1 for every time 2 for ever other time 3 for every third time etc The header describes the contents of the data record As long as the Header Interval is not 0 a new header will be appended after recording has been turned ON to ensure any changes to the setup are reported Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 235 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com i WebLog Inputs Input Outputs Output Description The WebLog block allows you to place the value connected to the input on the 9210 web page The 9210 web page is a single page of HTML containing the names and values of interest in the logger The Sensor Name field sets the name that will be used on the web page and the precision controls how to display the value When Log scheduled time is checked the scheduled time of the data value is used as the timestamp of the data shown on the webpage When Log scheduled time is not checked the actual time the value is computed is displayed normally these times are the same they may differ when measurement delays occur due to loading and or other factors P zoom Dg w
68. is being sampled and processed and where it is going Below for example we see A parameter from the barometric pressure sensor is being periodically sampled and its maximum or minimum being stored to a log at some rate and Solar radiation is being regularly sampled logged and periodically transmitted via satellite to a main station F zoom Do wire F Add gt Exit Hef inant E Max Barom Measure MinMax Log Block Categories Setup blocks come in general categories Input Processing Logging Telemetry Miscellaneous and Output Four of these types of block are represented above On the left are the input blocks representing barometric pressure and solar radiation sensors hooked to the system Next to them are the Measure and MinMax processing blocks which request and or perform operations on the data from the sensor blocks Note how these two blocks have darkened borders This is an indication that the block is active i e that it initiates data flow through a chain of blocks After the Measure and MinMax blocks come two log blocks which indicate where the data is being stored Finally there is a telemetry block that indicates how the data is being transmitted Blocks of a certain type are not restricted to a particular column in the display but data does always flow from the left side of the screen to the right Block Inputs and Outputs Setup blocks are hooked together via their inputs and outputs
69. is done because sending a test transmission sends the default test transmission string the alphabet which could interfere with other transmissions if a dummy load is not connected Move the cursor to lt OK gt and press select to continue with the transmission or move the cursor to lt CANCEL gt and press select to cancel Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com USING STORAGE CARDS Each 9210 can support USB or SD storage cards These storage cards can be used to either expand flash disk space for data logs to upload download setups or to download log files Custom applications may add other functionality NOTE Storage Cards must be formatted using FAT16 or FAT32 not NTFS Working with a storage card is similar to working with the internal flash disk folder Whenever specifying the location to place files press the UP button see below to see a root directory structure The storage card will be shown as USB Card and SD Card folders Double click the folder to select it Flash Disk My Documents Network Program Files Recycled SD Card Name ipert ssf Ls Expand log file capabilites A storage card can be used to increase the amount of log file flash disk space from the built in 32MB shared to the size of the storage card To do this follow these steps Place the card into the appropriate slot Go to the
70. is false the control loop skips execution and may execute at the next scheduled interval However when Enable 2 is false the control loop will no longer be scheduled until recording is restarted regardless of its subsequent states Also when Enable 2 is false the Status output is set to false it is set to true at all other times The user sets the desired device position by setting the Set Point property The Deadband property defines the range of points that are considered to be within tolerance Specifically an 216 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com input Point is in within tolerance i e no attempt to reposition is made when the difference between Set Point and input Point is less than or equal to Deadband Moves are accomplished by setting the Move Move and Stop outputs These are boolean outputs typically wired to BinOut blocks in order to set the state of some hardware control line When Latched Outputs is checked the selected move line is set high for 25 seconds and then set low After Pulse Time seconds elapses the Stop output is set high for 25 seconds and then set low When Latched Outputs is not checked the selected move line stays high for the duration specified by Pulse Time before it is set low The Stop output is not set in this case The nvert Outputs option is used to invert the sense of the control loop The
71. is primarily displayed Across the top of the screen is a text label that identifies the platform Under this label are a series of tabs like the tabs on file folders These tabs are used to provide quick access to the different functions The screen image below reveals tabs for Main Setup Sensors Data Log and Status The actual tabs displayed on a system depend on the DLLs installed in the system and the access mode selected at login Main Setup Sensors Data Log Status Station Status Recording OFF 10 02 2008 15 55 33 Alarm NORMAL Clear Battery voltage External 14 0 Logout Station name d pert Date Time Date and or time are used to perform scheduled functions The internal clock will keep time accurate to ten seconds a month over the temperature range of 40 to 60 C The date and time is maintained even after power is removed from the system by a lithium coin cell battery NOTE On Satlink systems with self timed transmissions enabled the system will synchronize its clock to the Satlink periodically maintaining higher clock accuracy To change the date or time press the button to bring up the Set Date Time window shown below Use the stylus or the lt lt or gt gt buttons to move from one field to the next and use the numbers in the virtual keypad to enter the new value The values in the field can also be incremented or decremented via
72. its upper threshold Thus if the output state of the filter is a one it will stay a one until the counter reaches zero It will then remain zero until the counter counts up to its upper threshold Valid digital filter time constants are 1 to 255 Counters Up to eight 32 bit counters can be programmed to count on both edges or just the positive going edge of their respective inputs Since the input to the counter can be inverted under program control the counter can also be made to count on the negative going edge by inverting its input The counter alarm message can be set to be sent after 1 to 255 counts Frequency The time is logged for each counter every time it counts This time is reported for each counter when the counters are read Frequency can be measured by reading the counters twice and computing the difference in time and counts Channel 1 has a special divide by 8 circuit to allow the measurement of frequencies up to 8 KHz Shaft encoders Up to three Quadrature shaft encoders may be set up The input lines must come from adjacent inputs starting with an odd numbered one e g 3 4 5 6 7 8 Each shaft encoder has a 32 bit counter associated with it It counts up for one direction of rotation and down for the other Outputs Each of the six lines I O2 1 O7 with output capability can be turned on or off under control of the setup Any output can be pulsed using the pulse output block When configured as an output the
73. ma standby typ Clock TCXO Real time clock with battery backup 10 seconds month accuracy 40 to 60C TO PC bus 100Kbps 5 wire 10ft max SDI 12 Rev 1 3 Four RS232 to 115Kbps 3 dedicated one usable as RS 485 RS485 interface USB Host port SD Host slot Packaging Aluminum case Drip proof in vertical orientation IP52 11 x6 x3 weight 3 Ibs Compatibility Y Modem SSP Environmental 40 to 60C 60 to 60 C available Display LCD character Display 2 line by 20 characters in size Will display Current Date Time and Sensor Values No setup capability other than the ability to adjust the current sensor value e g set the current stage level of a shaft encoder Button provided to scroll through Sensor values 20 to 50 C viewability RS232 Modules Speech Modem A telephone modem expands the system by allowing remote connections to other nodes including a central system The module includes a modem capable of operation at speeds up to 33 6 kbps This makes it possible for the remote connection to perform all functions as though the module were local to the system such as retrieve data from the memory module live data from any module troubleshoot diagnose configure reconfigure nodes etc Sutron 8080 0005 1 modem includes V 42 and MNP 2 4 and 10 error correction modes as well as V 42bis and MNP 5 data compression The modem is UL CSA FCC and CTR21 approved The Sutron 8080 0005 1 modem has capabilities to support speech
74. not appropriate for that sensor Part Number Max Output Normal Gain Hi Gain x128 Gain 5600 0600 Typ 40 mV 3000 W m x y y 5600 0601 30 mV 2000 W m x y y 5600 0602 Typ 25 mV 2800 W m x y y 5600 0603 Typ 30 mV 10 000 umol s m x y y 5600 0604 Typ 200 mV 2000 W m y y x 5600 0605 70mV 2000 W m x y y Acceptable only when measured using 8080 0003 Analog I O module Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 191 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Submersible Pressure Transducer SubPres Inputs lt none gt Outputs PressEng Wiring Wire to SDI 12 port Description This block supports the Sutron 56 109 Submersible Pressure Transducer This SDI 12 sensor is used to measure water level or pressure in well or surface water applications The averaging time can be used to increase the measurement accuracy by lengthening the sampling time and or for situations where there are waves on the water surface Unit options are ft PSI kPa m cm or mm SDI Address lo i Averaging time 10 a Cancel Offset bp a Units water ft Submersible Pressure Properties lw 192 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Tipping Bucket Sensor Precip Inputs lt none gt Outputs Precip
75. of Real Time Data Collection to the World 135 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Ayo A Air Temperature Relative Humidity AT RH Inputs lt none gt Outputs TempOut HumidOut Wiring Wire each output to a separate analog channel Power the sensor from the Battery or SW12 as selected in the setup Description This block supports the Sutron air temperature relative humidity sensors 5600 0311 12 13 14 the Rotronic HygroClip S3 and Vaisala HMP45 HMP155G active model supporting 40 60 and HMP155J active model supporting 80 60 Select the proper Analog I O module temperature channel humidity channel and temperature units If the sensor is hooked up to a constant power source that is either to the battery directly or the Batt terminal of the module select Batt for power If the sensor is hooked to the SwBatt terminal of the module so as to not draw current unless the sensor is begin sampled select SW Batt for power Specify the number of seconds the sensor should be powered before taking a measurement in Warm up s To keep the block from ever outputting greater than 100 for humidity corresponding to 100 relative humidity check the box next to Limit Humidity AT RH 5600 Properties AIO Module 1 Power Batt Temp Chan 1 7 Type 5600 0311 Hum Chan 2 7 Warmup 5 f fa Limit RH Temp Units to 100 M Celsius Fahrenheit 136 Bring
76. option from the drop down list and the system will allow you to create a new log Sensor Name should be set such that it describes the source of the data This name shows up in the Sensor column of the Log tab and is the only way to identity for example whether a temperature data point originated from an AT RH AirTemp BP block Precision defines the number of places to the right of the decimal point that should be stored in the log Blocks connected to the output of the log block will get a passed through version of the data stream seen at the block input except with the precision applied Log scheduled time determines the source of the timestamp that is given to the logged data When checked the data is time stamped with the time the data was scheduled to be measured When not checked the time the data is actually finally computed is used This value may be Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 229 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com several seconds after the scheduled time depending on how long it takes to measure and calculate the final value Logging with actual time instead of scheduled time can be useful when logging min and max values produced by the Average or MinMax blocks When logging these values with use scheduled time unchecked the timestamp of the data is the same as when the sample was taken that produced the min or max value as opposed to the time the
77. program on a PC Set the baud rate to 115 200 Connect the COM serial port to the Xlite If you intend to transfer the kernel file via ethernet connect the Xlite to a network that supports DHCP using an ethernet cable 104 Power up the Xlite Press ESC in response to the message Press ESC now to Upgrade System 105 Press K to indicate you want to transfer the kernel 106 Press U to indicate you want to upgrade the kernel 107 Use the menus that follow to specify either a transfer via ymodem or ethernet and follow the instructions to send the file Xpert2 ker downloaded in step 1 108 After the upgrade is complete reboot the Xlite Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 259 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Upgrade the Application The Xlite application Xpert exe and associated dlls and slls as well as remote exe can be upgraded using the steps outlined in this section Use great caution here as mixing different versions of slls and dlls can cause very strange hard to diagnose behavior 109 Download either the serial or storage card upgrade from the Sutron website at the following address www sutron com downloads software htm The upgrade typically comes in a zipped archive and typically has a name similar to Xpert2 vX X X X zip Once downloaded unzip the archive onto your PC The Xlite application consists of Xpert exe all dll files dll
78. pulses are used via the modules built in pulse function In version 2 03 and earlier this does not work as it corrupts other channels 248 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Send Tag Inputs Data Outputs lt none gt Description This block will send the current data in the block to another station using Sutron Standard Protocol SSP communications The properties for the block specify the port to use for the communications and the path or station name The port can be specified only if you have first used the Setup tab COMS SSP CL control and defined some communications ports The path can be a simple station name or a station with full path information included such as patha pathb stationx When the Port selection is TCP IP enter the URL to the destination The Tag property must match the name specified in a COMS Tag in the named station For example Station 1 is measuring water level and wants to send the water level to Station 2 Add a SendTag block after the measure of the water level in Station 1 Set the Name to WaterLevel and also set the port and path for the link between the two stations In Station 2 add a COMS Tag and set the name property to WaterLevel Now whenever the SendTag block runs the code will send the water level to the COMS tag block in Station 2 Tag Properties Port Icom Path URL P 5
79. register which removes the limitation When using Vox Studio or any other editing program Sutron recommends trimming off the leading and trailing silence to help reduce the size of the file We also recommend using the normalize function to adjust the volume of the recorded phrase 284 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Appendix G Autoexec bat and Remote exe Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 285 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com OVERVIEW Starting with version 2 0 0 0 and greater the autoexec bat file is AUTOMATICALLY updated by the system when changes to the COMS are made The only time a user needs to modify the autoexec bat file manually is if the autoexec bat file is corrupted or missing Autoexec bat The 9210 executes instructions in the flash disk autoexec bat file on startup If the file doesn t exist or if the user bypasses execution the system will run windows remote exe com1 115200 This remote exe program is the program that allows communication with XTerm With remote exe running you will be able to update the software setups and monitor the system as needed To skip the autoexec bat connect a PC running a terminal program to COM1 and apply power to the unit After the terminal displays Flushing caches press CTRL key and C lt CTRL C gt hold
80. sensor to one of the 8 different random groups groups 2 9 Each group must have a separate trigger sensor defined by the Random Group block When the trigger sensor goes into alarm as defined by the Random Group block above the 9210 will make a random transmission of all the sensors assigned to that group At other times the 9210 will transmit the data for the different groups according to the setup in the Setup tab A sensor may be in as many groups as desired Along with assigning the sensor to groups this dialog sets the sequence of the sensor in the transmission and the number of values to include in the transmission BIN NONINT format The number of values cannot be set in this dialog if the Random transmission format is set to BIN INT in the Setup tab Random Properties Group Membership _ Group 2 Group 5 Group 8 _ Group 3 Group 6 Group 9 Group 4 Group 7 Sequence f fis Num als f a Label Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 241 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Self Timed Parameter SelfTimed Inputs Input the values to transmit Outputs Output pass through Description This block allows you to include the data connected to the input in a self timed satellite transmission It is most commonly linked to the output of a log block but can also be linked to the output of a measure or average The proper
81. sets a trigger every time a selected amount of flow has been registered The total flow is reset to 0 at a user set schedule typically daily The trigger typically connects to a pulse output block Accum Properties Time 00 00 00 Sni Interval 24 00 00 Cancel Threshold f p Include negative values 7 Use the Time and Interval properties to set the schedule at which the block resets the accumulation Use the Threshold property to specify the value of accumulation that when reached is a signal to set the trigger output to 1 Check Include negative values to allow negative input values to be included in the accumulation When not checked negative input values are not included 200 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Average Average Inputs Input Outputs Average Computes the mean average of the samples taken during the Duration Min Outputs the minimum of the samples taken during the Duration Max Outputs the maximum of the samples taken during the Duration STD Computes the standard deviation of the samples taken during the Duration Count Outputs the number of samples that were used to compute the average Description The Average block is like a Measure block that can perform some common data processing functions related to averaging The block can output the averag
82. setup the averaging would be for 60 seconds 00 00 01 times 60 instead of 120 seconds Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com needed for 60 samples The unit must collect over half of the samples before the average will be marked with a G as good MEASUREMENTS PER LOG Allows extra measurements to be taken which are not all logged For instance a value of 4 with a 00 15 00 interval would cause the 9210 to measure every 15 minutes but log the specified sensor only every hour ENABLE This button is a quick way to disable a measurement if there s a temporary issue that doesn t warrant completely deleting it LOG ID When this field contains a string all sensors associated with this measurement are logged as a group with the Log ID used as the data set s name When the Log ID field is empty all items are logged separately each with it s own time stamp units and quality data NOTE The maximum size of a log entry is 2048 bytes Hence be careful to not create a Log ID that results in an entry larger than that Also note that only 256 bytes of data can be shown for each log entry on the Log tab Of course all 2048 bytes are included in an export of the log After creating or editing a measurement schedule it s tree entry is shown collapsed Expand the entry by clicking the plus sign This will show all the sensors assigned to the
83. setup under Satlink tree but will not allow it to be changed from this properties page For this setup leave the defaults Label Level fee Data Time 00 00 00 l l Data Interval 00 15 00 Num Values f f Sequence Cancel Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 103 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Notice the button labeled VALUE and next to it is a box with the letters UNKNO this is actually saying UNKNOWN VALUE because it has never been measured Because all the parameters needed to make this measurement have now been configured press the VALUE button to force a live measurement Sensor Configuration Name level A Sensor Quase o More Mog C avg M DSP SAT v ST RND TRG om CS rae e fe A bo Module 1 T Slope f Channel 3 7 Offset fo Cancel Now the box is displaying the current value 0 00 in the picture To set the level to match the actual level calibration simply press the three dot box next to the data enter the desired reading and the system now has calculated the offset Since this example has 0 00 in it the offset will match what is entered had the system been running for a while and had an actual reading it would have re calculated the necessary offset automatically Click OK to save these changes Main Setup Sensors Data Log
84. speech command specified by a user Label This works just like the Branch command except that control may be returned to the command after the Call when a Return is encountered Subroutines may call other subroutines DisableAlarms Disables further alarm transmissions using the Voice modem and other SSP devices such as LOS Radio They may be re enabled using the EnableAlarms command by Basic program or by accessing the main menu and pressing CLEAR on the Alarm OFF item EnableAlarms Re enables alarm transmissions that have been disabled with DisableAlarms Hangup Hang up the phone and terminates the speech command InputManual Input a number from the user The number is entered with the DTMF keypad may be used to specify a decimal point Press the 66399 button is used to indicate the end Pressing twice will allow the number to be re entered See SpeakManual and StoreManual Example 12 345 would enter the number 12 345 Negative numbers are not supported Label Label a section of the speech command two types of labels exist User and DTMF DTMF labels are branched to in response to the BranchDTMF command and user labels are branched to using the Branch command Language Switches to the specified language folder This effects all speech phrases that may be spoken ex SpeakPhrase and SpeakData after the command When adding phrases be sure to select the appropriate language using the combo box at the b
85. take live measurements of the sensors the Coms Tag Coms Tag must be connected after the sensor block and before any Measure Average or other active block an active block is one that initiates a measurement and typically has a darkened border in the graphical setup If the Coms Tag is connected after the active block it will not be able to Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 237 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com retrieve live data This might be useful when connected to sensors that require time to get data like SDI 12 sensors where the intention is to prevent remote users from forcing readings 238 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Random Group RndGroup Inputs Trigger Outputs Output pass through Description This block defines the alarm conditions for a random transmission group Its input is typically connected to a sensor that the system is measuring Each time the sensor is measured and the data is passed to the random group block the block will check the value for the different type of alarms and trigger an alarm or go out of alarm as determined by the data If more than one RndGroup block is used to define a trigger point for the same group each RndGroup block must have the same DTime DInter and Label values If they differ the system issues a
86. the Coms Tag must be connected after the sensor block and before any Measure Average or other active block an active block is one that initiates a measurement and typically has a darkened border in the graphical setup The FieldVar setup block in conjunction with the Data tab provides a way to access often changed properties from multiple blocks in the setup in one convenient place To understand FieldVar some knowledge of the way the 9210 is set up is needed The graphical setup is discussed in detail in the next chapter but for the purposes of this discussion let s look at a sample setup screen Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com F zoom Add gt Exit Barom THE z Each block represents something different In the above setup the solar radiation SR and barometric pressure BP blocks represent physical sensors the measure blocks represents processing operations where the data is being regularly sampled and the log blocks represent the files in which data is being stored Data can be thought of as flowing from the left side of the screen to the right Each setup block has a properties window that is used to view or change its properties Clicking an icon and then selecting Edit Properties from the menu that pops up bring up these windows The properties window for the Measure blocks looks like t
87. the card into the storage card slot 21 Go to the Setup tab 22 Expand the Setup File entry select Open or Append and press the Edit button 23 On the right side of the File Name dialog press the Up button 24 Double click the name of the storage card folder USB Card SD Card 25 Click on the setup name to open or append and click ok To open a setup using the front panel display 26 Place the card into the storage card slot 27 Go to the CHANGE SETUP menu press middle button 28 Press again with cursor flashing on lt OK gt to load a setup 29 The Xlite then scrolls through each setup available on the storage card if the first one is the setup to load press with cursor flashing on lt OK gt If the setup is not the one desired press right button to move cursor to lt CANCELS gt then press Continue this until the desired setup is found then press with cursor on lt OK gt to load that setup Download log files Log files can be retrieved from a unit onto a storage card To do this follow these steps To retrieve the log using the GUI Xterm 30 Install the card into the storage card slot 31 Go into the LOG tab 32 Click export choose a data format then click OK 33 Click the UP button and then double click into the corresponding storage card folder USB Card SD Card 34 Give the file a name or use the default 35 Select the download format then click OK To retrieve the log using the front
88. the data to connected blocks Tag Properties Port com1 Path URL i Tag waterLevel Cancel Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 161 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com GillWind Gill Wind Sensor Inputs lt none gt Outputs WindSpeed WindDirection Wiring Connect the sensor to a RS232 port as follows wiring is shown for the 6461 1239 protection board Connector Name Pin 6461 1239 2 V 12 6 5 TXD RXD 2 7 RXD TXD 3 1 GND 3 V GND 5 Note Set jumper J3 on the 6461 1239 to DTR Configure 9210 for 12 on pin 9 of the DB9 Gill sensor must be set up as follows M4 U3 O1 L1 P2 B3 Fl H1 HQ El T1 S3 Cl Description This block supports the Gill WindSonic ultrasonic wind sensor This sensor has an RS232 serial output that can connect to one of the 9210 serial ports The WindSonic has its own configuration and setup The user must make sure the WindObserverlI is setup to operate with the 9210 before connecting it to the 9210 The 9210 will not alter the setup of the sensor In setting up the sensor the user can choose the output units heater control and node address etc The user must set the sensor block s node address property to the same address that the sensor has been configured to User must setup the sensor as follows see the Gill manual for further details Establi
89. the rate at which alarms are transmitted when no sensors are in alarm and Tx Alarm Rate is the rate used when a sensor is in alarm They can be set to 00 00 00 to inhibit timed alarm transmissions Disable Alerts may be checked to prevent messages to be sent out the port when the system enters the alert state Direct connections support two types of alarm messages If SSP is detected an SSP alarm is sent otherwise a simple text message is sent and a prompt is made asking for the alarm to be acknowledged Voice Modem Settings This is the Voice Modem settings screen Voice Modem Settings Answer voice x Language English x Fhone 1 Cancel HEHHE EE Ep Phone 2 Yoice Additional phone s Redial Delay foo o1 00 Redials g When an alert occurs each phone number is tried in sequence starting with Phone 1 until an acknowledgement occurs Or until the Redials has been attempted on each number The Answer mode can be configured to answer in Voice Data or Voice amp Data The Voice amp Data mode prompts when it answers the phone to Please press pound If the person dialing in presses the key on the telephone a voice message is spoken otherwise a data carrier is transmitted and a data connection is attempted The Dial in and Dial out buttons allow the Dial Dial In Dial Out Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800
90. to 10 seconds will keep power on between readings PwrCtl is used to specify how the sensor is to be powered on When set to DIO Sw DIO switched 12 is used to control power When set to AIO Sw AIO switched 12 is used to control power to the sensor On the Xlite of course AIO and DIO switched 12 are the same thing When set to DIO Chan the module and channel fields are used to determine the digital output used to control power to the sensor Module and Channel are used to designate the IO module used to control power to the sensor Channel is applicable only when PwrCtrl is set to DIO Chan 170 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com MRL7OO Properties Reference bo l 7 Warmup s fo E cancel Inactivity s fo bid PwrCtrl pio sw 7 Module ko Channel ko T A typical averaging setup using Ezsetup would be as follows Measurement Interval 00 15 00 Measurement Time 00 00 00 Sampling Interval 00 00 05 Samples to Average 20 MRL700 Properties Reference di Warmup s 3 Cancel JAE Inactivity s Measurements per Log Pwrcrl Dosw Il AARAA M Enable Log ID Module L Channel Using the measurement time starting at 00 00 00 and a 00 15 00 interval will log the data with a timestamp at 00 01 35 00 16 35 23 46 35 Bringing the Be
91. until message displays Bypassing flash disk Autoexec bat The factory default for autoexec bat is as follows Flash Disk remote exe coml 115200 Flash Disk Xpert exe The first line runs remote exe enabling communications on com1 The second line runs the main application program The details of running remote exe are explained in the following section xpert exe accepts several command line options Debug send debug messages to the serial port SDI COM4 use COM4 RS 485 for SDI 12 NOTE If redirecting SDI to a different com port the com port settings in the coms section of setup should be left as none Coms is strictly for configuring remote and ssp devices You may make changes to the autoexec bat by editing the file on your PC and then transferring it to the 9210 However if you make a mistake and render it inoperable you will need to follow the instructions to skip autoexec bat on startup so you can transfer a correct autoexec bat to the 9210 Remote exe The system has a remote exe in the windows directory However it is possible to load an updated version into flash disk and run it instead of the version in windows Remote can support different communications devices on each of its serial ports All the ports are specified by the command line arguments when remote exe is run Remote supports the following communications devices Name Device H W Description Flow COMx Direct conne
92. up properly DSP When checked the sensor will be included when displaying current values from the 9210 front panel Pressing the DSP button will bring up a dialog that allows you to change the name and precision of the value shown on the front panel SAT ST Checkbox enables Self Timed transmissions for this sensor Clicking the ST box will bring up additional properties see Self Timed Parameter block in Appendix A for details on settings SAT RND Checkbox enables Random transmissions for this sensor Clicking the RND box will bring up additional properties see Random Parameter block in Appendix A for details on settings SAT TRG Checkbox enables this sensor to trigger random transmissions Clicking the TRG box will bring up additional properties see Random Group block in Appendix A for details on settings COM TAG Checkbox enables this sensor for Coms SSP CL Clicking the TAG box will bring up additional properties see Coms Tag block in Appendix A for details on settings COM ALM Checkbox enables this sensor for alarms via Coms SSP CL e g modem LOS etc Clicking the ALM box will bring up additional properties see Coms Tag block in Appendix A for details on settings VALUE The Value box shows the last measured value for the sensor Press the value button to take a reading immediately and display it Editing the value by pressing will modify the Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Su
93. very high gain The maximum input voltage is 19mV when measuring using either the onboard Analog IO module or when using the 8080 0007 Analog IO module The maximum input voltage is 39mV when using the 8080 0003 Analog IO module Differential measurements can be made for each of the above Measurement choices If you specify a differential measurement be sure to select only channels 1 3 5 7 or 9 To enable an excitation channel click Excitation On and then select the channel number to use and the voltage level to output Xlite will read an excitation on the selected channel Run a jumper wire from either Vref or Vex to the selected excitation channel NOTE DO NOT USE CHANNELS ABOVE 8 FOR EXCITATION Filter notch This is a built in noise filter the defaults of 60 should work for many measurements If AC line noise becomes an issue lowering this value will help reduce the noise Lowering this value will also make measurements take longer Settling Time This is the amount of time in milliseconds to leave the A D circuitry switched 12Volts and VREF to sensors powered before taking measurements Sensors requiring a longer settling time also called warm up time should have this value increased Range for using the switched 12 volts is 0 to 60000 mSec 60 seconds for Xlite aio and 0 to 30000 30 seconds for external AIO module 142 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http
94. wait a bit and try again Do not click controls rapidly as this will translate into undesired behavior When using the desktop version of XTerm the desktop s keyboard will work as if it were connected For example instead of using the 9210 s virtual keypad shown below use the PC keyboard The characters typed are sent to the 9210 XTerm COM1 115200 x s File Transfer Lele L HOL Set Clock _ BIE fell a lis i FOWL Upgrade Bde sim Z caps st Space Clr asp Del M Web Server M Auto Update When exporting logs using XTerm XTerm will try to save the exported log on the local PC and so offers a Save As dialog on the local PC see below desktop PC shown left PocketPC shown right If this dialog is cancelled then a prompt for the destination on the 9210 flash disk is displayed Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com EF XTermCOM1 115200 2 32 Save As Name ESTI Folder None Type txt v Location 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 o tab a wle r t y luli fofp tid capPja s alt gjn ilk i File name TEST txt Save as type z Cancel T Open as read only shift z x c b n m 7 cuja xT Telele File Transfer File Transfer is one of the more powerful features of XTerm Use File Transfer to send setups and softw
95. will begin and finish automatically and may involve a reboot Customizing a Storage Card Upgrade Upgrading using an SD or USB file in the manner described above uses an upgrade script file text having upg extension that is very similar to the one used when upgrading serially The following commands are supported p set default source directory d delete the specified file s send the specified file m make the specified directory e g m Flash Disk Speech r rename specified file e g r Flash Disk DefLib sll Flash Disk Deflib bak Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Manual Component Upgrade Individual firmware components can be upgraded using a variety of methods other than those listed above This section describes a few of those methods Be careful upgrading individual components of Xlite firmware because of incompatibilities across different versions The set of files contained in a single download archive from the website are all compatible As a general rule don t mix with other versions unless specifically told to do so by Sutron customer service Upgrade the Boot Loader The Xlite boot menu provides the ability to upgrade the Xlite boot loader either by serial or ethernet transfer 95 Download either the serial or storage card upgrade from the Sutron website at the following address www sutron com downlo
96. www sutron com BP Barometric Pressure BP Inputs lt none gt Outputs BP Temp Wiring Connect the sensor to the SDI 12 port Description This block supports the Sutron Accubar Barometer part 5600 0120 This is an SDI 12 sensor Select the pressure units the SDI 12 address of the sensor and the averaging time averaging time is used to increase the measurement accuracy by lengthening the sampling time This block can also return temperature by clicking the box next to Enable Temperature and selecting the desired temperature units Accubar Barometer Properties Pressure Units mb v i E SDI Address o Cancel Averaging Time s ft M Enable Temperature Celsius Fahrenheit Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 143 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com BEL BEI Absolute Encoder BEIEnc Inputs lt none gt Outputs Output Wiring Connect the sensor to a RS232 port as follows wiring is shown for the 6461 1239 protection board Color Name Pin 6461 1239 Red 12 6 White RXD 2 Blue TXD 3 Green DTR 1 BLK Brown GND 5 Note jumper J3 on the 6461 1239 to DTR Also make sure to configure 9210 for 12 on pin 9 of the DB9 Also note that the encoder must be set to 4800 N 8 1 Description This block supports the BEI Absolute shaft encoder This encoder connect
97. you have written for Xpert2 Basic sli Coms sll DefLib sll Engine dll Ezsetup sll Logger dl VW LogMgr d11 LZO d11 Remote exe Satlink sll SDI d a Utils dia Xpert exe Windows Basic s1ll Windows Coms s11 Windows DefLib sl11 Windows Engine dll aBaaaaaaadaiaaaaaaaa Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 255 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Windows Ezsetup sll Windows Logger dl1 Windows LogMgr d11 Windows LZO d11 Windows Satlink sl1 Windows SDI d11 Windows Utils dll Windows Xpert exe aaaaaaaa Ne Send over the standard application files Basic sll COMS eS LILT Deflib s1l1 Engine dll EzSetup sll Logger d1ll LogMgr d1l1 LZO d q Remote exe Satlink sll SDI d11 Utils d1ll Xpert exe AnNNDNNNDNDNHNANHNNNNN s Ne Send over any extra slls desired By default these files are not sent Since they aren t used often S the user manual for descriptions To send an extra sll remove the semi colon that precedes the command p sll extra s GPRS232 s11 s NOS s11 P Ne Send over default speech files Flash Disk Speech Flash Disk Speech Englis
98. 0 and signal ground to AGND Connect power as desired Description The ML2x block is used to measure a Delta T ML2x soil moisture sensor The following dialog is used to configure the block for measurement AIO Module fa 7 AIO Channel 4 7 Cancel Cal Method Mineral v Units B AIO Module select the analog module to which you connected the sensor AIO Channel select the channel to which the sensor s V signal is connected Cal Method al and a0 Select the method to use for calibrating the sensor measurement to the actual soil type The possible selections are Mineral Organic and User Cal Mineral and Organic are generalized calibrations for those two classes of soils where predefined values of a0 and al are used to calculate moisture content User Cal allows you to enter your own values for a0 and al that you determine through a soil specific calibration procedure See the ML2x manual for more information on how perform this procedure Units enter the string that should be used when displaying Moisture units Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 169 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com MRL MRL 700 Radar Sensor MRL700 Inputs lt none gt Outputs dist level sigstr Wiring and Configuration Connect the sensor to RS485 A to the 9210 RS485A and the sensor B to the 9210 RS485B OPT COM4 NOTE Leave the settings in the SETUP TAB COM
99. 0 http www sutron com 1 if using a digital channel via 9210B top panel connector Set Channel to the number of the output channel controlling the relay PROT 12 Connect sensor V to the PROT 12 terminal of the 9210B or other connector that provides constant 12V Warmup s The PB200 200WX takes several seconds following power on before valid data is produced The Warmup property is used to define how long to wait before attempting to read data from the sensor after it is first powered on Increase this value until the 9210B no longer consistently logs this sensor s data with BAD quality following sensor power on Note this property is ignored when PwrCtrl is set to PROT 12 Special note for averaging the Average and VecAvg blocks require at least 50 of the incoming samples to be of good quality in order for the averaged values to be set to good quality Hence either the average block s sampling duration must be over twice the warmup time or the inactivity timeout below must be set to ensure the PB200 is powered on for subsequent measurement intervals Inactivity s This property defines how many seconds of inactivity no measurements may occur after a measurement before the sensor is powered down Since the PB200 200WX sensor takes several seconds following power on to produce valid data it often makes sense to not turn off power to the sensor during times of frequent measurements e g when
100. 0 http www sutron com module to determine wind direction Wind direction requires connection to Digital Module input channel The units for wind speed can be set to mph mps kph ftps or knots RM Young Properties Direction AIO Module Z Input Chan F Excit Chan 2 Speed Units MPH v DIO Module 1 x Channel F 7 Cancel Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SDI 12 Inputs lt None gt Outputs Output 1 Output 20 Wiring All SDI 12 sensors wire to GND 12 and Data on the 9210 Multiple wires can be connected to the same connections Description This general purpose sensor block is used to obtain data from a SDI 12 sensor parameters 1 through 20 to retrieve a parameter above 20 please use the Xpert Basic SDICollect function Select the SDI 12 address of the sensor the measurement command type and the units to report with the reading The C concurrent measurement command is only supported by SDI sensors versions 1 3 and higher NOTE The only supported commands are V M MC M1 M9 C CC Cl C9 RO R9 RCO RC9 To get other types of measurements a basic program using the SDI function must be used SdiCollect does not work so data must be parsed by the program The block scales the outputs according to the values of Slope and Offset using the equation
101. 0 2 ms in order for the system to register a count Along with computing the deltacounts and frequency the block also scales the outputs according to the values of Slope and Offset The units for the outputs are forced to be Hz for Freq and CNT for Count and DeltaCount whenever the units are set to Hz The user can change the units for all the outputs by changing the Units field on the property page to the desired value When Reset Count is checked the count resets every time recording is started If the counter has been calibrated it will reset to the calibrated value otherwise it will reset to zero If more than one counter block or tipping bucket block is used on the same input channel all blocks would be reset to zero The Counter block does support Calibration from the Sensors tab and front panel For the calibration the user will enter the current value for the counter The system will then compute a special calibration offset that is applied to the counter Anytime recording is stopped and restarted the counter should be calibrated to a known state as any counts that have occurred during the time when recording was stopped have been missed 154 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Counter Properties Digital Mod Digital Chan Filter Slope Offset Units Reset count d 2 lv Cancel pn Bring
102. 0cces is eacce csi viccsesgee a e tbe a dhs a a rae Meck a i e ai 164 Internal Battery intB at s ccdicccscecksbicceesi ci cas ces checicsncteca E a a a a a AEE EEA REST 167 Z gt E L g Mputa oana a rr EE EE E T Ea E EOE E EEA R 168 DeltaT ML2x ML2x Soil Moisture Sensor ML2X svesne E ran E EE nE EEE EEEn Dan Ar E EE rE 169 MRL D 746 MRL 700 Radar Sensor MRL700 cccccsscesssecssscesccecsececeeecsaeseseeecsaesseceecuecseeecsueceeeescaeseeeeessaeseeeeess 170 SENR Net Radiometer Sensors NetRad cccsccccsssseceessececsesseeecenececeeseececsesaececeeeeecesueeecsesaeeessneeeeesseeeesenaees 172 Bl Airmar PB200 200W X PB 200 issie aon neeaaea e EE causes EEEE EEEE 175 e Hoe a v Jadek Platinum RTD PlatR TID icsse sie carato eeren sates er i eea e TEE e EEE EEEN EEEE OTE EAEE 178 Quadrature Shaft Emcodet cccsceccesssssecsesssecssccccesssncecsesensesssnessessenenceessnsesssneeeesesneeceensnsesssessesssnenss 180 R M Young Wind Sensor RMY UN Q eceecceeceeeeesecsseceecaeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecesecsaecsaecnaessaesaeeeaeseeeeenees 181 S DI C D ates csssaessecesdendeesacedeiacicancestecuegi sed esces E caused ss Yeauestasinadee tated E 183 SDL Aqualrak SDIA QUA c cicss 3ccsecscesvensedcedndadbeustheatsvieescevatnean EEE ETE ETE E EEE 184 SE8500 SES500 scels cesses co veszcbhs parE a AEE SE ENE E EEEE A E EE EE E EET E E EEES EESE 185 Van E 4 Send Current Time SendTime
103. 10 Freq block 158 Frequency block 158 Fuel Moisture sensor block 160 fuses 131 G GetTag block 161 Gill Wind block 162 good data quality 68 Graphical Setup 42 Graycode input mode 147 GUI operation 19 75 Hi Alarm 199 I T O Modules 3 9 See Analog I O Modules Digital I O Modules XLite Analog Module XLite Digital Module Initialize Satlink 50 Insert a Block 98 installation autoexec bat 286 COM ports 126 27 remote exe 286 XTerm 109 Internal Battery block 167 168 Interpolate block 209 211 K kernel updating 259 L Label SHEF formatting 308 Lat Lon 51 53 latitude 304 307 linear sensors 135 live measurements 61 log blocks 229 231 233 See Also blocks See Also blocks See Also blocks log files blocks See log blocks blocks See log blocks blocks See log blocks blocks clearing 68 creating 46 data column 67 date column 68 Day buttons 68 exporting 67 69 Find button 68 managing 46 navigating 68 properties 46 Q quality column 68 selecting 68 sensor column 67 time column 67 units column 68 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 321 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com viewing 67 login 20 logout 20 22 23 longitude 304 307 LOS Radio modem See modems LOS radio modem Low Alarm 199 M Main tab 21 23 maintenance 23 130 max 201 Measure block 212 Measurement interv
104. 10 and signal ground to AGND Connect power as desired Description The SoilTemp block is used to measure soil temperature sensors The following dialog is used to configure the block for measurement Model LI COR 7900 180 7 a OK AIO Module 1 7 Cancel AIO Channel E 7 Units OF c Select the type of soil temperature sensor in Model and specify the analog I O module and channel in AIO Module and AIO Channel Select the Units for the output Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 189 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com fag Solar Radiation SolRad Inputs lt none gt Outputs SolRad Wiring Connect the sensor output to the selected channel on the analog module CH1 CH10 Connect the sensor ground to GND Description This block supports all the solar radiation sensor sold by Sutron part numbers 5600 0600 0601 0602 0603 and 0605 All of these utilize one channel analog input on an Analog I O module Select the sensor part number and the units for the block to output in The Calibration is used in the equation Solar Radiation mv calibration The units for Calibration are typically millivolts per watt per meter squared The sensor manufacturer typically supplies the value for calibration If the units supplied by the manufacturer are in a different format convert them prior to entering the calibration value Specify in
105. 130 control blocks See Also blocks Binary Out 247 Pulse Out 248 count 201 207 Counter block 154 Counts per Turn drop down box 180 CS107 Temperature sensor block 156 CS505 Fuel Moisture sensor block 160 current measurement 137 141 D data column log file 67 data modem See modems data modem date column log file 68 displaying with XLite 73 setting 21 Day buttons 68 Deleting a Block 97 Deleting Multiple Blocks 97 Dew point block 204 206 Dial In Commands 32 Dial Out Commands 32 Digital I O Module 275 counters 276 digital filters 276 features 275 frequency 276 inputs 276 outputs 277 plug assignments 275 shaft encoders 277 specifications 275 direct connect 25 31 Display block 250 Display Status 73 Display Values 74 DLLs 3 overview 3 DoubleVolts 140 DQAP block 207 Dump Log Data 76 78 320 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com E enable excitation channel 142 random transmissions 52 241 self timed transmissions 50 temperature 143 excitation channel 142 exit 72 73 exporting log files 67 69 EzSetup Measurements 37 overview 3 F Field Variable blocks 64 251 File Transfer 115 Find button 62 68 FM block 160 formats transmission 51 53 Formatting ASCII Column 311 ASCII Sensor 312 pseudobinary 302 scheduled pseudobinary 306 SHEF 308 six bit binary 3
106. 183053 means 18 hours 30 minutes and 53 seconds 2 The second line 0250 0250 0250 0250 shows four readings of the first sensor This measurement had four same readings Before formatting that reading was 2 50 It was multiplied by 100 and padded with a leading zero 3 The third line 2231 2232 2233 2234 shows four different readings of the second sensor That sensor s readings were originally 22 31 22 32 22 33 and 22 34 respectively They were multiplied by 100 and padded with a leading zero 4 The fourth line 12 2 is the battery reading in Volts prior to transmission 5 The last line 12 1 is the battery reading in Volts during the last transmission DATA RECEIVED THROUGH DAPS Once data transmitted by Satlink is retrieved it will have information added on by the NESDIS satellite receiver system This information was gathered from the User Interface Manual UIM Version 1 1 for the GOES Data Collection System Automatic Processing System DAPS Here is an example of a message sent by Satlink and received by the DAPS system 010570F207141162408G40 2NN195EFF0O0062 SATLINK DATA BUFFER EMPTY Alive TIME 2007 05 21 12 23 54 SATLINK DATA BUFFER EMPTY Alive TIME 2007 05 21 12 23 54 is data sent by Satlink All the preceding bytes constitute the header added by DAPS Here is an explanation of the header e The first six bytes 010570F2 are the hexadecimal satellite ID This is the same as the ID that Satlink is setup with I
107. 3 2 or later of Remote If the Xpert2 is connected to a firewall and telnet access is desired than the firewall must be configured such that connections on TCP port 23 will be allowed to the Xpert2 In general the TCP IP option is quicker because it has less overhead but since command line access occurs over telnet port 23 Xterm and command line can share the telnet port if desired limiting the number of ports that must be opened in the firewall Redirector Allows XTerm to communicate to a station hosted by the Sutron Redirector service Pressing the Redirector button will allow to specify the user name and password assigned to you by Sutron for this purpose You select the station you wish to connect to by entering its name in the URL box or you may select it from the list of stations you own by pressing the Detect button XTerm for the PocketPC does not show the 640x480 big screen option since its screen is too small The sample command line text area is also missing since the PocketPC does not have a command line Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com To configure XTerm to remember selections when run from a desktop PC press the Create Desktop Shortcut button If you have entered passwords you will be prompted if you wish to store them in the shortcut A shortcut that specifies the options you have selected will be placed on the Windows d
108. 4269 Versions of files in use File Yersion Kernel 5 1 8 Monitor 5 1 8 Mon 09 1 Loader 5 1 8 Remote 3 2 0 4 ert exe 3 2 0 4 O dll a A z The Exit App button is used to stop the 9210 program Normally this is only done to update the program itself When the 9210 program is stopped no data collection or recording will take place The software warns with the message Warning this will terminate the 9210 program All data and setup not in flash will be lost Are you sure Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com OPERATING THE DISPLAY The display provides a simple way of viewing the status and data and it allows for some simple calibration of sensors However the display cannot be used to configure the unit or to do complicated troubleshooting or maintenance The display is very easy to operate To turn the display on simply press any of the keys LEFT SELECT or RIGHT The display will immediately turn on and display the system status followed by the data from selected items in the setup After displaying the values the system prompts Exit Xlite lt gt Choose options The is a reference to the SELECT button lt is LEFT and gt is RIGHT In general pressing SELECT selects the item being displayed Pressing lt or gt either moves the system to the previous or next value or character While a prompt for l
109. 5 14 00 00 AIRTEMP 78 25 GFE 10 26 2005 14 00 00 STAGE We2ds G Tt 10 26 2005 13 45 00 AIRTEMP 78 20 GFE 10 26 2005 13 45 00 STAGE 120 G fT The following shows all bad stage data that occurred today Flash Disk gt GET STAGE BAD TODAY SSP LOG 10 26 2005 05 45 00 STAGE 101 mft 10 26 2005 05 45 00 STAGE 24 Bft The following shows all entries in the system log for the current week Flash Disk gt GET F SYSTEM WEEK SYSTEM LOG 10 23 2005 01 05 05 NOTE Stat User Bob logged in 10 23 2005 01 06 50 NOTE Stat Loaded Flash Disk 543 ssf setup file 10 23 2005 01 05 05 NOTE Stat Running The following sends the last month of AIRTEMP and STAGE data via Ymodem to the PC in CSV format Flash Disk gt GET AIRTEMP STAGE F SSP MONTH CSV YMODEM Ready to send YModem file s press ESC to abort Ymodem all non STAGE data from August ZIP it first to reduce the amount of data that needs to be transferred Flash Disk gt GET STAGE INVERT S 08 01 2005 E 08 31 2005 ZIP Ready to send YModem file s press ESC to abort INFO command Example Flash Disk gt INFO Recent Status 10 26 13 42 Stat Remote user Bob logged in 10 26 13 42 Stat Remote user Bob logged out Active for 104 sec Com Status Stopped Memory Load 51 percent Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to
110. 67 168 replacing 131 Battery Voltage Under Load 304 306 309 BEIEnc block 144 Bin_Int format 51 53 301 Bin_NonInt format 51 53 301 binary formatting 310 Binary Input All Channels block 147 Binary Input block 145 binary input mode 147 Binary Out block 247 BinIn block 145 BinInAllChan block 147 BinOut block 247 blocks adding 89 92 categories 85 connecting 86 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 319 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com control blocks See control blocks deleting 97 inputs and outputs 85 log blocks See log blocks See log blocks See log blocks miscellaneous blocks See miscellaneous blocks overview 3 processing blocks See processing blocks properties 87 92 sensor blocks See sensor blocks telemetry blocks See telemetry blocks wiring 95 BLOCKS modify 95 Bool block 203 BP block 143 Bridge Resistance block 149 Burst 53 54 Burst Int 53 calibrate sensors XPert 61 sensors 74 CapRain block 150 Center in Window 50 Change Setup 75 76 77 channel binary input 145 random 53 self timed 51 cleaning 131 clearing log 68 Com ports configuring 25 30 pin assignments 126 27 testing 30 Communication Test Menu 30 Coms Tag block 237 COMx 286 connection settings in XTerm 117 Constant block 152 ConstIn block 152 contrast adjusting from Login screen 9 adjusting on XLite 9
111. 77 Download the upgrade from www sutron com downloads software htm The upgrade typically comes in a zipped archive and typically has a name similar to Xpert2 vX X X X zip Once downloaded unzip the archive onto your PC 78 Connect your PC to the Xlite using a direct serial cable connection to COM1 Optionally connect the 9210 to a DHCP enabled network via ethernet cable 79 Start XTerm exe on your PC To use ethernet much faster than serial alone start XTerm from a command prompt and specify LAN on the command line e g XTerm exe COM1 115200 LAN 80 Press the Upgrade button on the right side of the XTerm window 81 Select the file Xpert2 vX X X X upg where X s are replaced by firmware version in the Open dialog The upgrade will proceed and finish automatically 82 The contents of the upgrade file specify what part of the Xlite to upgrade The parts upgraded may include the loader kernel application files speech files and custom application files 254 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SLLs When Sutron releases a new version of software for the Xlite the new version is distributed along with a new upgrade file 83 After selecting the upgrade file XTerm uses the upgrade file as a script to guide the upgrade process Dialogs are displayed showing the progress of the upgrade Occasionally the upgrade sc
112. 8 14 50 18 14 50 18 14 50 Scroll right to see the date Press here to display Log Flash Disk ssp log 7 Note the list of available Export Day Day Find Clear Close log files IV Auto Npdate Press here to enter a note into the currently selected log Column Labels Time This is the timestamp for the data in the log This time is normally the time when the data was measured In the case of an average the time will be the time of the last measurement In other cases the time will be the time the computation was completed Sensor This is the user assigned name of the sensor if each sensor is logged onto its own line If EzSetup measurements have been assigned a LogID this is where the LogID is stored These should have unique names so that a charting or analysis programs can treat the values differently Data This is the value of the data point s The value is shown with a user defined number of digits to the right of the decimal point The user can set this precision in the properties window of each log block in the Setup Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Q This is an indication of the quality of the data It is set to G good or B bad by the input module making the measurement Other modules processing the data can also modify this quality This field is not used when the LogID option i
113. 800 http www sutron com Note Iridium and GPRS devices are not managed under the COMS SSP CL menu and are not subject to the ALARM interval Alarm Properties Enable Hi Alarm Enable Low Alarm 7 Hi Limit po i Low Limit fb Hi Mode Off vj Low Mode bor ROC Mode Off v ROC Fixed Interval M ROC Lvl fo fea Alert on ROC Alarm Deadband ob Cancel Hi Alarm Go into alarm if the input value is gt Hi Limit deadband Go out of alarm if the input value is lt Hi Limit deadband Low Alarm Go into alarm if the input value is lt Low Limit deadband Go out of alarm if the input value is gt Low Limit deadband Rate Of 1 When ROC Mode is set to Off no ROC alarm test occurs Change Alarm 2 When ROC Mode is set to Hi the system goes into alarm if the change in input value is gt ROC Mag deadband The system goes out of alarm when the change in input value is lt ROC Mag deadband 3 When ROC Mode is set to Low the system goes into alarm if the change in input value is lt ROC Mag deadband The system goes out of alarm when the change in input value is gt ROC Mag deadband 4 The change in input value is computed in one of two ways depending on the state of Fixed Interval If Fixed Interval is checked the change in input is calculated as the absolute value of the difference between the current value and the last value If Fixed
114. Address Poo E Units fT C Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 185 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Send Current Time SendTime Inputs lt none gt Outputs lt none gt Description This block is used to synchronize the system time of connected units that speak SSP e g other 9210s Xperts 8210s etc This block sends an SSP set time message containing the current system time to the destination unit s specified by the Path property The message is sent periodically according to the scheduling parameters Time and Interval To broadcast the set time message to all listeners set the Path property to Otherwise enter a specific station name or station path e g patha pathb stationx Set the Port property to the communications port to which the other device s is are connected This com port must already be defined in the Setup Tab under COMS SSP CL SendTime Properties Time foo 00 00 o Interval 05 00 00 Cancel Port ssp3 7 Path ie B Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Soil Moisture SoilM Inputs lt none gt Outputs Dielectric Moisture Temp Wiring Connect the sensor output green to the selected channel on the analog module If the Ty
115. CT RICHT T 9 66 LTN i 316 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com EXTERNAL I O MODULES Dimensions shown are in inches Note that on the 8080 0007 module the two 6 32 screws located 3 00 inches apart on the rear of the module provide the earth grounding for the transient protection 3 00 ro Q 1 00 1 20 4 50 GGjo ae 2 92 4 70 J PIN 1 SS ANALOG 20 POS RIBBON Oo H DIGITAL 18 POS RIBBON a LH o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o L a rj VIEW B B VIEW B B f 8 2 ASSY 3 854 ASSY Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 317 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com EXTERNAL MODEM Dimensions are shown in inches 4 50 T MODEL ERIAL Era XPERT VOICE MODEM rts W 8080 0005 tt 8 y i 0 15 8 x as J i 4
116. Content Reflectometer CS625WCR ssssesessessesesssesesssrresereesseeessrresssreesesressereessereesseee 204 AA FREQ Dew Point DE WPL isc ccsesstoscneceusigancttosceveneegeaeaeaecevcaveeaeesstdesgecaveadesse R Govuegudel seteeduseendunsedevegdentevsd avaeeedee 206 DBGAP DQAP Quality Controlled Average cccccccessceescessceeeceseceseceeecaeecaeceneeeeeeseeeseenseceeecaecaeceaecseecaeeeneeeneees 207 A CON Tnterpolate nt rpolate asninn e a E E a E E E E E ESS 209 Georgia Pacific Sampler GPSmpl esssseessseesssreesssreesssrsressrsreerssterssesrrnsestesresrenrsseettsenteneesrentesrenesseeees 211 ia Measure Measure a eh ee leanne 212 Min Max Minimum Maximum MnM aA ra aa ra ea a a ae AE deeded pae aen Eai 213 Mo AVG Moving Average MovingAverage csccscessessesscsseesceseeseesecseesecaeesecaseecsaecaesaecaecseeaeesecaaecsesaecaesareneeesegs 214 x Rr Polynomial Poly sscceaciow ans tees ae sa nleus tiit bh asbh b tabano bna hs oat AASA EAIA acca tinal ate Rie aaa 215 E PtCtrl Pomt Control errete seapea ea e e E aE ene E e ea p ea Eae 216 lt Set Point Control SetPoint niestier iesene vce seh catesees Sabden deca isker ieie ortik sedhecestidhecpsbbebecveaiedessct 218 fos eS Solar Radiation Accumulator SRACC ccccsscccesssscecsececeessececsensececsesaeeecseeecsesaeeeesesaeeecsueeecseaaeeeeseaeeeess 219 ry VectorAverape CVECtAV 2 Esnie piee dead i dd satyehevederduau e ed eeveceodeadedvetbedi
117. DI AquatTrak 184 SDE 12 183 SE8500 185 Soil Moisture 164 186 187 189 Solar Radiation 190 Submersible Pressure Transducer 192 Tipping Bucket 193 Volt Meter 196 197 sensor column log file 67 sensors calibrating 61 live measurements 61 properties 61 sending SDI 12 commands 62 viewing 61 63 Set Clock See Also date setting time setting XTerm control 117 Set Field Variables block 251 Set Point Control block 218 SetFieldVar block 251 SetPoint block 218 setup See Also blocks blocks See blocks Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 323 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com example 85 new 89 setup blocks See blocks Setup File 58 Shaft Encoder block 180 SHEF 308 SHEF format 51 301 six bit binary formatting 310 SLLs 282 Software Development Kit 282 284 Soil Moisture block 164 186 187 189 Solar Radiation Accumulation block 219 Solar Radiation sensor block 190 specifications Digital I O Module 275 RS232 modules 279 XLite 279 speech Coms Tag block 237 files creating 284 loading 124 introduction 25 modem See modems speech modems SR block 190 SSP 161 237 249 standard deviation 201 207 station name Xlite 22 Status button 54 55 Status Options dialog 71 Status tab 71 STD 201 207 Submersible Pressure Transducer block 192 SubPres block 192 suffix 237 Sutron Link Libraries 282 Sutron Speech Voice mo
118. Delete Delete Right Rename lv Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com MODIFYING A GRAPHICAL SETUP DIAGRAM Wiring and Unwiring The 9210 will attempt to wire blocks together automatically whenever possible For example if the output of a Measure processing block is selected and then a log block added the system would automatically wire them together However sometimes blocks need to be wired or unwired manually For a simple example of wiring and unwiring let s say we want to change the setup we have built so far to 1 add a solar radiation sensor block and 2 hook its output to the second log block instead of the RMYoung wind direction output First we add a solar radiation sensor using the Add button as explained in the previous section without using the Wizard F zoom Dg wire Add gt Exit Now we want to unwire the second Measure block To do this first click the RMYoung icon and use Select Output to select the Dir ection output Then click the second Measure block and use Select Input to select Input The Setup Diagram will now look like this with the line connecting the two blocks now in bold F zoom Dg wire F Add gt Exit MeasureLog D SolRad Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com To un
119. E EES OTE 299 SHUTDOWN Command Example wo eee ceeeeeeeeceesceseceecesecaecsaecsaecaeecsaseseseeeesaeseeeseeesecsecsaecsaessaesaes 299 STARTUP Command Example iesse oiner evei oinn te cute vides chante sa dindensepscheensbusndys cbuvbusnevendundepeebeneeses 299 STATION Command Example sesiones era inen eo vedescbavdestcbvdensepsghennsbusnsn cbssbesbeveedvadepceveneests 299 STATUS Command Example Sosis ccscesdea eves cecteeiceostculesuss ubdes chaste S ENEE EO E SEEE EES OTE 300 UPGRADE Command Example ec eceecceecssccesecesecssecsecseecseeeneseseseeeseeeeeesseeesecsaecsaecsaecsaesaeesaeeeaeseasees 300 YMODEM Command Example 0 ccc eeceecceescesecesecesecssecseecseecseeeneseaeseaeesseseesseceseceaecsaecsaecaaecaeesaeseaeeeneee 300 APPENDIX H SATLINK TX FORMATS u csccscsssssscsscssssssescssensssssnescesssssescsssnessssnesccssessessessnsssssnessessessossoees 301 RANDOM TRANSMISSION PSEUDOBINARY DATA FORMAT oii eceeceeceseceecesecssecaeecaeeeaeseeeeeeeees 302 SCHEDULED PSEUDOBINARY DATA FORMAT oii eecesecesecesecssecaeecaeecaeseaeseeeeeeessesecaeeaeeaessaeeaee 306 SCHEDULED SHEF DATA FORMAT aee e a E E E A AE E EEES ESEE 308 SIX BIT BINARY ENCODED FORMAT ooo ccccceecceesceesensecesecesecsaecsaecaaecaeecaeseaeeaesseeeseaeenaesaecsaessaesaae 310 ASCIE COLUMN FORMAT eaii p r a hin ee seule shee E ee te he E E AE NERE RSS 311 ASCH SENSOR FORMATTING eane O E O R EE E EEN IESS 312 DATA RECEIVED THROUGH DAPS on e e E E E EESE 313 APPENDIX I
120. I EEEE TOE E E E A one TO E E IET a E 78 TROY E E ET TTT EEE 78 WD KRCY ax case sszcekt assis ave sseteasea ges cae seeee Lhe se E rE e i TO E E E E E T e R 78 EGIt Basi eessccsscossts seins ansceoestianeesueasezeee aun cgoose ERAOEE E ET E E TERT E 78 Edit S atin ere iie Eeo A E EE E E E e T E TE E E E E Ee EE TEE E E E 78 USING STORAGE CARDS rrii ae roroa TE oa ap EE EErEE EEEE EE E EEEE EET e E 79 Expand log fil capabilites sisisi iere eisi riiseni e esea ren E rakeet I ES EE opr ETETE E TETE e p EE E rE 79 Upload download setups isiin eteesi snra e eera rero E r Te EE S REEE EErEE TEESE Oa ap EEEE E 80 Dowload log files zenna ar a E oi aie a Rae ee A E EE Sie A 80 CHAPTER 4 GRAPHICAL SETUP DIAGRAMS ssesseseseseeseroeseseseccesoroesesesecoeroroesesesoeeesoroeseseeoerosoroesecesoesosoeseseeeee 83 OVERVIEW ha ne a E E E N e e EER E A E AEE a E N S S 84 AN EXAMPLE GRAPHICAL SETUP si duvceccuevetstuersoneducuvedetevtcersvnevvep stent ETE AEE E EEE AEE O E S 85 Bl ck Catet ores annae a E E E A REA ETE EA EE A A R 85 Block Inputs ang Outputs e a e Se R e Sapa sas E A E E Sov gs EE S S S E SES 85 Block COANE Ab T E e ions Seah ay A cabs a A E E S AE ASE 86 Ac veBlocksand P sh P ll o en a R N E E E TE E A A OEA 86 Block Placement e a n E E A E E A A A AT A E A A EESE 87 Bl ck Properties m e E E S R E A A E E antag E S S NAS E ESS 87 CREATINGA NEW GRAPHICAL SETUP kurna eae oaie aa a aNs ee T Sa E EEA E E AASS 89 Adding a Sensor Using the
121. If it doesn t exist the 9210 will try to load a setup file named default ssf If no setup file exists one must be created See Chapter 3 for details After creating the file save it with the name that matches the station name station_name ssf or default ssf to have it loaded at power up Also copy it to the PC so it can be used at other stations Note When a setup is loaded into the 9210 it will automatically create a log file if the setup calls for it Review the setup to make sure it is the correct setup for the station If using a Satlink select the Setup tab press the in front of Satlink then Select Satlink and press Edit Verify the transmission ID is correct Verify the COM port is correct Select Satlink Self Timed Verify settings Select Satlink Random Verify settings Select Self Timed Test Verify the sample formatted message Select Status Verify that the status from Satlink is displayed Verify that the GPS is being received If using a modem or other device configure the COM section of the Setup tab then Select COM from Setup tab and press EDIT Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 Set appropriate COM port for the device type E G Select MODEM on com 3 NOTE SATLINK is configured under Satlink so if a Satlink were connecte
122. Include units header is checked the exported file contains a header that lists the units assigned to each log record field if any Example Header Here s an example of a header that includes the station name as well as field and units headers Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Station Name Xpert Date Time RecID AT RH Heat Flux Esen Dielectric Moisture NetRad SoilTemp mm dd yyyy HH MM SS C W m2 uV W m2 W m2 C 01 27 2012 16 39 00 Default 155 47 100 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 01 27 2012 16 39 30 Default 154 82 100 00 1829 85 42 69 380 42 229 92 27847 42 24 36 Satlink The Satlink branch is used when a Sutron Satlink transmitter is connected This branch is used to manage the details of the setup for both self timed and random transmissions Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status I O Modules Log files Salas Self Timed Random Self Timed Test Random Test Self test H Setup File tpert ssf x Satlink Dialog Selecting Satlink and pressing Edit brings up the main Satlink dialog Satlink Properties Satellite ID fooooooo0 Comm Port comz F Local Time Offset min b fa Initialize Satlink MV OK Cancel Satellite ID This property is the Satellite ID for both self timed and random transmissions The Satellite ID is
123. Interval is not checked the change in input is calculated as the absolute value of the difference between the current value and the last value that caused a ROC Alarm to occur Since no alarm has occurred on the start of recording the first reading taken after the press of START recording Or power up is used as the basis to determine ROC alarm once the unit goes into alarm the alarm value becomes the basis for the next alarm Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 199 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Accumulator Accum Inputs Data the data to accumulate Enable enable disable the accumulation when input is disconnected or input value is non zero accumulation is enabled Outputs TAccum Trigger accumulation Output when the running accumulation surpasses the threshold value Accum Accumulation since last scheduled reset Trigger Trigger Output set to 1 when the running accumulation surpasses the threshold value PTotal Previous total that is value of accumulation at scheduled reset Description The Accum block is used to accumulate input data and to set outputs based on the current accumulation This block is typically used as a part of a system to monitor and control a water sampler where blocks before the accumulator measure level and flow compute discharge and compute discharge time This block then accumulates the total flow and
124. K SPEECH MODEM or other communication devices to the desired communications port COM2 COM3 The 9210 is wired as DTE so use a straight cable to make the connection If you are connecting a modem or other devices to the 9210 you will need to configure it in the setup Connect a PC to COM1 using a straight through cable Start XTERM and press CONNECT Connect power to the 9210 Select Setup Access and log into the 9210 If you will be using a voice modem transfer to the 9210 the desired speech files Basic speech files needed for normal operations are included in the windows directory on the 9210 The speech files take up considerable space on the flash disk Therefore you will only want to send to the 9210 the files you expect to need The speech files are found on the CDROM provided by Sutron The speech files can also be downloaded from the Sutron web site On the CDROM files in the ENGLISH EXTRA should only be loaded as needed Use XTerm to transfer the files to the appropriate folder in the flash disk speech English Spanish etc If the folders do not exist in the 9210 use HyperTerminal and issue the MD command to create the desired folders If you want to create your own speech files refer to the procedure given in Appendix F If you have a setup file s for the 9210 default ssf or anyname ssf use XTerm to load them into the flash disk When the 9210 starts it will first try to load a setup file that matches the station name
125. Log Name property identifies to which log the record should be added The drop down list contains a list of all logs in the system plus an additional entry that allows you to add a new log lt None gt may be selected to disable storing the data record to log files Record ID identifies the name of the record The name given appears as a selection in all LogField block property dialogs and is used to identify which fields belong to this record In addition Record ID is used to name the record entry in the log The Separator property defines the string to use in between each field when formatting the record for output to the log The Minimum property specifies the minimum number of fields that must be formatted into the record before the record will actually be logged The Skip missing data property determines whether to skip fields whose data has not been updated since the last time the record was formatted and logged Skipping a field means skipping it entirely meaning the formatted record won t contain even a placeholder for the data When this property is not checked all fields are included in the logged entry regardless of when Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 233 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com the data was last updated In this latter case it s important to make sure all field and record measurement schedules are set up to ensure that field data me
126. Module A terminal strip 262 operating 113 Digital Module B terminal strip preparing the 9210 to work with XTerm connections 264 113 counters 266 set clock 117 digital filters 266 Upgrade 117 frequency 266 web server 117 inputs 265 XY Function block 223 228 outputs 266 XYFunct block 223 228 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 325 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com
127. ONTH YEAR HOUR S specifies a start date and time for retrieval If a start date is not specified then it will default to where the last GET left off E specifies an end date and time for retrieval If an end date is not specified the end of the log is assumed CSV will use a comma separated format CSV will also show more decimal places by default only 3 places are shown to help keep columns aligned YMODEM will cause the report to be transferred as lt sitename gt _Y YY YMMDD TXT where lt sitename gt is the name of the station and YY YYMMDD is the date of the first entry in the log If the data is from a log other then SSP log then the format of the file created will be as follows lt sitename gt _ lt logfile gt _YYYYMMDD TXT ZIP will cause the output to be compressed in to a ZIP archive file with a ZIP extension If there are more than 24 lines of output the display will pause with a More prompt until space is pressed to continue or ESC to abort C_ will cause the output to be continuous without pause until the end is reached or ESC is pressed REVERSE will cause the output to be generated in reverse time order newest to oldest BAD will cause only bad data and system errors to be displayed INVERT will display all sensors that are not contained in the sensor list Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800
128. Port fea fs default tcp port for telnet servers is 23 User Name SSP alarms may require a user name in order to login to the server before the alarm message can be sent The user name can be specified with this field leave it blank if login is not required Password SSP alarms may require a password in order to login to the server before the alarm message can be sent The password can be specified with this field leave it blank if a password is not required Port The messages are sent using TCP socket communications with auto detection of the Telnet protocol The standard port for a telnet server including the Xlite s is 23 but on a base station that port may not be available or desirable and hence a different port number may be selected with this field Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Communication Test Menu Pressing the Test button displays the following Test Menu This menu gives communications statistics for the selected COM port along with a way to run some simple tests on the port Key and UnKey force DTR on and off for the port Send Mail and Check Mail can be used to communicate with other 9210s or a master station Mail messages are simple text messages Pressing Send Mail will cause the system to prompt for a destination and a message The destination can be a master station or another field station For m
129. RS Sas co seek Iae ates k Sete cody ghseb BGs EE Eaa anoo Eaa Hes Coiote sa vhs Soke 118 Sretni 0 SS ee a Se E E E ET See 118 SUMO WI tise cecek a iicscecke Saeed tek datuseeee shackle cua e Evid Labecencen ive cco chs duvva de tuk ccucaveuruacktebebecuy seoub dy tubs cebwuntev sel tues aetuns 118 Pare Wall lS Atccce sce TE E PEELA AEA EE Oateet RAE EA tam oct amedtie nit eo atctiet ies an in ET 118 Configuring the PC modem for use With Xterm oo esceeecessceceseeeeeeceseeesneecesceeeneeceaeeecaeecsaeeseaeecaeeseneecseeeeneess 119 status and Rx EX Xp Fir MGI CatOrs sc 52 5 siscsscteavisveesseeacdesteesouscaensederscbaeesbesssdensegnnesdgesoeteuesornvbesssdeesenssencaeesetens 120 Special Command Line Opt ons soiien na r seco rsenneg a E E TEE EE TERS 122 CHAPTER 7 INSTALLATION s ssssssssssssssscscsseesscostsctssessecsssosssesssusvecsesossbessoscssessceas sevens aceeeceasetees iv sessize 123 SH A NSA KON DAH DAN E DAO A KO OEE EE E E E E E E E E E EEE 124 YSN COM POR TS agen Soe 126 OAA a TEA E EE E ER E EE E EE 126 Pin OUtanfOrMatt OM MEO AEE E E EE E E E E E E E E E 126 PUI PCT SST BS oy seca E S S E E ts sue uses teeon tel pua Sener eraees 127 Maximum Current Draw from Com Port Pin 9 sesseeseseseseserererererererererererererererererererererererererererererererererererererere 128 Pl te COMA EE EEE iSecseeosencavt bases E ya cx ate bos tad asbbacabeweceeta E Sa hit seen bea 128 Switched Power setting Siennine e a e a gee Seale E secu wes
130. RTD block is used for measuring a 100 ohm platinum temperature devices The dialog allows the selection of the block channel and excitation The type is also selectable 178 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com between 385 and 392 type devices The resistance at zero degrees can be set for calibration purposes The system will do a differential measurement so always select an odd channel number 1 3 5 High resolution readings will take longer than non high resolution readings The high resolution check box should not be checked unless the sense resistor is at least 39 times the 0 degree resistance This means for a 100 ohm PRTD the smallest sense resistor that can be used with the high resolution box checked is 4K Platinum RTD TA AIO module 1 v Units Type OF 355 Input channel a P c O32 Excit channel B r 3 wire mode Hi resolution Ohms 0c fioo A CA Cancel Note If the Platinum RTD conforms to DIN 43760 IEC 751 or IEC 60751 then select type 385 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 179 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Quadrature Shaft Encoder Inputs lt none gt Outputs Level Wiring Wire the pair of Quadrature outputs to digital channels 3 and 4 5 and 6 or 7 and 8 Note channels 1 2 cannot be used for quad
131. Relative Humidity AT RH 00 cece eeeceeeeeceeeceesceeceseceaecsaeceaecaaecsessaeseaeeeeeeeeeeeenees 136 Bal nee Pentel Cortes 024 BS penne eee ee Caer Cae tee een er nr en eee are TET Corer 137 P L_ Barometric Pressur B P a latin ee i 143 BEl L___ BET Absolute Encoder BETEMD Cc spepersi eenean eene e Ea e aaee ip e ie niiae 144 IN Binary Input BMN ee ein reteo rert area cs seeescchesd nates tacescghdsevabes vasucdstessss OKEERIS EE PERESO REESS Eio ERER 145 Hou Binary Input All Channels BinInAlIChan cessssssssscsssssssssssssesscsssssssssseseecsesnsssssssseneeesnsnsesessesenevenen 147 K gt Bridge Resistance Bridge issen e a E A E ES 149 6 2 CapRain CapRain soiien ere ee aE a EEE E e E E EEEE EEE E E EEE aE E OTENE Ek 150 const El Constant Const 42 2A Sek eee AS GS OA I A EE 152 Cntr Counter Counter 2 033 Ahaha hee Lae AA eae Aes eA A E 154 CS107 Temperature Sensor CSLO7Temp 000 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeceeecesecesecesecsaecsaecsaecaaeeaeseaesseeeeeeeeeenseensees 156 vi nea MEA Freguent y BTEC naea apnee iae a S EEEa araoe eE Ee a n R O E 158 fal Fuel Moisture FM crisps iini ei aE E a E R A aE E E E Asante 160 al GET AD sacs r a sve es vba E stress tances A AE E RA A E R E E E 161 Gill en Gill Wind Gill Wind Sensor c ccccssccccssssecessecceceesececsesaececsneeeesssaececseaaececseeeeceesaeeecsesaeeeceeseeeeeseeeeseaaees 162 ee Heat Flux HeatBlux 2 23 lt c
132. S SSP CL COM 4 set to None as this block will not be able to use the com port if Coms SSP CL is already using it The sensor must be configured to output in the following format distance signal strength with 9600 baud 7bit even parity one stop bit Configure the sensor to output 0 00 if it loses signal For more information see the 8800 1146 MRL users manual Connect Power leads as configured below either to GND and SW D 12 for AIO sw or DIO sw or through a relay that is switching the battery and using the selected DIO channel for control Description The MRL700 is used for measuring distance and therefore level The properties dialog is used to specify configuration details required for proper operation Reference is used to specify the reference distance and is used to compute level Warmup is the number of seconds the unit should be powered on before taking a measurement A typical warmup value is 30 seconds this is the time the sensor needs to provide back reliable readings If the values are to be averaged make sure to set the average time to at least two times this warmup time E G For 30 seconds of warmup the sensor should be averaged for at least one minute Inactivity is the number of seconds the unit should remain powered on following a measurement This prevents the sensor from having to go through the warmup time for every reading E G If averaging every 5 seconds setting this inactivity timer
133. S 232 DB9 cable between the PC and the 9210 A M M gender changer and a Null Modem are necessary to connect 9210 to the PocketPC The program in the 9210 responsible for communicating with XTerm is remote exe When the 9210 starts up it will check for an autoexec bat file in the flash disk folder If an autoexec bat file is not found the system will automatically run remote exe on COM 1 If the file is found the system will execute the contents of autoexec bat In this case remote exe will only run if there is a line in the file to run it In the event that a system has an autoexec bat file that does not run remote exe and it is needed Connect a terminal program to com set to 115200 8N1 apply power to the unit and hold down CTRL C ctrl key and C key at same time This will bypass the autoexec bat file and always run remote exe from the windows directory Once this is done a new autoexec bat may be transferred to the unit using XTerm NOTE this procedure will not run Xpert exe so connecting with XTerm will show a blank screen Operating XTerm When XTerm communicates with a 9210 that has user accounts setup a username and password must be supplied to gain access When this happens simply enter a valid username and password When XTerm starts it will look similar to the window below with the left portion displaying the contents of the 9210 The entire screen of the PocketPC display shows the contents of the 9210 Click or tap
134. Setup Sensors Log Status E EZSetup Measurements 3 01 00 15 00 Next 11 15 00 01 AirTemp AIO 1 Ch 1 15 6 F 02 TipBckt DIO 1 Ch 1 0 MM New Sensor 02 01 00 00 Next 12 00 00 01 BattVolt 13 08 New Sensor New Measurement iy EzSetup organizes sensors by measurement schedule similar to the way the 8210 data logger worked though the 9210 can have multiple measurement schedules Each measurement schedule has a set of sensors assigned to it Whenever the measurement schedule executes the sensors are measured In the example above two measurement schedules have been defined The first schedule will measure AirTemp and TipBckt every 15 minutes The second will measure BattVolt every hour You can see the next measurement of AirTemp and TipBckt will occur at 11 15 00 and that the last measured values for each of these parameters were 15 6F and OMM Note this status information does not update automatically To update select the root entry EZSetup Measurements and press the Refresh button Editing a measurement or sensor requires recording to be turned off When you try to create or edit a measurement or sensor the system will prompt you to stop recording When the create or edit is complete the system will prompt you to restart recording The measurements and sensors you define in EzSetup are stored in the 9210 setup file If a setup file has been
135. Setup tab Click LOG then EDIT Click the NEW button Click the button next to filename Click the UP button and then double click into the storage card s folder 10 Enter a file name for the log 11 Click the OK button back to the LOG FILE PROPERTIES box 12 Don t forget to increase the size of the log file 13 Click OK and the log file will be created on the storage card ON DAR To use the log on the storage card select the log file on the storage card folder from the LOG block properties Note the minimum log size is 2048 bytes The maximum log size is the lesser of 1 2 billion bytes or 2 the free space available on the storage medium minus a small safety buffer 32k for storage cards 192k for Flash Disk Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Upload download setups Setup files can be stored on storage cards just as they are stored on the local flash disk To do this follow these steps To save the setup from the GUI Xterm 14 Place the card into the storage card slot 15 Go to the Setup tab 16 Highlight the Setup File entry and press the Save As button 17 On the right side of the File Name dialog press the Up button 18 Double click the name of the storage card folder USB Card SD Card 19 Give the setup a name or leave it at the default then click ok To open a setup from the GUI Xterm 20 Place
136. SpeakPhrase Speak the specified phrase SpeakTag Speak the prefix phrase value suffix phrase and alarm status of the specified sensor StoreManual Store the last data entered by the user with the InputManual command or 0 if no value has been entered in to the specified tag This allows the user to change operating values of the system use WaitForPass to authorize WaitForPass Pause until the user enters a DTMF sequence which matches the specified sequence The system will timeout if the user doesn t enter a code in less than one minute Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Use Branch USER BranchDTME LABEL to build a menu system Label USER 0 gt SpeakPhrase Hello welcome to the Sutron Xpert This introduction is Pause 1 0 repeated over and over for SpeakPhrase Please press pound up to 60 a uu the user Pause 2 0 presses the button on BranchNoDTMF USER the phone BranchDTMF Label DMTF Label USER 1 SpeakPhrase For live data SpeakPhrase Please press SpeakPhrase 1 Pause 1 0 SpeakPhrase To acknowledge alarms BRANCH DTMF SpeakPhrase Please press will go to the SpeakPhrase 2 DTMF number Pause 1 0 pressed SpeakPhrase To hang up SpeakPhrase Please press SpeakPhrase 3 BranchDTMF Label DTMF 1 SpeakAllTags Pause 1 0 Branch USER 1 DTMF 1 speaks tags and DTMF 2 Acknowledges alarms speaks alarms and then re
137. Status H Basic Coms SSP CL m EzSetup Measurements amp 01 00 15 00 Next 00 00 00 01 Level AIO 1 Ch 1 New Sensor New Measurement Graphical Setup 1 0 Modules 7 Now the system displays that it has an EZSetup measurement defined and that a sensor has been placed into that measurement Adding more sensors to that measurement is done by selecting the New Sensor and repeating the previous steps selecting the appropriate sensor type IO module Channel etc 104 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Creating an additional EZSetup measurement to add hourly averages for example is done by selecting New Measurement and repeating the previous steps including adding what sensors to measure by this new schedule REMEMBER defining a schedule does no good without defining the sensors below it So to add an hourly average of the QuadSE sensor previously setup on the fifteen minute interval Define a new EZSetup measurement this time setup the Measurement interval to hourly set the sampling interval to the desired time and set the number of samples If one minute interval is used number of samples could be set to 60 to take samples for the whole hour Add a new sensor with the same IO module and channel as previously defined to get the data from the same shaft encoder Check the box labe
138. TS on the communication port This is used to cause an LOS Radio to unkey and stop transmitting Edit Basic The Edit Basic menu item allows the user to load and save program files to and from a storage card as well as to delete basic program files from the Flash Disk Edit Satlink The Edit Satlink menu item allows the user to change the Satlink satellite id and self timed transmit time in minutes as well as to send a test transmission When Sat ID is selected the system will prompt the user to enter the eight 8 character satellite id that consists of the characters 1 9 and A F After scrolling to the end of the id entry the system prompts to save the entry Move the cursor to lt OK gt and press select to save the entry or move the cursor to lt CANCEL gt and press select to cancel the changes Note If the selected self timed format is INSAT in the system setup then a second satellite id may also be changed When Tx Time is selected the system will prompt the user to enter the number of minutes for the desired transmit time For example if a transmit time of 04 00 00 were desired you would enter the number of minutes in 4 hours or 240 After scrolling to the end of the entry the system prompts to save Move the cursor to lt OK gt and press select to save the entry or move the cursor to lt CANCEL gt and press select to cancel the changes When Test Tx is selected the system will prompt Are you sure This
139. Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Use these units Ld gi If Use these units is checked then the text entered below it is used as the units for the constant block otherwise the units are passed on to the next block as blank Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 153 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Cntr Counter Counter Inputs lt none gt Outputs Count DeltaCount Freq Wiring Connect the device to the selected digital input NOTE Channel 1 has a divide by eight circuit for higher frequencies Xlite has this calculation built in and will show the correct frequency without any additional math Do not use channel one to get a count or delta count as it will only update every eight counts Description The Counter block is a general purpose block for measuring a counter or frequency input Each time the block is run it collects counter information from the digital I O module and then computes a delta count and frequency from the data collected the last time the block was run As a result the first time this block is run the frequency and delta count output will not have valid data Filter is used to debounce noisy inputs Most mechanical switches like a tipping bucket output have noise so a filter should be used with switches A value of 0 specifies no debouncing while a value of 1 to 255 requires the input to remain high for filter_value
140. The modem accepts DTMF tones to control the speech and interact with a caller The user can record custom phrases and words to augment the standard vocabulary using standard PC hardware and software Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 279 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com LOS Radio The recorder has a serial port for connecting LOS Radio modems The port is compatible with third party radio modems such as those manufactured by MDS Using a radio modem provides one or two way communications between nodes or a central station The modem makes it possible for the remote connection to perform all functions as though the module were local to the system Two nodes may use radio communications over a short distance to eliminate expensive wiring At other times radio communications will be used between the nodes and a central station The radio modems must be compatible with repeaters in cases where there is not a clear line of sight between two nodes Satlink Transmitter The recorder has a serial port for connecting a Sutron Satlink transmitter The recorder will set up and operate the satellite radio through the serial port The setup includes specifying of the transmit mode ID time interval setting the time making test transmissions etc Operations include loading data for transmission logging transmission status and exceptions synchronizing clocks etc 280 Bringing the Benefits
141. U N gt lt COUNTER gt lt BATTLOAD gt lt LAT LONG gt where GROUP ID The GROUP ID is a 2 for all random transmissions OFFSET OFFSET is a 1 byte binary encoded number indicating the number of minutes ago the most recent data was recorded Note that the number of minutes is calculated about 15 seconds prior to transmission MEASUREMENT Measurement data collected by Satlink Logger this DATA data contains only those measurements set up to be included in the random transmission The data values are 3 byte binary encoded signed numbers allowing a range of 131072 to 131071 The actual 6 bit binary encoded format is described later The value transmitted is taken directly from the 32 value measurement buffer in Satlink Logger The value transmitted will be value 10 RightDigits The string will be sent if the data was never measured or was erased The number of values sent for each measurement is set separately for each measurement in the Random Transmissions Num values to Tx field Note that this is different from the 8210 where the num values to Tx was the same for each sensor As a result Satlink Logger sends all the required values for one sensor most recent first before proceeding to the next measurement In the 8210 values were interleaved Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 303 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com LAT LONG This is an opti
142. Wizard sennen a E S E Sau E S A A R E 89 Adding Additional BlOCKS eeens e e e ree E r oE S E EE E rE ETE E E EES RE S rE 90 Changing Block Properties ss csc rici rreri eoir eE arre E rE E EEEE EE TESTET E E E a E ESE 92 Sensor Block Example iiien rrer ee rE eg ss E E EE EE EE E EE E EE E EE ras ETE E 92 Processing Block Example soriire Treia aserre Ts E E e EE E E rE EE a E 93 Log Block Examples enirere n rore aea rr E TE E E EEEE r E 93 Changing the Block Label 32 a ss bssescsesisesscbscuss cs caecssageisesoue ipi reae Ee EEE a ei Ee ET EErEE EEr e oo E 94 MODIFYING A GRAPHICAL SETUP DIAGRAM isernia eatea E ET EEVEE E ISEE EE R E E E 95 Wiring and UNWiring eeen cape see cbse toe reres cosssiates r a EE Eroa EEEE E EEE ET sa EPEE E EEEE TERTE T E Eo ao E EEr 95 Deleting a Block iee sarn eeraa roae ara eE oare P EEr E E TEE TEETE TO E n E EEE 97 Deleting Multiple Blocks stsc sse caevssecssthis cesksesscoeseusnes sevessayeke yscte capessotesetsdepcayt ESERE rE EOST E S E a p EEEE 97 Inserting a Blockin a e aeee E E EEr EE EEEE EE EE T EE a E 98 CHAPTER 5 EXAMPLE SETUPS 0 cscsscssssssssssssccesscescssssscsssnessssnessesssssesssssnessssnessesscssossesssessssnessessessoseessoes 100 EZSETUP FOR A STREAM GAUGING STATION cssscssscssssscsscssevssescssncasssecsecssasasssssencasssvesossevsvssssencasussceronsesavsraees 101 GRAPHICAL SETUP TO COMPUTE DAILY MIN MAX cccsscecsesesseesceecesesecseesseeceeessecsuesecsessscneseeassecsussecse
143. a Collection to the World 151 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com fons Constant ConstIn Inputs lt none gt Outputs Const Wiring None Description The constant block provides a constant value output This can be valuable for testing setup diagrams before physical sensor are hooked up or in any other situation where a constant output is needed A constant value may be modified via calibration or by setting the value of a connected ComsTag block using telemetry the command line SET command or the Data tab This allows a constant block to be used for manual readings and other purposes Modified values are stored back in to the setup file Constant Properties Constant f al Test Units The Read Only check box may be used to prevent the constant value from being modified by means other than direct modification of the setup The Test check box is used to generate data that varies This can be useful for system tests When Test is checked the data will vary as follows Constant Output 1 TickCount ticks have units of milliseconds not synchronized to any particular time 2 Random Number between 1 and 32767 3 Output increases by 1 4 Output increases by 1 and delay 500 ms The Units button may be used to define the units for the constant value 152 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation
144. abeled Start Pushing Start will start recording changing the status box to read ON or ON TX if transmissions have been enabled in the setup The Start button then changes to read Stop The alarm status box indicates the current alarm state The current alarm state may be NORMAL ALARM or ALERT The Clear button is used to clear the current state a clear during ALERT transmissions the system to ALARM while a clear during ALARM transmissions the system to NORMAL See Coms SSP CL under Setup for more information Battery Voltage The Battery Voltage status area displays the supply voltage This value is measured and updated every 5 minutes This is read from the built in Xlite Analog module at module number 1 If external analog modules are connected to the system their module number MUST be set to 2 or higher The internal lithium clock battery should be replaced every 5 years This battery is only used for preserving date and time when power is removed from the system If on power up the system Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com detects that it has lost the date and time it will set the date to 1 1 1984 No other operating parameters are preserved by this battery See Common Maintenance and troubleshooting for information on changing the battery Logout Pressing Logout will logout of the system and re display the login scr
145. able gives the jumper settings and their default settings To change the default settings open the Xlite and change these jumpers COMI COM2 COM3 COM4 Configuration J800 J900 J901 J1000 Jumper connector Default Ring in Ring in 5V Switched Ring in configuration for Pin 9 Configuration Jumpers RI 5V SW D 12V SW D 5V In the switched configuration power is turned on when the port is opened and turned off when the port is closed Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 127 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com DOO N anA 0 a S EB o ud o LJ Suits B mH o S O fe i ce O So R 5 i 8 COM1 J800 COM2 J900 j COM3 J901 COM4 J1000 5V_ 12V RI SWD SWD 5V_ 12V e T212 12 a 3 4 1 3 4 3 4 0 Eal 5 6 E5 a 78 7 8 7 8 A eo en em res glok 1 o J COM Port Jumper Locations Maximum Current Draw from Com Port Pin 9 Xlite Com 1 4 Each of the pin 9 power outputs is individually fused and each can provide up
146. ads software htm The upgrade typically comes in a zipped archive and typically has a name similar to Xpert2 v3 0 zip Once downloaded unzip the archive onto your PC The boot loader is stored in the file Xpert2 lod 96 Start hyperterm or other terminal program on a PC Set the baud rate to 115 200 Connect the COM1 serial port to the Xlite If you intend to transfer the boot loader file via ethernet connect the Xlite to a network that supports DHCP using an ethernet cable 97 Power up the Xlite Press ESC in response to the message Press ESC now to Upgrade System 98 Press L to indicate you want to transfer the boot loader 99 Press U to indicate you want to upgrade the boot loader 100 Use the menus that follow to specify either a transfer via ymodem or ethernet and follow the instructions to send the file Xpert2 lod downloaded in step 1 101 After the upgrade is complete reboot the Xlite Upgrade the Kernel The Xlite boot menu provides the ability to upgrade the Xlite kernel either by serial or ethernet transfer 102 Download either the serial or storage card upgrade from the Sutron website at the following address www sutron com downloads software htm The upgrade typically comes in a zipped archive and typically has a name similar to Xpert2 v3 0 zip Once downloaded unzip the archive onto your PC The kernel is stored in the file Xpert2 ker 103 Start hyperterm or other terminal
147. age negated This can be used in cases where applying a DC excitation voltage would causes undesirable changes to the medium being measured An external 20 ohm bridge completion resistor must be used In some cases a 100 ohm resistor will provide greater accuracy Thermistor This is a specialized resistance measurement geared for thermistors An external 10K ohm bridge completion resistor is expected to be used The accuracy of the reading is directly dependant on the tolerance and stability of the completion resistor utilized For example a 0 1 error in the completion resistor at room temperature can produce a 0 02C error in the temperature reading of a typical 10K thermistor If using an external 8080 0003 analog module a stable and highly accurate 10K internal resister is used and the excitation channel voltage is overridden to be 5V This reading produces the thermistor s resistance If the desired result is temperature then review the Air Temperature Block to see if it supports the thermistor being measured Volts HiGain When you select the Volts HiGain measurement type a voltage measurement is made using hi gain The maximum input voltage is 78mV when measuring using either the onboard Analog IO module or when using the 8080 0007 Analog IO module The maximum input voltage is 312mV when using the 8080 0003 Analog IO module Volts x128 When you select the Volts x128 measurement type a voltage measurement is made using
148. ail to work the unit must have a dedicated or LOS radio communications link Send and Check mail use Sutron Standard Protocol SSP for the mail messages Port comi Good Total 16657 16876 4 16269 16269 i Key Check Mail Unkey Send Mail Coms SSP CL Configuration Settings After you define a device under Coms SSP CL it is displayed as a sub item of the Coms SSP CL entry See the picture below where the comms devices RADIO2 and MODEM3 have been defined Rx Tx Clear Main Setup Sensors Data Log Status H Basic Corms SSP CL RADIO 2 MODEMS amp EZSetup Measurements H Graphical Setup 1 0 Modules LAN Settings Log files 7 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com To access the configuration settings for one of these devices simply highlight the device in the tree and press the Edit button This will bring up the config settings that are specific to the device selected which are described in the following sections Direct Connect Settings This dialog is used to configure the alarm and alert settings for the direct connection Direct Connect Settings Tx Normal Rate 00 00 00 i Tx Alarm Rate 00 00 00 Sai Cancel _ Disable Alerts 00 00 00 will disable a Tx Tx Normal Rate is
149. ained UPGRADE YES P The UPGRADE command is used to upgrade system files using the Ymodem protocol This previous version of this command is now called OLDUPGRADE An upgrade can consist of a single new file to add to the system or complete set of application files contained in a ZIP file The upgrade command cannot upgrade the kernel or the loader only application files such as Xpert exe Remote exe DLLs SLLs BAS files etc are supported The UPG file used to perform upgrades with XTerm is not used The user is prompted Are you sure and must respond with a Y or y before the upgrade proceeds Following are the steps performed The Xpert application is shutdown Any old application files on the Flash Disk are deleted This includes XPert exe DLL and SLL The file transfer is performed The file or file s are then stored on the Flash Disk If the currently executing Remote exe needs to be replaced then Remote will shut itself down and restart the new version This will drop the current connection The Autoexec bat file will be verified and or modified to make sure that the correct version of Xpert exe is executing Flash Disk Xpert exe if it exists otherwise Windows Xpert exe The Xpert application is re started the one stored in the Flash Disk folder if it exists otherwise the one in the Windows folder Options The YES option will bypass the Are you sure pro
150. ake sure it has the line flash disk xpert exe in it If the unit has the autoexec bat and it has the line to run the xpert exe in it then close xterm run a terminal program 115200 8 N 1 and reboot the 9210 You should see the very last line of bootup information showing Launch complete If you do not see this or get any other errors contact customer service for further assistance Adjust the contrast To adjust the contrast on the Xlite press SELECT and while holding SELECT use the RIGHT button to increase the contrast or LEFT to decrease the contrast The contrast setting is 130 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com remembered by the display so it is not normally necessary to set the contrast each time you use the Xlite Replace the Internal Battery every 5 years DISCONNECT POWER before opening the unit The 9210 has an internal lithium battery to keep the clock running when power is removed This battery should be replaced every 5 years as a preventative measure Typically on a unit that is sitting on the shelf with no power applied the battery will last for 9 years The 5 year recommendation is intended to provide a margin for the worst case situations The battery is a 3 Volt BR2330 type coin cell Note you will need to set the time after replacing the battery Upon power up the RTC date and time validity are checked If deter
151. al 308 Label setting 308 measurements analog 136 42 269 live 61 min 201 Minimum Maximum block 213 miscellaneous blocks See Also blocks Display 250 Set Field Variables 251 missing data 308 models 5 modems data modem 36 LOS Radio modem 36 280 speech modem 5 279 MODEMx 287 Moving Average block 214 multiplier 158 N NESDIS 51 301 NFDRS format 51 302 Norm Rate 53 NOS format 51 302 O operation 19 75 passwords 20 60 period 158 Platinum RTD block 175 178 Polynomial block 215 powering up 9 Precip block 193 precision 94 prefix 237 Process List Folder 116 processing blocks See Also blocks Accum 200 Alarm 198 Average 201 Boolean 203 DQAP 207 Interpolate 209 211 Measure 212 Minimum Maximum 213 Moving Average 214 Point Control 216 Polynomial 215 Set Point Control 218 Solar Radiation Accumulation block 219 Vector Average 221 XY Function 223 228 Processing blocks Dew Point 204 206 product description 4 pseudobinary format random transmission 302 scheduled transmission 306 PtCtrl 216 Pulse Out block 248 PulseOut block 248 Q Quadrature Shaft Encoder block 180 quality 306 309 appending to random transmission 53 appending to self timed transmission 51 column log file 68 R radio modem See modems LOS Radio modem RADIOx 287 Random Group block 239 322 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporat
152. al if an input block exists to make the measurement use it if not find a generic input block VDC for voltages In this example the data also needs to be processed for daily minimum maximums So a special block is needed this block has already been defined and is provided in the default 9210 library had it not been included it would need to be developed either by Sutron or by using the software development kit Once the measurements have been defined and the associated blocks needed to do the measurements have been identified it is time to start building the setup Below is the result of building the Graphical setup block by block starting at the left This was done without the use of the wizard since multiple outputs and blocks were needed Here is the graphical setup Display MaxTime It may look complicated at first but by looking at it piece by piece it will make sense Note that in the graphical setup data is flowing from left to right So in the above example At the far left is where the data is connected an analog channel measured by a VDC block Next is a display block this tells the system to display all data that passes through this point last measured value in this case Not only is the data displayed but it is also logged by placing a log block directly after the display The log could be placed before the display but anytime a measurement is forced from the front panel it would be logged
153. al different models are available The models include 9210 0000 2B 9210 9210 SL2 2B 9210 with Satlink2 9210 ENC B 9210 within rugged enclosure 9210 SL2 ENC B 9210 with SatLink2 within enclosure In addition the following are available as add ons to the system Telemetry Modules 8080 0005 1 Speech modem SL2 G312 1 Satellite Transmitter T O Modules 8080 0002 1 Digital I O 8 Channels 8080 0002 4 Digital I O 8 Channels with Surge Protection and 24 Cable 8080 0003 1 Precision Analog I O 6 Channels 8080 0003 3 Precision Analog I O 6 Channels with Surge Protection and 24 Cable 8080 0007 1 Xpert 10 channel 16 bit Analog I O Termination Board 6461 1239 1T RS232 Surge Protection 6461 1240 1T Phone Surge Protection 6461 1241 1T SDI Surge Protection 6461 1242 1T Power Protection Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Chapter 2 Getting Started UNPACKING Carefully unpack the 9210 and other components that came with the system Note that some items come standard while other items are optional Standard Items The following items are included with every unit One 9210 One CDROM containing PC Utilities and manuals One DB9 M F serial cable Common Optional Items The next items sold separately either because they can be shared between systems or because not all installations require them are often also included
154. alue is normally set to one When set to a value other than one Satlink will make this number of transmissions with each transmission separated by Burst Rate number of seconds Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Values This property defines the number of values to include in the random transmission This value is used for the BIN INT transmission format to set the number of values to send for each sensor E G If set to 32 and 4 sensors are sending data then a total of 128 data values are sent other formats will use the NUM VALUES defined in the random parameter blocks in the setup The number entered here will also set the default value when placing a random parameter block into the setup for BIN NONINT format Self Timed Test The Self Timed Test dialog is used to make a test transmission see the selected format of a self timed transmission and see the detailed status of the transmitter Pressing the Send button makes test transmissions Before pressing Send Satlink must be set up with valid information on both the Satlink dialog and Satlink self time dialogs Test transmissions should only be made on special test channels or with the Satlink connected to a dummy load Otherwise the transmission may interfere with other stations The test message that will be sent is displayed in the text box to the left of the send button Change the messag
155. ancel Differential V Temp Component Upper Pyrano Heater AIO Channel F i 7 vent Sensitivity 1 iek Model Select the Model you wish to measure AIO Module select the analog module to which you connected the sensor Differential check this box to measure the sensor input s differentially Component when Model is either CNR 2 or CNR 4 use this drop down to select which component to configure using AIO Channel and Sensitivity AIO Channel the channel to which the sensor s V signal is connected When Model is either CNR 2 or CNR 4 the channel applies to the selected Input Sensitivity the sensitivity of the selected signal When Model is either CNR 2 or CNR 4 the sensitivity applies to the selected Input Temperature When CNR 4 is selected configure the block to measure temperature by selecting the Temp button and entering the AIO module and channel to which the temp signals have been connected Also enter the value of the completion resistor in ohms you used when wiring the thermistor Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 173 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com NetRad Temperature AIO Module 2 7 a E AIO Channel 9 Compl Res 10000 ia Heater and Ventilator The CNR 4 optionally includes a Heater and Ventilator The heater can be used to melt frost and the ventilator is used to provide efficient air
156. and then selecting the file with the mouse or by pressing SHIFT and then selecting the file with the mouse to select a range of files On the PocketPC select multiple files by pressing and holding the Action button and tap the additional files The Action button is typically the largest button on the device below the screen See the PocketPC documentation for further information Use either the Sel All button or the Select All menu item to select all items in the list Use either the Delete button or the Delete menu item to delete files on either the PC or 9210 Use either the Run button or the Run menu item to run a program on the 9210 Note that it is not possible to run a program with command line arguments in this way Note that all times displayed on the right side of the file transfer dialog top on the Pocket PC are shown in device time which knows nothing about local time All times displayed on the left side bottom on the Pocket PC are shown in PC time which reflects a correction for the PC s local time zone This can lead to some confusing behavior when the PC s local time zone is set to something other than Greenwich Mean Time GMT as certainly many are For example if you transfer a file from the 9210 to the PC the file timestamp shown on the PC will be different than what is shown on the 9210 The key to working through this confusion is to remember the times shown in both cases are each relat
157. are as follows Tx Good Number of messages sent that appeared to go thru Tx Total Number of messages attempted Tx Bad Number of transmissions that failed Clear SSP Stats This option will clear the RX and TX counts Check Mail This option will display any SSP test messages received on the port Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Send Mail This option is used to send an SSP test message You will be prompted for the Destination the Mail Message to send and the Bytes to Send To stress the connection you may send very long messages by increasing the Bytes to Send and the message you entered will be repeated as many times as needed to achieve the desired number of bytes The Destination will default to which will cause any station listening to receive and acknowledge the message but a specific station name may be entered When the operations has completed either the message Mail Delivered or Mail Failed will be flashed on the screen for 2 seconds A Mail Delivered message is proof that 2 way communications occurred Key This option will assert DTR and RTS on the communication port This is used to cause a LOS Radio to key or turn on and send a pure carrier signal at which point transmission power and receive power tests can be conducted UnKey This option will de assert DTS and R
158. are between the 9210 and PC In addition access to special virtual files in the 9210 that describe details about the software are available When File Transfer is selected a window similar to the following appears desktop PC shown left PocketPC shown right x fylxtermcomi11s200 46253 PC Files c Pert Files Flash Disk Kl Config Msi Ld lt DIR gt 2 PPC My Documents C msdownld tmp lt DIR gt 11 L lt DIR gt z Program Files lt DIR gt og engish lt DIR gt 05 16 2002 16 39 Busnes pls a oy 20 RECYCLER lt DIR gt TIMI autoexec bat 71 11 14 2002 10 18 Personal lt DIR gt ior too lt DIR gt 12 Coms sll 133120 12 20 2002 13 17 1 Templates lt DIR gt 01 01 200 System Volume Information lt DIR gt 10 data log 2048 12 20 2002 08 52 1 2002 12 13 csv 4725035 12 13 2004 TEMP lt DIR gt ot DefLib st 462336 12 20 2002 13 171 Note pwi 438 12 02 20q inCE211 lt DIR gt 05 157184 12 20 2002 13 17 C indows CE Tools lt DIR gt 05 ee 2 39 Select All LogMar d Delete 120 dll Get from Xpert Modems Run He 33 2002 13 17 C INNT lt DIR gt 12 pert lt DIR gt 01 _NavCCit Log 4102 08 AUTOEXEC BAT 36 11 BOOT BAK 382 05 boot ini 382 0 CONFIG SYS 0 10 o sys 0 10 lt DIR gt lt DIR gt 56320 12 20 2002 1317 1 NOSReport sll 12288 12 20 2002 1317 1 Remote exe 124416 12 20 2002 13 21 2 x RR15 ssf 6835 09 26 2002 13 15 1 i
159. arm if the change in input value is lt ROC Mag deadband The system goes out of alarm when the change in input value is gt ROC Mag deadband 4 The change in input value is computed in one of two ways depending on the state of Fixed Interval If Fixed Interval is checked the change in input is calculated as the absolute value of the difference between the current value and the last value If Fixed Interval is not checked the change in input is calculated as the absolute value of the difference between the current value and the last value that caused a ROC Alarm to occur Since no alarm has occurred on the start of recording the first reading taken after the press of START recording Or power up is used as the basis to determine ROC alarm once the unit goes into alarm the alarm value becomes the basis for the next alarm 240 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Random Parameter Random Inputs Input Outputs Output pass through Description This block allows you to include the data from the input in a random satellite transmission It is most commonly linked to the output of a log block but can also be linked to the output of a measure or average The Setup tab Random Properties dialog is used to enable random transmissions and define the normal and alarm rate for the transmissions This block lets you assign the
160. asurement so select an odd numbered input channel Bridge Properties Analog I O Module 1 v Cancel Input Channel Excitation Channel Slope fo Offset bo Warmup 100 A Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 149 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 6 CapRain CapRain Inputs lt none gt Outputs Rain Wiring Connect the sensor output to the selected analog channel Connect the sensor power to PROT 12 B17 and GND B16 or Description The CapRain block is designed to make measurements from an RM Young 50202 Capacitive Precipitation Gauge It may also work with other rain gauges with an analog output The RM Young 50202 sensor has an analog output 0 5 volts corresponding to 0 50mm 0 to 2 5 inches rain The sensor automatically empties itself so the output will periodically go to zero The CapRain block has special processing designed to prevent measurements while the gauge is emptying the bucket This processing takes two measurements of the gauge two seconds apart If the output drops by more than 0 1 volts in this two second interval the system sleeps for 5 seconds and then tries again Up to six retries will be performed before the system logs an error The block also has a special algorithm to accumulate the rain as though the bucket were not being emptied If the current value measured has gone down by 1 5 of the ra
161. asurements ois 3 irora or enaa Aivses sonveedy ae EES thane sede yencostestpauseeseneviasiee nu ERER I ESPEN EEES ae ads 37 Measurement SCHEdUIES o 35 cccscccodicceeeduvacs A AE A E AEEA A EE EON ROES 38 SONSOL Comm Surat OM sey AAEE E EEE EEEE EE EEE 39 Gizi oile NRT aa i p EEE EEE E EEE EE ETE 42 FO ModE S e a a A A E E AA N NEET A E AA 43 Namaig VO Modules E rr ra a a raean eE Ra Oa Aea PERAE En eSEE ETN I EREE ESEESE 44 Resetin ps VO Mod ES r a aa A AAI IRE EEA E EEE E ERE ESERSE 44 iii iv LAN Seti gs ecieis ec issctchictsges ar bit A cpeasseyobia de E apiseeetsa ih a E E E E EE EEE E 44 Crossover CONMECUOMS iisen ei a a oboe a o r e E E bass E a a TE a 46 LO I A S EET E deaabage sates tana uete nse pseDaabiates sepasetos ties neeaee tees 46 Log Propertie Sierrei toeea E cous iden capes TO ee a EE E r aye sate Webb E EEE TE E eS 46 IET A eps A PE Pe AE E AO E LTE AEA ETS 49 Sathnk Dialog ssn i ar et a o E E E EE Ea ape ates bi EEEE E EESTO EEE E EEE rS 49 Self Timed Dialo gisces cssciaceesssesstve kgs cp estes aexsiaves sapisst eal a r EET aa arte E EE Er EE een EEE EEEE EEEE rR 50 AEA Tan P A A EEE rl er i rr EE ae a 54 IRETE OM E EEEE EEE TEE E TE E a OE OEE OLE 55 SAADI ERI A EA E E E E E a EE 56 RTS EAT A AEE EE E E EEE E EE EE EE 56 Setup Piles sess egies n a E eal eas nents tes ee ade steed ei eae 58 NTA er eR SS A 58 Open secs niet hin esi een ae ate GL ie Ade eee ies Ra a este ei eee 58 SAVE AS es oedis cease E E aan tece
162. asurements are complete when the record is computed and logged Hanging separator determines whether to terminate the formatted output with a separator character For example if the property is checked and the separator character is a comma the logged data will have a comma at its end as well as between all fields If the property is not checked no comma will appear at the end of the logged data This property is most useful in ensuring the output is compatible with automatic parsing logic used after the log is downloaded The Seg 1 time property determines what timestamp will be given to the log entry If the property is checked the timestamp given is the time of the data in the first formatted field typically the field having Sequence 1 If the property is not checked the timestamp given is the time the LogRec block runs which is typically determined by the schedule of the measure block connected to the LogRec block s output When FTP is checked logged data will be appended to a file on a FTP Server To select the details press and the FTP Logging Properties dialog will be displayed FTP Logging Properties ur oi File IP port fi User name Password E fae Header interval i Sti i SSCid URL selects the IP address of the FTP Server and may optionally contain a URL if DNS is available File selects the name of the file to append the log records and may
163. average min and max values are finally computed 230 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com le LogField Inputs Input Outputs Output Description The LogField block works in tandem with the LogRec block to enable you to build a record of data from several fields to add to a log The LogField block defines the characteristics of one of the fields within the record The following shows the Log Field Properties dialog used to configure the Log Field block Log Field Properties Name F1 A Record ID Defaut 7 Sequence fp o Right digits 20 Format string lt name gt lt val gt lt qual gt 7 Canco The Name property simply gives the field a name that can be included in the formatted output if desired The name isn t used for any other purpose The system creates a default name of Fx where x is an integer representing the number of fields created so far Typically you ll want to name the field something more relevant to its purpose e g Temp or Level etc Abo Record ID identifies to which LogRec block this field belongs The drop down list allows you to select from all LogRec blocks in the system so far Or you can type the name of a LogRec block you intend to create by clicking on the button next to the drop down Note that LogField blocks are attached to LogRec bl
164. cal setup versus the Ezsetup measurements is discussed in detail in chapter three but the simple rule is this If the sensor is measured or averaged only then use EzSetup Measurements if additional processing is needed or the data is needed for calculating other parameters use the graphical setup The graphical setup blocks screen is accessed by going into the Setup tab and clicking on either the Graphical Setup tree and clicking EDIT or by selecting one of the graphical sensors under the Graphical Setup tree and clicking EDIT Selecting Graphical Setup and clicking EDIT will show all sensors configured in a graphical manor selecting only one of the graphically setup sensors will show that sensor and all processing related to that sensor only Some users find that viewing the whole Graphical setup can be overwhelming therefore it is recommended to only select create one sensor at a time when setting the system up Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com AN EXAMPLE GRAPHICAL SETUP Pressing Edit with the Graphical Setup item highlighted on the Setup tab brings up a screen similar to the one shown below The tabs at the top of the screen have been replaced with the buttons Zoom Wire Add and Exit with the rest of the screen reserved for placing and connecting setup blocks From this screen we can get a quick view of where data is coming from how it
165. can add telephone LOS Radio GOES METOESAT telemetry Plug n play ease of setup the system is setup with ease Install a new module and the system automatically detects it and allows it to be configured for operation Flexible measuring and recording The setup allows separate measuring schedules for data as well as individual recording intervals Open design the system will operate with sensors and modules manufactured by others Takes measurements from low cost sensors High speed data transfers data downloads to PC at 115k baud Time accuracy of ten seconds per month over full temperature range 2 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com HIGHLIGHTS EzSetup and Graphical Setup The Key to Flexibility A unique part of the design is the ability to use the EzSetup and or the graphical block oriented setup Many simple measurements are quickly setup using EzSetup for even more flexibility the graphical setup blocks of various types are connected together to graphically represent data flow from all sensors with data flowing from left to right An example EzSetup is shown below on the left and a graphical setup is shown below on the right F zoom Dg wire Add gt Exit Piia 4irTemp MeasureLog Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status E EzSetup Measurements amp 01 00 15 00 Next 14 30 00 01 AT
166. can be switched to ground Aux1 Six excitation channels analog outputs that can be programmed from 5V to 5V and One output Ex which is always the negative of the current excitation voltage value The excitation channels are shared with the input lines Only one excitation channel can be active at a time The negative of this voltage provided on Ex can be useful in balanced bridge applications to minimize common mode voltage The output Aux1 provides a switched path to ground that when closed grounds through a 100 Ohm resistor The state of this output may be pulsed using the pulse command It may be pulsed open or closed If the output is already in the state that the pulse command requests nothing will happen The ADC device must be in the running state to pulse Aux1 The board must be in the running state to switch the SwBat on This will turn off if the device goes to the off state Analog Measurements The ADC can measure voltages on its terminals and across internal sense elements Sense element voltages allow currents to be calculated by a host processor The ADC can also take paired terminal voltage and sense element voltage measurements that can be used to compute resistance values Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 269 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com The ADC has a built in low pass filter for noise rejection that is programmable for a 10 to 1900 Hz
167. ce the number of edits you must make when creating a setup where the Num Values for each SelfTimed block is the same The BIN INT format only uses Num Values entered in the Setup tab The value in the SelfTimed block cannot be changed The NOS format does not use Num Values at all When INSAT is the selected format then when Num Values is greater than 1 previous data is placed into the positions of subsequent ids For example when sensor id 2 has a Num Values of 3 the most recent value is transmitted as id 2 the next most recent value is transmitted as id 3 and the next most recent value is transmitted as id 4 Note how this precludes having sensor ids 3 and 4 defined in the setup If a multiple position id e g R356 is encountered with Num Values greater than 1 the values are repeated only within the first frame of the message and only so many times as to ensure complete entries an orphaned integer entry will not occur Sequence Sequence is used by the SHEF SHEFFIX BIN INT and BIN NONINT formats to define the order of the sensors in the message It is not used by the NOS and INSAT formats as these have a fixed sequence Use Calc Time The Use Calc Time checkbox is used to specify that the input data s actual time of calculation should be used for all formatting considerations and not the data s scheduled time This option is available only when SHEF or SHEFFIX is the current format Using the calculated time is usefu
168. change of state Use Edge to determine which edge of the state change to trigger Rising Low High Falling High gt Low Both either direction The Filter parameter can be used to eliminate false state transition detections due to noise The Filter value should be a number between 0 and 255 The higher the number the longer the new state change must exist for the change to be seen by the digital I O module Each increment of the filter value represents about 0 5ms of time If this block is used in an EZSetup measurement with the Event checked this will force ALL measurements to occur when an Event occurs So for example if you had an EZSetup measurement schedule with the BinIn block and a sdi 12 sensor every time the BinIn detected a change of state the SDI 12 sensor would also be measured If Invert is checked the output from this block will be the inverted value of what is seen at the channel e g if the input is grounded a binary is output instead of a binary 0 Input states are OV binary 0 gt 2 5V binary 1 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 145 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Binary Input Properties Digital 1 0 Module 1 7 Channel 2 7 Cancel Invert Input Event V Edge Both 7 Filter value fo ea 146 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 htt
169. contain a path ex home loggeddata csv Please note that the file paths on an FTP server typically use the Unix syntax and hence use the forward slash character as shown in the example IP Port selects the port number of the FTP Server and is typically 21 User name provides the user name for authenticating with the FTP Server Only simple authentication is supported Password provides the password used for authenticating with the FTP Server Header interval defines how often a header is output in a separate line before the data record 0 for never for every time 2 for ever other time 3 for every third time etc The header describes the contents of the data record As long as the Header Interval is not 0 a new header will be appended after recording has been turned ON to ensure any changes to the setup are reported 234 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com When SCKT is checked a TCP IP server will be created that will report the record data to any client that connects to it To select the details press and the Socket Logging Properties dialog will be displayed Socket Logging Properties IP to allow b 0 0 q IP port 52735 Header Interval f IP to allow defaults to 0 0 0 0 which allows any client to connect to the server any other value will restrict connections to that IP a URL may not be used
170. could be used any time performing a vector average is desired Like the Average block Vector Average itself requests samples from a sensor and thus does not require a Measure block to be used before it Vector Average has the same properties window as the Average block See the description of Average for an explanation of the different fields Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 221 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Average Properties OK Cancel Interval Duration Vector Average has a large number of special outputs corresponding to all the vector computations it makes To perform most of its computations the Vector Average block requires signals on both its Speed and Dir ection inputs These inputs correspond in a general sense to magnitude and angle with the angle always specified in degrees 222 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Wave Processor WavProc Input Input SDI 12 output from Sutron Radar Stage or Distance values in feet Outputs T mean wave period in seconds Hmo Significant wave height in meters Hmax Maximum wave height in meters T2 Zero up crossing period in seconds Tp Peak Wave period in seconds S Wave spectral estimates in m Hz F frequency vector in Hz In addition to the block outputs listed above th
171. ction RTS CTS The Xpert is connected to a PC using a RS232 to a PC cable Typically the PC will run XTerm PCBASE2 or XCONNECT Both a command 286 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com prompt and SSP are available MOD Commercial RTS CTS The 9210 is connected to a Hayes compatible EMx modem telephone modem No voice functions will be supported RADI LOS Radio None The 9210 is connected to a LOS radio modem Ox modem The 9210 can communicate with other stations and master stations on the radio network using SSP VOIC Sutron RTS CTS The 9210 is connected to Sutron s Voice Ex Voice Modem Modem Both Voice and Data functions will be supported SSPx SSP only direct None The 9210 is connected to a 9210 a Base Station connection PC or another RTU that supports SSP using an RS232 cable Typically the PC will run XTerm PCBASE2 or XCONNECT RSx RS 485 connection None The 9210 is directly connected to another 9210 using SSP Where x is the COM port number to 4 H W Flow control was enabled on SSP ports before version 2 3 and may be re enabled if needed with the HS option Remote also supports the following command line arguments Option Description F UnitID ID to respond to when receiving an SSP message note this can be omitted if the user has set the sta
172. cutoff The filter has notches at multiples of the cutoff frequency The ADC provides for up to 65 535 seconds of sensor warm up delay before making its first measurement If the specified warm up delay is less than 3 sampling periods the delay before the first reading is taken will be 3 sampling periods This should be taken into account when computing the warm up delay Accuracy The ADC will self calibrate to its internal reference whenever the calibrate command is received The reference while very stable is accurate to 1mV This error is measured during factory test and is written into the ADC ROM A read Vref error command can be used to read this error and use it to obtain 0 0015 error at 25 C Another set of coefficients can be read to calibrate readings when the ADC gain is set to 16 270 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Example Configurations Using the 8080 0003 Analog I O Module Single Ended Voltage Measurement Example Two Wire Resistance Measurement Example darrel0H I yma E dh S 4 20ma Current Measurement Example Four Wire Thermistor Measurement Example Four Wire Resistance Sourced Curent Measurement Measurement Example Four Wire Bridge Two Wire Thermistor Voltage Measureme
173. d as a ratio 2 The excitation outputs are connected internally to the analog to digital converter This value is the accuracy of this measurement Available voltages are the integer values between 5 and 5 V 3 Human body model 4 One microsecond rise one milli second fall gt Channel 1 Differential over 4 8 to 4 8 Vin 268 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Operational States The ADC has two operational states running and stopped which are controlled by commands to the device Running In this state the input lines are sampled and processed This state consumes more power than the stopped state so the ADC card should be left running only if necessary The digital output line may be pulsed using the pulse command The ADC executes a reset sequence when it receives the run command When the reset is complete a message is sent to the host Stopped In this state the device is idle It will accept commands and the output Aux will reflect the last command that set this output to either open 1 or switched to ground 0 The input lines are not sampled Pulse commands will be ignored in this state Inputs Outputs Inputs The ADC has six single ended analog inputs which may be paired to form differential inputs Outputs The ADC provides One 12 volt output Bat One switched 12 volt output SwBat One output that
174. d interval of 00 15 00 tells the system to use data with times 00 00 00 00 15 00 23 45 00 when it is time to format and transmit This allows for the situation where the block is connected to an output that is providing data more frequently than it is being transmitted It also allows the formatter to identify data that is missing when it comes time to transmit it Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 239 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Random Group Properties Group E ee DTime foo o0 00 Label AT Dinter bo 01 00 fl Enable Hi Alarm Hi Limit 5 fe Enable Low Alarm Low Limit 25 Ls ROC Fixed Interval MJ ROC Mag E ROC Mode off 7 Deadband i fe Gf Cancel The different alarms are Hi Alarm Go into alarm if the input value is gt Hi Limit deadband Go out of alarm if the input value is lt Hi Limit deadband Low Alarm Go into alarm if the input value is lt Low Limit deadband Go out of alarm if the input value is gt Low Limit deadband Rate Of Change Alarm 1 When ROC Mode is set to Off no ROC alarm test occurs 2 When ROC Mode is set to Hi the system goes into alarm if the change in input value is gt ROC Mag deadband The system goes out of alarm when the change in input value is lt ROC Mag deadband 3 When ROC Mode is set to Low the system goes into al
175. d to com2 leave com2 as NONE in COM section Select the in front of COMS label Select appropriate COM port and press EDIT Configure the device NOTE Configure properties will automatically change based on settings from step b E G selecting com3 would show MODEM configuration Once finished press OK and the 9210 will configure each COM port If sensors are connected to the 9210 test them to make sure they are operating properly Do this by following these steps Turn recording ON This causes the system to fully activate the I O modules Select the Sensors tab This is a list of all configured sensors the channel module assignments and the last measured value Select each sensor and press the measure button Verify that the new value displayed is correct If SDI 12 sensors are being used press the SDI button if additional commands need sent to configure them or test their operation NOTE Recording will stop during this Before leaving a site check to make sure Recording is ON Select the Log tab Select the desired log file and verify that the data is being stored as desired EzSetup data is stored in SSP log graphical blocks are defined in the log block setup and may or may not be stored into the SSP log Select the Status tab Look for any errors that may be reported in the status box Finally go to the MAIN tab and click LOG OUT Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 125 Sutron Corporat
176. d to do so by someone at Sutron u Xpert2 mon umon The commands used in the script are p set default source directory d delete the specified file Nn send the specified file g run the specified executable file on the 9210 h delay for the specified number of seconds u upgrade MicroMonitor 1 upgrade the loader k upgrade the kernel b reboot Format of commands CMD LETTER SOURCE DESTINATION NOTE CMD LETTER is a single character specifying the command to perform SOURCE is a quoted string specifying a file to operate on DESTINATION is a quoted string specifying a file to operate on Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 257 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com NOTE is a message that will be displayed in the progress bar Unused parameters at the end of a command may be omitted Blank quoted strings are not allowed use if you wish to skip a parameter but include a later one If the default source directory is not provided the directory where the upg file is located is used Storage Card Upgrade SD or USB This method offers the benefit of speedy application and kernel upgrades but cannot be used to upgrade the loader or micro monitor Hence this method should only be used when it is clear no upgrade of the loader or micro monitor is needed The steps to perform this kind of upgrade are as follows 84 The upgrade typically comes
177. de that requires a reply the system will wait for the Ack Delay for the reply If a reply is not received then one or more retries is performed Retries is the total number of attempts to make The default value is 3 Combined with the default Ack Delay of 3 seconds this means SSP will send the same message as many as 3 times with a 3 second delay between each attempt before it will timeout and report a tx error All retry messages have the same FLAG SEQUENCE number as the original message This is used to prevent the same message from being processed twice due to a long network delay The preset buttons set the SSP timing according to 3 common scenarios The 115 2k puts the values back to their defaults Smart Modem selects a very long 1 minute ack delay and reply delay since it s expected the smart modem will perform retries and will normally never fail but may take a while to send data when line conditions are poor The Slow amp Smart settings are similar to the Smart Modem settings but include other enhancements to help Xterm perform over a high latency but reliable connection such as a TCP IP based cell phone modem Eliminating retries which would only conflict with the previous message still being sent is one such improvement Slow amp Smart may also be selected from the command line with the SLOW option 1200 baud selects settings designed to work with lower baud rates and dumb radio systems Redirector Settings T
178. deeters 221 Wave Processor WavProc aoreet ienen aie ecb eerte or eare Eere ep eera h teneor piera oeie ep eer 223 fej PAAS A i E E EEEE 228 LOGGING BLOCKS or rice eE E EE TA E E E ces EE RETES EERENS 229 Field R Fd Fa Kerner ee ee a a 231 Rec AE A A E A E ee Eee 233 cy ataeall B15 cla Ren eer OT en ae een era ee Ree T ee 236 TELEMETRY BEOGKS esc55 50 0co 005 sa stenabebees Pies Seven otha aes aaah vk Pane BRR Pd ccs i TE 237 i Coms Ta Sonaria e E T E E R T R T N E E EA 237 viii rigger E Random Group ROAUGrOup seee heed earo rae Ee E E RE a e A anes aeaea n e EE ESENE 239 R R ndom Parameter Randomness ieiet e a E e E A Seo A e 241 ST BA Self Timed Parameter SelfTimed 0 cccccccessececsececeessececseaececseaeecseaececeesaececseeeecnsaaeeeceeaaeeesseeeeenenee 242 QUTPUIE BLOCKS 3 202 serrate hehe ehh tnt einai E 247 D als zA Dn fo io D n Q oe a N aN oo MISCELLANEOUS BLOGKS E E R R ties tentugeasuocseanduntos eevee NEEE A aR NSS 250 Display DiS play erreen i e I A E E E E nde ddavseosectters 250 APPENDIX B UPDATING THE FIRMWARE sesesesessesorsesesecceresoroesesecoerororsesececoerororcesecoceesosorsesecoeoeroroeseseeoeeesoe 253 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE ieseni orros eea EEEE r EAEE EEEE ETETE EE SE E ESEE EO E E E E EEEE A 254 s rial Ethernet Upgrade senres enoeet aE oc Eao EREE EEE E EEEE EEE EE E EER E dante 254 Customizing a Serial Ethernet Upgrade
179. dem See modems speech modem T telemetry blocks See Also blocks Coms Tag 237 Random Group 239 Random Parameter 241 Self Timed Parameter 242 SendTag 249 Telemetry modules 5 temperature sensor block See Air Temperature sensor block Air Temperature Relative Humidity sensor block CS107 Temperature sensor block Test check box 152 tests communication 30 T O Modules 9 initial 9 random 55 self timed 54 thermistor 134 156 time 52 column log file 67 displaying with XLite 73 setting 21 117 Tipping Bucket Sensor block 193 Transmission append lat long 304 307 troubleshooting 130 Type 52 53 U units column log file 68 unpacking 8 update application 260 extension 259 kernel 259 remote exe 286 Upgrade 117 users 20 59 A4 VectAvg block 221 Vector Average block 221 View Data tab 63 View Log Data 76 View Log tab 67 70 voice modem See modems speech modem VOICEx 287 Volt Meter block 196 197 voltage measurement 137 141 VoltMeter block 196 197 324 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Ww shaft encoders 266 operating the display 73 picture 4 specifications 279 XTerm See Also remote exe Web Server 117 window transmission time 52 Wire button 96 oa auto update 118 d connect 117 X file transfer 115 l installation 109 XLite introduction 109 Analog
180. desired time to reset Month ranges from 1 to 12 Day from 1 to 31 and Hour from 0 to 23 In the example shown above the reset will occur every year at midnight October 1 Note how the next reset is computed shown This can help you figure out if your settings will produce the desired result Calibrate Month Day Hour EHE The tipping bucket block contains a calibrate procedure The calibrate procedure is used to set the reading to a user set value or to run a calibration test This is important to do whenever the 9210 is restarted The calibration procedure is run from the Sensors tab Calibrate button or the Calibrate menu on the Xlite front panel display Tipping Bucket Calibration Live Tips 0 00 A When the calibration is entered the old value of the tipping bucket is preserved and is locked This means that if recording is still on and the system measures or logs the tipping bucket the old value is used The Live Tips display always starts out initially at zero and updates very rapidly It will increment as the tipping bucket tips You may enter a new value by pressing the button To restore the old value and return to normal operations at any time just press the cancel button To accept the displayed value and make it become the new value press the OK button To test the tipping bucket enter the calibration screen add a specific amount of water to the tipping bucket and observe th
181. ding level provides all the privileges of the preceding level Therefore users logging in under Setup Access can retrieve data but users logging in under Retrieval Access cannot access the system setup Multiple usernames passwords accounts are allowed for these levels If no users are added for a particular level then that level can be entered without a password Select type of access Retrieval Access for data retrieval Setup Access for station setup Logging into the unit causes a note to be sent to the system log recording the username and time of the login The user accounts are maintained on the Setup tab under Users Access to this tab is available to the Setup group only Press the Logout button on the Main tab to logout NOTE Logout does not close Xterm it just logs out of the system Tab Overview To see all available tabs login using the Setup Access button Many tabs are available clicking one of these tabs will bring it to the foreground for viewing Of all the available tabs the SETUP tab is used primarily to set the system up the other tabs simply provide station status or details on collected data Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com MAIN TAB After logging in the display should look similar to the one shown below with the MAIN tab in the foreground The MAIN tab is where information about the station status
182. e mean maximum minimum standard deviation or sample count number of samples from a series of data points sampled from a sensor The Schedule Interval indicates how often the Average block should sample a series of data points process them and output a value The Schedule Time specifies the synchronization of when this should begin The Sample Interval entry indicates how often the sensor should be sampled each time its scheduled to sample and the Sample Duration specifies for how long To average continuously the Schedule Interval should be set equal to the Sample Duration Note Sample Interval may be set to milliseconds for sub second sampling For example the value 00 00 00 500 would cause sampling to occur every 500 milliseconds When specifying milliseconds you must specify all three digits Average Properties Interval Interval Duration The example above shows an Average block that will perform it s averaging every 30 minutes starting at an offset of 5 minutes from the hour When averaging starts samples will be taken every 2 seconds for a duration of 1 minute At the time of the last sample all the block s outputs mean min max etc are computed and are output Note the timestamp assigned to all the Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 201 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com output data is the time of the last sample In the exampl
183. e above the timestamp for the averaging period started at 12 35 00 would be 12 35 58 Note To shift the timestamp so that it occurs at the end of the Sample Duration increase the Schedule Time by one Sample Interval In the example above this means set Time to 00 05 02 so that the timestamp occurs at the top of each minute e g 12 36 00 The output quality of the averaged result will be good as long as at least half of the anticipated samples can be taken successfully The initial average calculation after recording start may contain fewer samples than subsequent runs since the calculation begins on the first sample interval that comes along after recording is started 202 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Bool Boolean Inputs X Y Outputs Output Description The Boolean block is used to perform boolean operations on the two inputs X and Y and output the result in Output Non zero data values are considered true A true output is assigned the value of 1 Bool Properties Operation AND v Invert output C The Operation property can be set to one of AND OR or XOR The table below defines the output given all the possible different inputs and operations Inputs Output X Y AND OR XOR true true true true false true false false true true false true
184. e analog input User selections are available for the I O module and channel analog input warm up time slope offset and reported units The formula for calculating the reading is Output Vin Slope Offset Default units is volts this may be changed to match desired reading E G Degrees C The Settling Time Warm Up can be adjusted to adapt either to long sensor signal settling times or to give the voltage reference in the Analog I O Module a longer time to warm up for increased converting accuracy The block scales the outputs according to the values of Slope and Offset using the equation output reading slope offset The user can change the units for all the outputs by changing the Units field to the desired value The block supports calibration from the Sensors page and the Xlite front panel display For the calibration the user will enter the current value sensor The system will then adjust the offset so the desired value is obtained Analog 1 0 Module p 7 Channel 1 7 Settling Time ms ho Slope Poo Offset booo C Units HiGain 196 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Vibrating Wire VWire Inputs None Outputs None Wiring One or more Campbell Scientific AVW200 Vibrating Wire Interface devices connected to RS232 com ports See AVW200 documentation for wiring of vibrating wire s
185. e block will set a digital output for a specified time duration and then clear the output RS485SDLsll This SLL enables SDI over an installed RS485 com port 9210s normally support RS485 on COM4 and may also have internal hardware change for other ports NOTE for more information on using SDI 12 over RS485 see Using SDI 12 over the RS 485 Port SR50 sll This SLL enables measurement of SR50 ultrasonic height gauge SRP sll This SLL causes the 9210 to prompt the user to download data after the insertion of a storage card USB or SD The prompt for recent data will download data from ssp log since the last download The prompt for status data will download the entire system log Requires firmware version 2 4 or above TerminalServer sll This SLL adds commands to the remote command line interface based on the user login UWAPL sll This SLL adds custom blocks and telemetry processing for specific customer system performing wave analysis Sensors used Nortek AquaDopp AirMar PB200 Microstrain 3DM GX3 35 AHRS Y201 serial camera WetLabs ECO Puck and AADI Conductivity Sensor 4319 The level of custom processing is high Please contact Sutron Customer Service for more information about using this SLL VibratingWire sll The purpose of this SLL is to allow users to connect a Canary Systems VW DSP serial interface to one of the COM ports on a Sutron Xpert or Xlite Model 9210 data logger
186. e block saves spectral and time series data to CDIP formatted files and offers an option to log the outputs in record format Description The purpose of the block is to process the acquired Sutron Radar Water level data to determine the wave energy spectrum wave height parameters The data is collected once a second for 2048 seconds 34 minutes 8 seconds The data is then processed using industry standard algorithms to produce the mean period significant wave height max wave height zero up crossing period peak wave period and spectrum vector The processing includes the following steps 1 Capture 2048 samples of radar data 2 Verify the data quality for any missing data If there are holes in the data fill them up using interpolation Apply detrending filter on the data and obtain final time domain data Compute the ensemble averaged spectral estimate using FFT techniques Compute the frequency vector OY MeO S p Use wave estimator functions on the spectral estimates and frequency vectors to compute the final output values Configuring the WavProc Block The following section describes how the Xpert WavProc block is set up for Wave height parameter estimation Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 223 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com The WavProc block is typically connected to an SDI 12 sensor block configured to measure the Sutron Radar Level Recorder
187. e by selecting custom and then changing the message using the control If the setup has been entered this dialog will display the Current Message that would be transmitted if one were sent by the system Along with the message the dialog displays the number of characters in the message and the amount of time that would be needed to make the transmissions These will be useful things to examine to help make sure the set up is correct To see the detailed status from the transmitter press the Status button Self Timed Test Send Message Custom COEFGHIIELMNOPORS TUMAI YZ current Message The setup does not define a message Chars O Secs 0 0 Pressing the Reset button will send a command to the Satlink to reset reboot This might be necessary in the rare case where the Satlink has a problem that can only be cleared by reset but no one is at the station do cycle power To send a Send to Sutron test message press the STS button The following dialog is displayed allowing an STS transmission to be made Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Send to Sutron Satellite ID p 1003438 oe Channel fp Type 300 bps lv Send i Random Test The Random Test dialog is used to make a test transmission see the selected format of a random transmission and display the detailed status of Satlink Pressi
188. e defined as follows e Name the desired tag name for the computed water level The tag name may refer to the name of a ComsTag block in the graphical setup which can then be measured to log and or transmit measured values e Enabled Y or N Setting to N disables the measurement e Time and Interval determine the measurement time and interval and should be formatted HH MM SS e COM Port name should include the colon e g COM2 COM3 etc e Channel 1 2 The AVW200 channel to measure either 1 or 2 e A B K TO and SO readings come from Geokon 4500S cal sheet e Cis typically a calculated value It can be computed initially based on calibration sheet information It can be recalculated in field during installation if desired to improve accuracy e SI Name Reference Barometric correction This is optional If unused leave blank Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 197 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com PROCESSING BLOCKS Alarm Inputs Input Outputs Hi Alarm True 1 if the data is in Hi Alarm otherwise false 0 Lo Alarm True 1 if the data is in Lo Alarm otherwise false 0 Data pass through of the data ROC Alarm True 1 if the data is in ROC Alarm otherwise false 0 Any Alarm True 1 if the data is in any alarm otherwise false 0 Description The Alarm block checks the input
189. e program and time is the amount of CPU time in seconds that the program has used Double click on any of the processes and the system will allow threads or heaps to be selected A sample thread display is shown below PC Files C WINNT Profiles don Desktop El Pert Files Process List xpert exe 13 4070B Ef lt DIR gt 017 2372003 11 09 32 lt DIR gt lt DIR gt 017 2372003 11 09 32 lt DIR gt xpert ssf 2474 12 31 1999 21 43 06 TOV CO72FOBA 3 0 070s TO2 004D9752 3 1 658s TOS 005E8F14 3 0 959s TO4 6070B856 3 0 005s TOS 004D9B84 3 2 080s TOB O04D9B44 3 1 484s T07 005E8E34 3 0 003s TOB 005ECA46 3 0 162s TOS 405F721E 3 0 339s T10 005F7924 3 O 007s T11 0064C572 3 O 011s T12 60725F7E 3 157 025s gt Set Clock When you press the Set Clock button XTerm prompts Would you like to set the 9210 s time to match your PC If you press YES the 9210 s clock will be set to match the PC clock Press NO if you do not wish the time to be set Connect Pressing the Connect button brings up the configuration dialog shown and described in the section on installing XTerm This allows you to change your connection once XTerm has been started Upgrade Pressing the Upgrade button brings up a dialog asking for the location of the upgrade file to use to perform a scripted upgrade of the firmware in the 9210 Please see Appendix B for more information on how to upgrade Web Server
190. e read out Press cancel when done To correct the tipping bucket enter the calibration screen press the button and enter the correct value Press ok when done When performing calibration using the 2x20 Display the calibration and test screen appears like this TIPS 0 00 lt CLR SET gt DONE 194 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com To test the tipping bucket pour water in to the tipping and observe the read out The read out will be updated rapidly When you are done press the gt DONE key and then select CANCEL from the confirmation screen to throw away the test value To correct the tipping bucket press SET and enter the new desired level in to the following screen TIPS 00000005 25 lt OK gt lt CANCEL gt Select OK to accept the change and return to the live display Press the gt DONE key and then select OK from the confirmation screen to accept the new value Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 195 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com An Volt Meter VoltMeter Inputs lt none gt Outputs AIOVolt Wiring Connect the voltage output to the analog channel selected CH1 CH10 Connect a ground from the sensor to GND Description Voltmeter is a general purpose block for measuring a voltage from an Analog I O modul
191. e riers AEA ER EE EER TAP ARTEEN EEA TAIE E EE EETA EE EEE T ERTE 74 SNELA i o AEAEE EE OEE E E EEEE ETE TE EEEN EE EET 75 Start Stop Recordin gissen rapea p eSa ee e OR N Ee aee aaae Ep is S E OTRE O Ees eE ESENE ESERE 75 Load SSF Brom Card KARERE E EAEEREN EE A EATE EEA PE EENE E EEEE ees 75 Save SSF to Card hoide e e e a a o a e A e a esea S 75 Change Station Name sesers aei anrora e aaar p a a aE E E S EE ES Eaa RE T EEEE R Ea ASE EEE ETSE O RE EPERE RIE R SS iE 75 eTR O EEEE E E E 75 A B ese E E Sere nT a E AE EE EE E A A E E E A E A TEREE ee 76 ISELI At i e SNEER E ERE Seta ue sdenlssbet sess vesuets Sesto teen sete tyabistisnvestiseyseiviaas 76 DAAA Eo Data EEEE E E saseets sousk asta sd costa sees debs de sbett sivab ts thge set stessteda Sescebseyabeedasatehiseesees tage 76 Duinp Log Data EEEE E sdeastusk ss eh vd ce stl vaecs dots ee sdettssvet issu vasuetsstesste Deen sSereseyabesbisevestiseestivisee 76 SI DI AEEA E A en EN AE AE EEEE SPO AEE TEATE EE A ECT A A TEE E A A EEEE TAA 76 Send Command ERE 2 sche EE E A E EEEE A EE A A A EAA 76 hena Bs oo TS 6 AREER SO NS ET E TEE AEA EEE EAEE E A AEE EE 76 Show Found SenS0P5 c cscsssesesssesesesesesesesssesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesesessseseeeseseeeseseeessseseseseseeeeeeeneees 71 TEIA Wo ea EEEE EEE AEE NEEE AE E A AE O E SEE A EEE E A AE A EEE TA 71 SONATO eT E EE E EEEE E ee TEE A A EE A EEE ETA 71 EEEN E I EE E EE E EEE A E 71 SEM Malaia eren a eee E E
192. e system their module number MUST be set to 2 or higher See Naming I O Modules LAN Settings Used to view and configure LAN settings e g configuring power to the LAN ethernet to turn on when the 9210 powers on or automatically when a device is connected Log Files Used to view and define new log files Satlink Used to configure a Sutron Satlink transmitter Self Test Used primarily by the factory for verifying the unit meets specifications Please note that external test harnesses and cables are required for all tests to pass Setup File Used to manage setups On power up the setup file having the same base name as the station name is loaded or if such a file doesn t exist the file default ssf is loaded if it exists Users Used to define system users in terms of name password access level and inactivity timeout Coms SSP CL Coms SSP CL functions included in coms sll enhances the remote communications abilities by adding support for the Sutron Speech Voice modem alarm detection and transmission with Speech or via a Hayes compatible data modem a LOS Radio modem or a direct connection Note GPRS Iridium and Satlink communications are not managed in this entry See their respective entries on the Setup tab SSP CL com ports are configured for Remote in the autoexec bat file factory default is a direct connect on COM 1 with no alarms going out the port To add support for alarms and or speech to other COM ports
193. e will be copied with its original name unchanged After copying the setup the system will load it and then start recording automatically Save SSF to Card Selecting this menu item will cause the system to save the current setup to a storage card The system will prompt for the storage card to use USB or SD or will prompt to insert a storage card if one is not already present Change Station Name Selecting this menu item allows you to change the station name The system warns you if you change the station name to something that does not correspond to a setup file currently on the flash disk which would result in no setup being loaded on a system reboot Change Sensors Selecting this menu item brings up a submenu that allows you to change the label units slope and offset of displayed sensor values A sensor value appears in this list when it has a display Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com block connected to it The slope and offset properties can be changed only when the sensor to which the display block is connected contains such properties Set Time Selecting this menu item will prompt you to enter a new system time Exit Setup Selecting this menu item will exit the Setup sub menu View Log Data View Log Data will view the data in any of the logs When selected the system will display the name of one of the log files P
194. ears together in the transmission Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 301 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com EXAMPLE 2 Gt Gs Sx Sr 1 i 5 NOS conforms to NOS requirements for its tidal stations 6 NFDRS conforms to NFDRS requirements for its fire weather stations Provides most recent data in a CR LF delimited ASCII readable format EXAMPLE 00 00 000 270 328 110 100 14 0 000 000 020 0486 7 INSAT conforms to INSAT requirements for its stations Examples available on request these specs are being changed 8 HANDAR is a format where sensors are separated by lt CRLF gt sensor data is separated with a space and missing data is an M The oldest data is first to left EXAMPLE 010034380517419 21 30G642 0NN155E9200070 L3 Jess das T3 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 M 12 2 12 2 12 2 12 2 1223 12 3 12 3 RANDOM TRANSMISSION PSEUDOBINARY DATA FORMAT The format of the transmission data is lt GROUP ID gt lt OFFSET gt lt MEASUREMENT1 DATA 1 gt lt MEASUREMENTI DATA 2 gt lt MEASUREMENTI1 DATAU N gt 302 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com lt MEASUREMENT2 DATA 1 gt lt MEASUREMENT2 DATA 2 gt lt MEASUREMENT2 DATA N gt lt MEASUREMENT3 DATA 1 gt lt MEASUREMENT3 DATA 2 gt lt MEASUREMENT3 DATA
195. easure works exactly the same as the SHOW command except it causes a live reading of the sensor values to be taken before the results are displayed MEM Display memory usage PASSTHRU Opens the specified port either unopened or under the control of remote where port can be COM2 or VOICE3 or SSP2 depending on how the port is configured For generic serial ports use COM and the port number If the port is in use by other sll ports GPRS iridium etc the port must first be disabled then re enabled when finished Any characters typed are sent to the port Any characters received are displayed Terminate with by pressing ESC three times in a row 290 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com e The HW option enables RTS CTS h w handshaking e The ECHO option causes the characters you type to be echoed back which can be useful when communicating with half duplex devices e The BREAK option will send a 500ms break to the serial port after connecting This may be used to wakeup sensors which require a break e The CONTROL option added in version 3 4 allows the DTR control line to be passed through This used to be the default behavior but as of 3 4 dropping DTR or disconnecting will cause a logout to occur The normal user inactivity timeout will be applied to passthru sessions Note If using passthru to access a port already
196. ecting the address of the device to communicate with and a Send button to create an SDI 12 message There is also a drop down menu with the last five commands to select and send The larger text box displays the history of the previous commands and replies from SDI 12 communication The SDI window has some shortcut buttons for sending the most common commands These commands are M measure DO D zero get data I information V verify and C concurrent measure A timer runs whenever a response is received on SDI 12 This timer is displayed to show the number of seconds that have elapsed since the last response The user can use this timer to know when to issue D commands in the event that the SDI 12 device requires a long time to perform the measurement or function The user may also monitor the text box for the sensor s service request prompt This window also has a Find button Pressing it will cycle through all SDI addresses and display any connected sensors A count of the number of sensors found will be displayed as the operation progresses The find may take ten seconds to run as there are over sixty SDI 12 addresses to check When the unit finds a sensor it will issue the I identification command and show the results of the I command in the command history text box When exiting the SDI window the software will prompt to see if Recording should be restarted if it was stopped on entry Bringing the Benefits of Real Time
197. ed booting the autoexec bat file may be retrieved from the unit modified and then transferred back onto the unit Re apply power and let the unit execute the new autoexec bat file to verify it is fixed Unit missing functionality After upgrading a unit if the unit appears to be missing some functionality missing tabs missing menu items etc it is possible the unit detected an incorrect version of dll sll and did not load it If this happens a warning message is shown on boot up and a warning message will be placed into the system log indicating what version was found and what is expected If this happens simply copy the correct version of dll sll onto the flash disk and re boot the unit Xterm has a White screen or Black Screen When using Xterm to talk with a 9210 if the screen area does not show the login prompt or menus Black screen This indicates the unit is not communicating Check that the unit has power and that the serial cable is connected Also check that the correct com port and baud rates have been selected White screen This indicates that Xterm is communicating with the 9210 but no program is running First try right clicking into the screen area to ensure the screen is updated Check that the unit has an autoexec bat by using file transfer if it doesn t send one to the unit either create one following APPENDIX F or get it from the web site and reboot it If it does have one transfer it to the pc and edit it to m
198. ed for all retries to occur so it s typically set to the value of AckDelay Retries The only situation where the XLite acts as a slave currently is when it s receiving a new setup from a base station The Basic GetMessage function may be used to add slave operations to the Xlite but the timeout value is specified as a parameter to the function Retry Delay This parameter is rarely used in the software and inserts an extra delay before attempting a retry and is hence redundant with the AckDelay Recommendation is to just leave it set to 0 TCPIP Alarm Setup Pressing the TCPIP button displays the TCPIP Alarm Setup menu requires V3 2 of the Xlite application or later This menu allows alert and or alarm messages to be configured to be sent to a base station over the LAN connection The messages may be in SSP format or text format Each URL is attempted in order 1 then 2 then 3 until the message has been successfully delivered unless Send to All is enabled As long as alerts are not disabled when an alert occurs TCPIP delivery will be attempted first before other communication methods TCPIP Alarm Setup URL Type 1 XCONNECT2 kd ssp w options ai 27o Ei Compute options 3 myorg gov e Data o options Tx Normal Rate 01 00 00 ea Send to alll Tx Alarm Rate foo 10 00 _ Disable Alerts 00 00 00 will disable a Tx OK Cancel Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collect
199. ed together and then plugged into the I2C port at the bottom of the logger Specific details on individual modules can be found in Appendix C Select an I O module in the Setup tab and press Edit the following dialog will appear This dialog gives the serial number of the I O module its name and its I2C address Only the I O module number can be changed This number is stored into the flash of the I O module so it remembers it on power cycles Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com I2C Address f Cancel 1 0 Mod No fa feel Type String ANALOG IO 1232 00V1 07051203 IO Module List 12C Address 011902 0x04 011904 0x06 011901 0x08 011900 Ox04 Close NOTE All I O Module Names must be unique see above screen shot If not unique change the module number as described in the Naming I O Modules section below Naming I O Modules An I O module name consists of a three character descriptor indicating module type that cannot be changed plus a unique module number The number of the module can be changed The system utilizes the more descriptive modules names AIO1 Analog I O Module 1 AIO2 Analog I O Module 2 to differentiate between modules when setting up measurements rather than having to specify serial numbers The generic and user changeable naming of the modules also simplifies the process of changing one module f
200. ee connection information for DC Resistance AC Resistance 3 wire Set excitation channel to be different from input channel See connection information for 3 wire DC Resistance AC Resistance 4 wire Set excitation channel to be different from input channel Select differential measurement See connection information for 4 wire DC Resistance Thermistor 2 or 3 wire The difference between the two wire and the three wire thermistor measurement is whether the thermistor probe includes a completion resistor and therefore has three wires or whether the user needs to provide the completion resistor at the 9210 terminal block when connecting the two leaded sensor Accuracy of the resistance measurement of the thermistor is directly related to the tolerance and temperature stability of the completion resistor Output of the block is the thermistor resistance in ohms with the assumption that the completion resistor is exactly 10 000 ohms If the thermistor is one supported by the Air Temperature block then use of AirTemp block instead of this one will allow the output to be in terms of temperature Set excitation channel to be different from input channel Connect the thermistor or any resistance device as follows Not applicable to an external 8080 0003 AIO module VREF WIRE EXCITATION CHANNEL 10 Kohm completion CHANNEL Thermistor AGND Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 139
201. ee the screen with maximum resolution Installing XTerm There is no special installation needed for XTerm on a desktop PC Simply copy it to any folder on the PC Always make sure you have the latest version of XTerm which can be downloaded from Sutron s website The version of XTerm on your PC can be found by selecting About XTerm in the XTerm System menu which is accessed by clicking the X in the upper left menu bar XTerm REMOTE Huey Move Size Minimize O Maximize X Close Alt F4 About XTerm nVview Options gt To install XTerm on a PocketPC run its installation program from a desktop PC that already has ActiveSync 3 1 installed this is a Microsoft program that is typically supplied by the vender of the PocketPC device and is typically installed as part of the software that comes with the PocketPC At the time of this writing ActiveSync may be downloaded from http www microsoft com mobile pocketpc downloads activesync35 asp Start Xterm and the following screen is displayed From here specify and configure the type of communication link to use desktop PC shown left PocketPC shown right Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 109 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com x Com Pott Baud Rate Hardware COMI x 115200 zi __Seup_ Direct EF XTerm Communication 3 25 fok URE ron Modem o C Redo
202. eeded to convert this raw data into a meaningful value Is there already a block defined to do this processing or is a generic input needed Where does the data need to go once it is processed to a Satlink a modem a LOS radio a serial device PC display printer or just to a log Chapter 5 describes several example setups that can help get you started in configuring the 9210 If you need more help don t hesitate to call our Customer Service department They ve worked with many data collection and reporting scenarios and can help you set up your system just as you need Choosing the Right Block As Chapters 3 4 and 5 will reveal the 9210 setup is based on blocks that perform a specific function on data collected from a sensor or from another block The 9210 s Graphical Setup provides an interface to connect and configure these blocks The 9210 s EzSetup interface also uses blocks though they are hidden from the user s view Here s a simple map of sensor types to block types Sensor Type Sensor Block DC voltage output VoltMeter or ADC Resistance ADC Frequency output Counter or Frequency SDI 12 output SDI 12 RS 232 RS485 output RS232 GPRS232 sll or Basic Sensor See Appendix A for a listing of all the different types of blocks available in the system The most common measurement type is an analog measurement 1 e either a voltage or resistance Many analog sensors simply specify a 5 V excitation voltage and pr
203. een NOTE If using Xterm over a modem or other communications device the connection to the unit is not shut down on a logout Close XTerm by pressing the X in the upper right hand corner to ensure the remote system can go into its lowest power mode Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SETUP TAB The setup tab allows for viewing and editing system settings The items shown in the setup tab will vary depending on the configuration of the system and the version of the system software Some standard entries are Graphical Setup I O Modules Log Files Self test and Setup File Examples of entries that might also appear include Coms SSP CL EZSetup Measurements and Satlink Main Setup Sensors Data Log Status H Basic Coms SSP CL EZSetup Measurements Graphical Setup I O Modules LAN Settings Log files Satlink Self test iy edit H F Tree Overview Items in the setup tab are displayed with branches that can be expanded or compressed by clicking the or next to the branch This structure allows for displaying only as much information on the screen at one time as desired The following table gives a brief description of the purpose of each item The sections following the table give more detail on each item Tree Item Description Basic Used to comp
204. eeueuMl ben setettes 282 APPENDIX F CREATING CUSTOM VOICE FILES ssssssssssssscsssssssscssssessssnsssesssssssssssessssnessessessossoees 283 OVER VIEW EEE E EE N E E A EAEE E E EE sity saguveundetecotedt dy gunesstvavnreserestdaesesves 284 APPENDIX G AUTOEXEC BAT AND REMOTE EXE ccscssssssssscsssssssscssssessssnsssesssssosssssssssssnessessessesenees 285 OVER VE soo se ae Naa ete alee Rae aad eG A A a EER 286 AULOER ECD als einn eehaaea E E cabde es aaah ch edad A E A E eat daged iu E EA EA dele Ri 286 Remote eken ene E E R bed aaah E AE aE EE EEA T cov NERE a E EERE S RNS 286 ABOUT Command Example esasan s oaren aa AE E cap EE EROE AE EEE IER EERE SSN 296 Get Command Example riesi eiernes eee e EErEE E AS EEES AEE INER NA Era EES EES EREE S RESE 296 INFO command Example iiion e rece oare a AE EREE EE EROE AE EEE IEE EERE S 297 MAIL Command Example o00 0 cece eeeecceescsssceecesecesecaecsaecseecseeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeesseesseceaecsaecsaecsaecaeeeaeseneeeeee 298 MEASURE SHOW Command Example cece escesecssecssecseeceeeseeeeeeeeeesseeeecesecesecaecsaecsaecsaeeaeeeaeseneeeeeees 298 PASSTHRU Command Example sss cccoi cesses secicscsscbesnes tedden os ronker EESE EEES stent KEES ENOTEK EEE EErEE resi Eion 299 RECORDING Command Example 0000 00 ccc eceeccesceseceeceseceecaeecaeeeseseaeeeseessesseesseeeseceaecnaecnaecsaecaeeeaeeeeeeeeees 299 SET Command Example niseni ioen e eo rees ENEE EEE e ehbes Mads a bed ps epacteensblen SEES
205. el Station Latitude 38 996966 Station Longitude 77 424079 Water depth m Sensor depth m Sensor elev m The WavProc Log dialog is used to configure record logging When enabled output data is logged in the following format DateTime RecordID T1 Hm0 Hmax T2 Tp CenterFrequency BandWidth Energy 1 Energy 2 Energy 16 WavProc Log Record Logging M Enable record logging Log Name Flash Disk SSP LOG x Record ID wavProc f q Cancel Radar configuration The Sutron Radar should be configured for 1 second sampling This can be achieved via the following SDI 12 commands Automeasure interval XXS 1 1 1 Operating mode Average Time and Right Digits XXS 1 3 1 1 7 Sample Form period XXS 1 23 1 To configure the Radar for 1 second sampling by RS 232 issue the following commands Automeasure interval 00 00 01 Operating mode 1 Average time 1 Right Digits 7 Sample form period 1 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 225 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Radar SDI 12 measurement When using an SDI 12 block to acquire Radar data use an M command to retrieve parameter 1 Be sure to set the correct Address SDI Properties Address 0 7 Command M Slope fi Offset fo m Units CDIP Defined File Format The block produces the following CDIP defined file format based input and output data files
206. eld Similarly the val tag is replaced with the field value and the qual tag is replaced with the data s quality flag For example given a field named Temp with value after right digit application 21 55 units of C and good quality Format string Result lt name gt lt val gt lt units gt lt qual gt Temp 21 55 C G lt name gt lt val gt lt qual gt Temp 21 55 G lt name gt lt val gt Temp 21 55 lt val gt lt units gt 21 55 C lt val gt 21 55 232 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com LogRec Inputs Input Outputs Output Description The LogRec block works in tandem with the LogField block to enable you to build a record of data from several fields to add to a log The LogRec block defines the characteristics of the record In addition to disk based logging the LogRec block also supports FTP and Socket logging appends the data to a text file on a FTP Server while Socket logging creates a TCP IP server that will log the data to any client that connects to it The following shows the Log Record Properties dialog used to configure the LogRec block Log Record Properties Log name e GEM MELS enaele Record ID Default less Skip missing data 7 Separator fie Hanging separator Minimum f fea Seq 1 time V 0 FTP fe 0 sckt A The
207. emp block makes a resistance measurement of the temperature and then converts the resistance to temperature Choose the Analog I O Module number the analog channel input the sensor is hooked to and the units this block should output the temperature in The following table shows the thermistor used by the different Sutron sensors Sutron Sensor Thermistor 5600 0010 Linear 5600 0011 44032 5600 0020 Linear 5600 0025 44036 5600 0030 44036 NON LINEAR Analog I O Module 1 VREF 10 Kohm 3 Channel h x Cancel completion Excitation Channel E CHANNEL Thermistor ID srs f Completion Resist 10000 e Thermistor Units 7 L ee AGND Note The 5600 0011 5600 0025 and the 5600 0030 are all supplied with a precision completion resistor The Completion Resist box should be filled in with the value of the supplied resistor 10400 or 29400 depending on the sensor 134 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com When this air temp block is used with linear sensors a double voltage measurement is made If desired a linear sensor can also be measured by the voltage block and appropriate values for slope and offset Also note the needed addition of a wire from VREF into the excitation channel LINEAR VREF EXCITATION CHANNEL CHANNEL ae oO z f H AGND Bringing the Benefits
208. ems with higher speeds then legacy ports The Status button brings up the Communication Status window Pele Good Total Bad bps Key Check Mail Decoder Unkey Send Mail The Status screen displays information about the current session and allows some testing of the SSP Sutron Standard Protocol connection Rx Good Number of SSP messages received addressed to your PC 120 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Rx Total Total messages received SSP supports multi drop most common with LOS radio systems where messages can be sent to any station in a network Rx Bad Number of bad SSP messages detected This would be messages which could not pass a CRC 16 check Tx Good Number of SSP messages transmitted and acknowledged Tx Total Number SSP messages attempted Tx Bad Number of times an SSP message could not be sent Clear Sets all the statistics to zero Bps The number of bits received and or transmitted per second computed using a 2 second moving average If screen updates or file transfers seem sluggish it might be because you re not achieving a very high bps This can be caused for numerous reasons including an underpowered PC communication errors or just that the 9210 is very busy with processing The rate achieved will vary depending on what s being performed For instance under even the best circumstance
209. ensor with a 40 to 60 degrees C range the calculated slope is 6 25 and an offset of 65 so for the resistors above Calculated slope 6 25 X Correction factor 0 20000 1 250 Calculated slope 6 25 X Correction factor 9747 6 0919 NOTE the offset will stay the same at 65 for both resistors Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Using SDI 12 over the RS 485 Port The 9210 has the ability to use RS 485 for SDI 12 sensors that support SDI 12 over RS 485 interfaces Differential SDI 12 is not a defined standard It is a low power modification of an RS 485 interface It overcomes the cable limitation of SDI 12 since transmitted data is not referenced to the power supply ground It does not utilize a power consuming DC termination resistor The data signaling rate and protocol conform to SDI 12 standards The specification can be obtained at http www sdi 12 org Four wires are needed to use the differential SDI 12 interface two for power and two for data Wire as follows SENSOR 9210 GND SDI 12 GND 12V in SDI 12 12 or PROT 12 RS 485 B RS485A idles high RS 485 A RS485B idles low Same polarity as SDI 12 data line NOTE Since this is not a defined standard the labeling of the data lines is also not standardized The A and B in the sensor column above reflect the naming utilized in the RS485 specifica
210. ensors to it Description The Vibrating Wire block measures vibrating wires connected to one or more Campbell Scientific AVW200 Vibrating Wire Interface devices The AVW200 devices are connected to the logger via RS232 COM port The block does not have any properties to configure in the graphical setup Instead a comma separated value CSV text file is used to define the configuration Here s an example CSV file Name Enabled Y N Time HH MM SS PZ72A Y 0 00 00 000 0 00 05 COM3 PZ72B Y 0 00 01 700 0 00 05 COM3 Interval HH MM SS COM Port Channel 1 2 A B C K T0O S0O S1 Name 1 7 395E 08 0 02281 212 0283952 0 01279 21 01535 992 3 2 9 019E 08 0 02363 216 9210467 0 005873 21 13562 992 3 PZ72C Y 0 00 00 450 0 00 05 COM4 395E 08 0 02281 212 0283952 0 01279 21 01535 992 3 PZ72D Y 0 00 02 150 0 00 05 COM4 019E 08 0 02363 216 9210467 0 005873 21 13562 992 3 PZ74A Y 0 00 00 900 0 00 05 COM7 1 7 395E 08 0 02281 212 0283952 0 01279 21 01535 992 3 PZ74B Y 0 00 02 600 0 00 05 COM7 019E 08 0 02363 216 9210467 0 005873 21 13562 992 3 PZ74C Y 0 00 01 350 0 00 05 COM8 395E 08 0 02281 212 0283952 0 01279 21 01535 992 3 PZ76A Y 0 00 03 050 0 00 05 COM8 019E 08 0 02363 216 9210467 0 005873 21 13562 992 3 PZ76B Y 0 00 01 800 0 00 05 COM9 395E 08 0 02281 212 0283952 0 01279 21 01535 992 3 PZ76C Y 0 00 03 500 0 00 05 COM9 019E 08 0 02363 216 9210467 0 005873 21 13562 992 3 The fields of the file ar
211. ents To get a live reading from any of the sensors first select that sensor in the Sensors window and then press the Meas button To get a live reading from all the sensors press Meas All Regularly scheduled sampling always gets priority over live readings which might result in a live reading taking several seconds to be returned Note If recording is not on then attached I O modules have not necessarily been initialized As such measurements may not be accurate Calibration Sequences The Calibrate button runs a calibration sequence on the selected sensor if one had been previously setup The calibration procedure writes a message to the log to document any change that is made See SETUP BLOCKS sensor descriptions to determine if a calibration method exists Properties The Prop button brings up the properties page for the selected sensor This allows sensor values to be changed without having to go to Setup note however settings cannot be changed without turning recording off Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Sending SDI 12 Commands The SDI button brings up a window that can be used to send commands and view responses from any SDI 12 sensor attached to the system as shown below Note that sampling from all sensors will be stopped while in this window SDI Interface The SDI 12 window has a box for sel
212. er will enter the current value sensor The system will then adjust the offset so the desired value is obtained 158 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Frequency Properties DIO Mod 1 Slope fi m Channel 1 x Offset fo foal Period rns 200 l Units Hz el Take 2 readings V Cancel i Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 159 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Fuel Moisture FM Inputs lt none gt Outputs Fuel Moisture FM Wiring Connect the FM signal to the selected input on the digital module CH1 Connect the FM enable to the selected input on the digital module CH2 Connect the GND to GND Connect the FM Power to VBAT Note the digital module must have special code part number 8080 0006 1 Description This block measures a CS505 Fuel Moisture sensor The sensor has an output frequency in the range of 600 to 1500 Hz A special version of the digital module 8080 0006 1 is needed to read these higher frequencies The sensor also has a separate enable line to turn on and off the sensor as needed to make a measurement The equation used to convert the frequency to fuel moisture percent is as follows PP 1 Freq 1000 FM CO C1 PP C2 PP PP CO 220 14 C1 365 89 C2 114 96 Fuel Moisture Properties
213. es not delete the log file this can only be done under the Setup tab Data will continue to be stored to a cleared log file if logging to that file is active as defined in the in the Setup Entering a NOTE To enter a note into the log first select the log where the note should be placed typically the system log as most users don t want notes in their data logs press the NOTE button and enter the text to be added Then press OK in the upper right corner to enter the note or press X to Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com cancel entering a note This is a useful way to document site visits or to note any issues found while on a site visit Export This button is used to retrieve the log file clicking it will lead through the steps to create an ASCII file of the log The log file is a compressed file If FILE TRANSFER were used on the log file and the file is viewed with a test editor gibberish is seen because of the compression Converting the file to ASCII allows the contents of the file to be viewed As a part of this Export process the system will ask to specify a destination for the file If a prompt to save the file on the PC doesn t appear change the directory for the file to be Temp To do this press the button labeled up and then select Temp If flash disk were selected as the destination directory the flash disk could be f
214. es the ability to test or set the tipping bucket Please see the Tipping Bucket section of this manual page 193 for more information Setup This submenu offers the ability to make simple changes to the setup The submenu has the following items Start Stop Recording Load SSF from Card Save SSF to Card Change Station Name Change Sensors Set Time Exit Setup Start Stop Recording If the system is currently recording this menu item will say Stop Recording and selecting the item will cause the system to stop recording Conversely if the system is currently not recording this menu item will say Start Recording and selecting the item will cause the system to start recording Load SSF From Card A setup from a storage card can be loaded into the 9210 using this menu Press to select the item and the software will prompt Insert Storage Card if one is not present The software will then search the storage card for setup files and display a prompt to load the first file it finds Use the arrow keys to select lt OK gt or lt CANCEL gt as desired and press If lt OK gt is selected the new setup will be loaded This will change everything in the station setup except for the station name and user accounts The system will prompt Make Setup Default Select this choice to have the setup renamed to be station_name ssf or default ssf so it is automatically used on startup If lt CANCEL gt is selected the fil
215. esktop Many shortcuts to XTerm may be created each with a different com port or configuration Once the shortcut has this additional information XTerm will not display the communications configuration screen when it starts Automatic Detection of 9210s on a Network When connecting to a networked 9210 using the TCP IP or Telnet options a Detect button will appear next to the URL box Pressing the Detect button will display a list of 9210 stations that are currently on the network For each 9210 found the list will show the IP address version number of Remote exe model and serial number Selecting a station and pressing OK will copy that station s IP address in to the URL box If Xterm is unable to detect a station it may be because an exception has not been created for Xterm in Windows Firewall requires access to UDP port 52733 or perhaps because the 9210 is running firmware older than 3 2 before this feature was introduced The Detect button may also be used in conjunction with the Redirector option to list the stations you own that are hosted by the Sutron Redirector service SSP Settings The Setup button will display the SSP Settings screen containing advanced options for controlling the timing of SSP messages XTerm is optimized for a 115 2K baud direct connection and other settings are often necessary for slower or less reliable connections SSP Settings x Carrier Delay sec 2 m Presets 115 2k Default Reply Delay
216. ess and Subnet Mask You can press the Name Servers button to enter DNS and WINS address information if desired Crossover Connections An ethernet crossover cable is a special kind of ethernet cable that acts similar to a null modem cable where TX and RX are crossed in order to facilitate host to host communications The crossover cable allows you to connect the 9210 directly to a PC or laptop without the need for a router between the two This cable can be purchased most anywhere standard ethernet cables can be purchased When using a crossover cable set the LAN Configuration either to On or to Auto As mentioned above Auto will turn the LAN on and off automatically according to whether there is something connected to the ethernet jack Since there s no router in a crossover connection it s best to assign a static IP If you don t the 9210 will still assign a default IP that Xterm can find and use but the connection process occurs more slowly Log Files The Log Files branch of the Setup tab allows management of all the log files that have been added to the system Multiple log files can be stored in physical memory space only limited by the amount of memory in the system Multiple files can be open at one time therefore ten sensor signals can be logging to ten separate files or to five files or one for that matter To display a more detailed listing of the log files in the system click Log files and then press the Edit
217. essed but will display an error if that name is not unique To continue this example click OK and then follow the same procedure with the other Measure block to assign its interval a Public Name of SR Interval Now when we exit the Setup screen and go back to the Data tab we see the two interval properties for our measure blocks as shown below Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status BP INTERVAL 00 15 00 SR INTERVAL 00 15 00 Refresh Meas Change To change either property simply select the one to modify and click Change to enter a new value Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com LOG TAB The Log window is used to display data from a log file and to export the file onto a PC Support for logging to many different log files or one log file for all data is built into the software A log file can be viewed even if it is open and being logged to The Log tab is meant mainly to allow viewing of small sections of the log in order to validate sampling or to view recent values To view large sections of the log or to perform data analysis the log file should be retrieved from the unit This is done using the Export button XTerm COM6 115200 xj 18 13 50 18 13 50 18 13 50 1
218. esseneseeengs 106 CHAPTER 6 OPERATION WITH A PC RUNNING XTERM essssessrsesesecccoeroroesesecceeesoroesesecoeeosoroesececoeeoroesese 108 INTRODUCTION ics E E A tourer eo cdeveab oly et eeu sents ue buoensbevoueteatpouyoteeeearteseeceworcsureynevecestemranstseperays 109 Installing DOV Gri 4 5 08 etek ste seep Sev ee AG esp deed te a ee teed ve ea eae ts so 109 Automatic Detection of 9210s on a Network 0 ceeeesceceseceenseceseeeeneeceseeeeneecesceseaeecaeeesaeeceaeeseaeeceaseseaeecnaeesentess 111 SSP SCUn gs seh eiesere Ueto isl ea ae ete dee aS ees ede tn Sep eset Meade ate eed 111 Redirector Settings e ites ee ek ee he ie a ee ed A i oe ee 112 Preparing the 9210 to work with XTerm 0 0 0 eecesecesecssecnsecseecseecseeeaeeeeeeseeseecesecesecaecsaecsaessaesaaesaeseaeeeaeees 113 Operating XTE ties sis eG Re ie a eee a ee ae eS en ee et ee E 113 Pile Transiter vennana o aaa e ER ONE eucaoperaacviebsuptbadhces dates cedvaoncetsh debe ue vachoubletwhs AES EEEREN 115 Process List Foldet enaren ie e a ee a e AE E a e e decwseeeiocd dub lates 116 Set CLOCK erekere a a e ha duced e a a E ola shoud So tela e ae a a aa a aa Ea aei 117 Connectas taet ie e a us AEG E cw tha sub So take a e a A E a a a E e a Eea i 117 LO aTa e 1o C E EE E E E E E EE E E E 117 Web SERVER n enoti e a ees AEG E E shabu sa So a e de A A E E setuid a Eea i 117 Auto Update ohai eener ie eo rao eaa Eene bh O e EES Es Loto ates TRE A EL ee Gs RANG Eit 118 Station Operations sass oe e
219. essessapevecesesaveessacvnsencevvcens dope EEEE SEESE E EKER EE eh evtevoessutevors suneveussupevecgsennedeyeers 16 Using the RS485SDE SEU 2 8 EEEE aan de Mees E EE EEEE EOE 17 CHAPTER 3 OPERATING THE 9210 00 00 ssscsssssscssssscescsssescsssnssscsnescessssssscsssnessssnessesncssesssssssssssnesssssessesseseosees 19 TOGGINGSIN west isecasetetipad abacus bse R a R es cosmonauts satedeouan eet eters 20 User ACCESS e kegialeti R an ell tee iain a A E deere ee eh te dee ae 20 Tab Overview ierre E techies seeds Salen iho ea oth bed cael nea sane des decen ben dnc A caves ated E pean Mond bedava EAE 20 MAIN TAB DEE E ses cuscbiveaceoteubeuwevietieuatyceduecvevsastneyetuacevecdecueesevdneedcusdeneuueduneudeuteeneunes AT 21 Date PME ae eee castes S e evecban bese es E EEEE AVAN AEE E E avis AE E 21 Sanom Nae a ao ENS AE EE EET EE eee ate EE E A E E E AE NE E 22 Staton STATUS eer e E EEEE AREE EEE AE E E E a E A E E AA AE SE 22 Battery Voltage maoae rinnen a E E E E N S ae E E E E E a 22 LOGOULE E E E AE E Maeda Raith E E EEE E E 23 SIINO M WAN E A E E E E AA E 24 Tres Oyei yie W renea RE eE EE E EAEE V N EE E is E a 24 Coms SSP CE eiri e eE Ee dicate ed Mh ee adie E Be AE HA i aoe 25 COMS SSP CL Setup Men ise sccesess tens cs uictee dt evevccescenecens cotees ta tales ECTE CEEE TEKE EEEE AEOS EEEE ETEEN KETO EEEo 26 Coms SSP CL Configuration Settings 00 cesecssecseecseeeseeeeeeseeessenecesecssecaecsaecsaecsaeeseseaeseeeeeeeseeeeeesees 30 EzSetup Me
220. false true true false false false false false When the Invert Output check box is selected the outputs shown in the table are inverted Block Placement The Boolean block should typically come BEFORE the measure or average or other active block that executes it This ensures the block operates on data from the same measurement frame and avoids odd side effects that come from active blocks operating on split paths Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 203 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com CS CS625 Water Content Reflectometer CS625WCR Inputs Frequency Freq Soil Temperature C SoilTemp Outputs Volumetric Water Content VWC Description This block is used to compute Volumetric Water Content VWC using a CS625 Water Content Reflectometer sensor Wiring The CS625 sensor s output should be wired to the input of the 6461 1285 frequency divider The output of the divider should be connected to the input of the DIO module A Frequency block is used to measure the input frequency Set the sample period of the Freq block to 200mS The VWC calculation can be compensated for the current soil temperature if desired To do so connect a block measuring the current soil temperature to the Soil Temperature input of the CS625WCR block You may choose to use a Const block providing a constant value if soil temperature does not change enoug
221. flow over the domes and windows to minimize the formation of dew and reduce the frequency of cleaning The following dialog shows the properties used to configure CNR 4 heater operation Ventilator configuration occurs in the NetRad Ventilator dialog which looks and functions exactly the same NetRad Heater Enable Heater pio mod 1 H Cancel DIO Chan Time 00 00 00 Interval 12 00 00 sive Duration 01 00 00 aM To enable heater operation check the Enable Heater checkbox When enabled the system turns on the heater for the specified Duration according to the specified schedule in Interval and Time For example if Time is 00 15 00 Interval is 12 00 00 and Duration is 01 00 00 then every 12 hours at 12 15 00 and 00 15 00 the system will power the heater for 1 hour 174 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Airmar PB200 200WX PB200 Inputs lt none gt Outputs Dir Wind Direction degrees true Speed Wind Speed m s BP Barometric Pressure bar AT Air Temperature C RH Relative Humidity DP Dew Point C LAT Latitude LON Longitude Description The Airmar PB200 200WX sensor measures or calculates several meteorological parameters including wind speed wind direction barometric pressure air temperature relative humidity and dew poin
222. g the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com R M Young Wind Sensor RMYoung Inputs lt none gt Outputs Speed Dir Wiring Wind Direction AZEXC Connect to selected excitation channel on the analog module Jumper excitation channel to VREF NOTE DO NOT USE CHANNELS ABOVE 8 FOR EXCITATION AZSIG Connect to selected input channel on the analog module REF Connect to GND VREF EXCITATION CHANNEL Potentiometer CHANNEL Powered Sensors WS Sig connect to selected input channel CH1 CH6 of digital module Note CH7 and CH8 reserved for non powered sensors with low level outputs V Supply connect to PROT12 REF connect to GND Non Powered Sensors WS Sig connect to digital CH7 or CH8 of digital module Note The direction potentiometer of most models of the RM Young wind sensor has a 5 degree electrical open from 355 to 360 degrees A one megohm resistor can be placed from the AZSIG input channel to AZEXC excitation channel or AGND to define the direction as 355 degrees AZEXC or 0 degrees AGND in the open region Description This block is designed to make measurements from an R M Young wind sensor models 5103 or 5305 One analog input and one excitation channel analog output is needed on an Analog I O Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 181 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 280
223. ge can be set to be sent after 1 to 255 counts Frequency The time is logged for each counter every time it counts This time is reported for each counter when the counters are read Frequency can be measured by reading the counters twice and computing the difference in time and counts 276 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Shaft encoders Up to four quadrature shaft encoders may be set up The input lines must come from adjacent inputs starting with an odd numbered one e g 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Each shaft encoder has a 32 bit counter associated with it It counts up for one direction of rotation and down for the other Outputs Each of the six lines with output capability can be turned on or off under control of the logger Any output can be pulsed using the pulse output command Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 277 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Appendix D Specifications 278 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 9210 0000 2B Xlite Main board Processor 32 bit ARM9 core Memory 1 MB boot ROM 64MB Flash 32MB for OS and 32MB flash file system for log 32MB SDRAM Power 10 to 16 VDC recommended 20 VDC max 40 ma active 230 mA with display and backlight on lt 3
224. grounding point for the internal spark gap transient protection of the analog inputs For maximum transient protection a good earth ground needs to be provided to at least one of these screws 212 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Specifications Input Range 0 1 to5V any input with respect to ground single ended or differential A D Range Single Ended 0 5 V 78 mV 19 5 mV with respect to ground Differential 2 5V 78 mV 19 5 mV input with respect to input CMRR 120 dB typ Input Impedance gt 10 Gohm typ Accuracy 0 002 of 5V typ 0 003 of 78mV typ HiGain 0 03 of 19 5mV typ x128Gain Temp Coefficient 5 ppm C typ Ratio Accuracy Limited by A D resolution no non linearities or TC seen Noise floor RMS noise typically lt 1bit on 78mV scale and above Excitation 2 5V up to 50 mA SwBat 250 mA Protection Multistage input protection including spark gaps Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 273 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Example Configurations Using the 8080 0007 Analog I O Module Note All references to Vref and AGND are to the terminals on the module performing the measurement Do not connect to similarly named terminals on other modules or the 9210 Single Ended Voltage Measurement Example VREF 20 o
225. h Speech English QO vox Flash Disk Speech English 0 vox 1 vox Flash Disk Speech English 1 vox 10 vox Flash Disk Speech English 10 vox FY i FY i BGuunundosgs Ne Send the autoexec bat file over This file typically starts remote exe and Xpert exe after the system boots When starting remote it tells it which com ports it should control and how to initialize them s Autoexec bat r 256 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Backup the registry in preparation for upgrading the kernel which re inits registry by default The delay is designed to make sure launch is finished backing up the registry before continuing Launch automatically restores the registry on its next execution at boot which occurs after kernel upgrade s Xpert2 fil g Windows Launch exe BACKUP AutoReg dat FILTER Xpert2 fil QUIET saving registry h 4 saving registry d Xpert2 fil Upgrade the kernel The upgrade occurs serially and will take tens of minutes due to the size of the file k Xpert2 ker kernel Upgrade the loader 1 Xpert2 lod loader Upgrade MicroMonitor This upgrade is disabled by default As a general rule do not enable this step unless directe
226. h to require additional compensation The diagram below shows a typical graphical setup of the CS625WCR block compensated for soil temperature using a constant value entered into the Const block To compensate for soil temperature using a measured value replace the Const block with a sensor block configured to measure the current soil temperature To assume a constant soil temperature of 20 C do not connect any block to the Soil Temperature input Zoom Po Wire Add gt exit Properties 204 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com The CS625WCR block properties dialog is shown below CS625WCR Properties Sensor Enable OK Cancel O None Module F Channel 2 Sensor Enable controls how the sensor is enabled for measurement If None is selected the sensor is not enabled automatically the sensor should be wired so it is always enabled though this does result in more power consumption When SW12 is selected the sensor enable should be wired to the SW BATT 12 output of the DIO module When DIO is selected the sensor enable should be wired to the DIO module and channel indicated in the Module and Channel properties Set Soil Type to the appropriate selection based on actual soil type The coefficients CO C1 and C2 change based on the soil t
227. he EZSetup the label of the sensor is passed into the display parameters for the label of the LCD In the graphical setup the label level would not make any sense if it were passed into all the blocks that followed it because additional processing was done to get computed values that are no longer just the level Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 107 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Chapter 6 Operation with a PC running XTerm 108 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com INTRODUCTION Sutron has designed the 9210 so that setup and operation is accomplished by a Windows based personal computer PC running a program called XTerm XTerm supports several connection methods to access both local serial port connection and remote 9210s e g those connected by modem This section describes how to use XTerm Sutron provides two versions of XTerm One version is intended for desktop PCs running Microsoft Windows The other version is intended for PocketPC devices like the HP iPaq and Dell Axim The two programs perform essentially the same functions with the biggest difference being that XTerm for the PocketPC displays the screen rotated 90 degrees XTerm does this because the aspect ratio of the PocketPC screen is the same as the 9210s except it is rotated This ensures the user can s
228. he Redirector button will display the Redirector Connection Settings screen containing options for connecting to a station hosted on the Sutron Redirector service Redirector Connection Settings xj wi I Use defaults Cancel Below is a description of each option User Name The name you were assigned to access the Sutron Redirector service Password The password you were assigned to access the Sutron Redirector service URL The IP address or URL of a custom Redirector service Port The port number of a custom Redirector service Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Use defaults Check this if you wish to specify custom values for the Redirector service URL or port number otherwise the settings for the Sutron Redirector service will be used Troubleshooting If you are unable to access the Redirector service check to make sure your user name and password were specified correctly If that doesn t resolve the issue check with your network administrator that you have rights to access redirector sutron com on port 80 If your organization blocks non Web access on port 80 you may also try specifying the URL redirector sutron com and port 23 under Server Settings Preparing the 9210 to work with XTerm The 9210 is configured at the factory to communicate with XTerm on its COM1 serial port at 115 200 baud Connect a standard R
229. he data is not interleaved i e one sensor s data set appears together in the transmission NOS conforms to NOS requirements for its tidal stations NFDRS conforms to NFDRS requirements for its fire weather stations INSAT conforms to INSAT requirements for its stations HANDAR is a format where sensors are separated by lt CRLF gt sensor data is separated with a space and missing data is an M The oldest data is first to left as in 010034380517419 21 30G42 0NN155E9200070 T3 eB Led Le 3 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 M 1222 1202 A202 12 2 1273 123 12 3 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Type The Type property defines the satellite type and baud rate for the transmission You can select from GOES 100 CGMA 100 INTI GOES 300 GOES 1200 as well as MSG for METOESAT INSAT and others Time Time is the transmission time assigned to the station Each station will have a unique transmission time rate and channel assigned by NESDIS EUMETSAT or other authorized agency The transmission time is entered in UTC Rate The Rate along with the transmission time determines when transmissions are made The units for the rate are HH MM SS Typical rates are 01 00 00 for hourly transmissions and 04 00 00 for transmissions every 4 hours Window This property defines the size of the window in HH MM SS that i
230. he list The combo box on the bottom of the screen can be used to select the language for the phrases displayed this is used in conjunction with the Language command to setup a bilingual speech phrase Speech Dial in and Dial Out commands Command Description AckAlarms Acknowledge alarms in the system Further alert transmissions will cease until a new alert occurs or it s time for an alarm transmission AnswerData Switches to answering the phone in data mode Branch Branches to another part of the speech command specified by a user Label Searching for the label begins with the first line in the speech command BranchDTMF Wait for and branches based on a DTMF press Searching for the label begins at the current line in the speech command The phone will be Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com hungup after 60 seconds if a button is not pushed BranchNoDTMF Same as Branch but the Branch is only performed if a DTMF button was not pressed on the phone This is usefull for repeating a series of phrases over and over until the user pushes a button If a button is pushed it will be queued and should be processed by a BranchDTMF command Normally there is a 90 second inactivity timeout that is reduced to 60 seconds when this command is used The phone is hungup if an inactivity timeout occurs Call Calls a subroutine in another part of the
231. he same information as the 9210 s Status tab About button CAL sensor value Calibrate sensor using value Where sensor is the name of the block and must be a unique name see rename for details For example to calibrate a sensor block named stage to value 15 5 e x cal stage 15 5 CD path Change directory CAL sensor value Calibrate sensor using value For example to calibrate a sensor block named stage to value 15 5 288 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com e x cal stage 15 5 COPY src dest Copy a file A wildcard character may be used as part of the src to match one or more files but then dest should contain the name of a folder If a path contains spaces it must be surrounded in double quotes ex copy usb card flash diskY DATE mm dd yyyy Displays or sets the date DEFAULT Exits and runs Windows Remote COM1 115200 DEL file Delete file DIR path Display directory GET sensor list F Shows archived log data Specifying a sensor list will cause only logfile those sensors to be displayed gt min d Vyyy IF specifies a logfile SSP LOG is used by default hh mm ss E mm dd yyyy hh mm ss CSV YMODEM ZIP C REVERSE BAD INVERT OLDEST NEWEST TODAY YESTERDAY WEEK M
232. he standard deviation is computed a second pass is made In the second pass before a sample is added to a sum or squared and added to a sum of squares it is compared to the mean plus or minus three standard deviations Quality Control QC theory indicates that such samples are likely to be in error An updated mean and standard deviation are computed using only the samples that pass the QC check The DQAP block is used to periodically take a number of samples from a sensor and then output the quality controlled mean standard deviation sample count and number of samples failing the QC check For example every half an hour with a five minute offset a sensor could be sampled every two seconds for thirty seconds and then the maximum value sampled outputted see example below Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 207 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Interval Duration Specifically the Schedule Interval indicates how often the DQAP block should sample a series DQAP Average Properties Interval of data points process them and output values The Schedule Time specifies the synchronization of when this should begin The Sample Interval entry indicates how often the sensor should be sampled each time its scheduled to sample and the Sample Duration specifies for how long To average continuously the Schedule Interval should be set equal to the Sample D
233. his Measure Properties Time 00 00 00 sss Interval 00 15 00 ai J 41 Cancel Note the button next to the data fields pressing this button will bring up another data entry box that oil provide some data error checking that would not be available if data was entered directly into the field It is recommended to always use the button before entering data Let s say we plan to change the sampling intervals for the SR and BP sensor often and don t want to go into the setup each time we want to change them This is a case where it makes sense to use the FieldVar block By using the Add button in the Graphical Setup screen described in the next chapter we can attach a FieldVar block to each measure block Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com F zoom Dg wire Add Exit Select Field Variables Internal Name Public Name 1 i Cancel Label Listed are the two modifiable properties for the Measure block To add Interval to our Data tab check the box next to Interval Then click on the word Interval to select it and click Label to give this property a Public Name For this example assign the name BP Interval The Public Name must be unique in the system in order to identify the referenced property If no Public Name is specified it defaults to Internal Name when OK is pr
234. his is not the case the formatter will still work but will have varying amounts of data on each line each time based on whatever sensors are collected at each time This will produce confusing results if the additional sensors are collected at an interval of the other sensors The results should be OK if the additional sensors are collected at a time separate time Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com ASCII SENSOR FORMATTING This method of formatting uses four digits for each measurement readings Measurement readings are multiplied by 100 before being transmitted lt CRLF gt IDIDIDID JJJHHMMSS lt CRLF gt Meas1_Data 1 Meas1_Data 2 Meas1_Data n lt CRLF gt Meas2_Data 1 Meas2_Data 2 Meas2_Data n lt CRLF gt MeasN_Data 1 MeasN_Data 2 MeasN_Data n lt CRLF gt optional Battery before transmission lt CRLF gt optional Battery under load lt CRLF gt lt CRLF gt is a carriage return line feed IDIDIDID is the eight byte hexadecimal satellite ID JJJ is a three digit Julian Day which is the number of days of the year January Ist is Julian Day one and February 1st is Julian Day 32 This number is always three digits 0 padded HHMMSS are the hours minutes and seconds This is the time of the scheduled transmission It is always 6 bytes 0 padded Meas1_Data MeasN_Data are the data from the active measurements included
235. hm or 100 completion CHANNEL EXCITATION CHANNEL both set to same channel RESISTOR Two Wire Resistance Measurement Example SW D 12 4 20 mA Sensor 420 20 or 100 Ohm Resistor CHANNEL AGND 4 20ma Current Measurement Example WIRE C VREF Even excitation pair Selected excitation channel 1 20 ohm or 100 completion Selected odd Excitation Channel Even Channel Pair Selected Channel 1 WIRE RESISTOR 2 Selected odd Channel wre L___ sono Four Wire Resistance Measurement Example VREF WIRE EXCITATION CHANNEL 10 Kohm completion CHANNEL Thermistor Two Wire Thermistor Measurement Example ARE __ REF Even excitation pair Selected excitation channel 1 10 Kohm completion Selected odd Excitation Channel WIRE Even Channel Pair Selected Channel 1 Thermistor Selected odd Channel SDE AGND Four Wire Thermistor Measurement Example 274 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com ADD ON DIGITAL I O MODULE 8080 0002 The 8080 0002 Digital I O Module can be added onto the 9210 to expand its digital I O capability The Digital I O module has eight digital input lines six of which may be re programmed as outputs The two dedicated input lines can be programmed for normal sensitivity for sensing 0 to 5 volt digital signals or h
236. hook these two blocks click the Wire button at the top of the screen The blocks unwired will look like this F zoom Dg wire F Add gt Exit MeasureLog D SolRad To now hook the measure and log blocks to the new SR sensor we have added click on the SR icon and use Select Output to select its output SR F zoom Dg wire F Add gt Exit RM Youn Measurelog z Finally click the Wire button again to get the desired setup Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com F zoom Dg wire F Add gt Exit Pheng RM Youn MeasureLog E H E E oRad MeasureLog a Deleting a Block To delete a block select it and then select Delete from the menu that appears This also deletes the wires coming from that block For example if we deleted the second Measure block from above the resulting Setup Diagram would then look like this F zoom Do wire F Add gt Exit hee i RM Youn MeasureLog o oo in 2 Fa o a z Deleting Multiple Blocks To delete multiple blocks click on the left most block then select the Delete Right menu All blocks to the right of the selected block will be deleted In the above blocks clicking RMYoung and selecting Delete Right will delete the RMYoung Measure and Log with one click Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collect
237. hours is Omph because two unit vector pointing opposite directions cancel when added with vector addition Mean Magnitude Wind This is the vector average of the wind speed which takes direction into account Here the average of 10mph at 0 for 1 hour and 20mph at 180 for 1 hour is negative S5mph Mean Direction Unit This is the wind direction in degrees not weighted for wind speed Here the average of 10mph at 0 with 20mph at 90 is 45 Mean Direction Wind This is the wind direction in degrees weighted for wind speed Here the average of 10mph at 0 with 100mph at 90 is 84 STD Speed Scalar This is the standard deviation of the scalar wind speed STD Direction Unit This is the standard deviation of the direction unit STD Direction Wind This is the standard deviation of the direction wind Min Speed Scalar This is the minimum of the scalar wind speed Max Speed Scalar This is the maximum of the scalar wind speed Max Direction This is the direction taken at the time the max speed is detected Count This is the number of samples that have been taken Description The Vector Average block is a special version of the Average block that includes computations to make a vector average The vector average is important to any sensor that has a circular discontinuity such as a wind sensor with the crossover from 0 to 359 degrees This block is in fact geared toward wind sensors but
238. http www sutron com 289 OLDEST will start the dump with the oldest data in the log NEWEST will start the dump with the newest data in the log especially useful when combined with REVERSE TODAY will start the dump with today YESTERDAY will start the dump with yesterday WEEK will start the dump with the last Sunday MONTH will start the dump with the 1st of the current month YEAR will start the dump at Jan 1 of the current year HOUR will start the dump at the top of the current hour HELP Displays the list of commands INFO Shows the same information as the 9210 s Status Tab IPCONFIG ALL Displays the ethernet configuration information that has been assigned by a connected router via the DHCP protocol including the IP address assigned to the 9210 The ALL option includes more detailed information including the physical address i e MAC ID and DHCP lease times LANOFF Turns OFF the Ethernet Local Area Network interface LANON Turns ON the Ethernet Local Area Network interface DHCP is used to locate the gateway retrieve the IP address and other internet settings Use the IpConfig command to view the current settings Also related Release Renew LOGOUT Logout also quit or exit MAIL port to msg Reads or sends mail message MD dir Make a directory port parity bits stop HW ECHO BREAK CONTROL MEASURE M
239. ies are set the same for all HeatFlux blocks sharing the relay 166 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Internal Battery IntBat Inputs lt none gt Outputs Battery Temp Wiring None the sensor is internal to the 9210 Description This block measures the 9210B supply voltage and internal temperature Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 167 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Log Input Inputs lt none gt Outputs LogVal the value retrieved from the log Wiring None Description This block retrieves the last value from the log for the sensor indicated This block is most useful when data is logged by EzSetup or an Xpert Basic program but needs to be processed in the Graphical Setup When scheduling this block be sure to schedule it so that is runs after the desired data is logged Log Properties Log Name Flash Disk SSP LOG 7 Sensor Name Stage eal GA Cancel 168 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Ee ML2x Soil Moisture Sensor ML2x Inputs lt none gt Outputs Dielectric Moisture Wiring The sensor is measured single ended Hence connect the sensor s V to any analog input channel CH1 CH1
240. igh sensitivity for sensing low level signals such as those from an R M Young wind speed sensor Features Eight digital I O lines CMOS level inputs Six bi directional two input only Reconfigurable I O Up to eight counters frequency inputs with programmable alarm count leading edge trailing edge or both edges of input pulse Up to four quadrature shaft encoder inputs requires two inputs per sensor with programmable alarm Two switchable threshold inputs compatible with R M Young wind sensor Switched sensor power Industrial temperature range operation 40 to 60 C Parameter Min Typ Max Units Inputs i ae a aoo Inputs Sampling Interval microseconds Switchable threshold Output open drain MOS switches Pull up voltage 0 14 Volts Resistance 80 125 2 Current 70 mA SW BAT output Protection Static discharge 2000 Volts Lightning Conducted 400 Volts CMOS levels Human body model 31 microsecond rise 1 millisecond fall Viewing the card from the front the plug assignments are as shown below The I O lines are numbered 1 8 LSB is 1 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 275 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com i BAT G Ground Input Only Switchable sensitivity Inputs When programmed as an input each line can act as a digitally filtered counte
241. igures Satlink to append the loaded Battery voltage taken at last TX to the end of the transmission Channel This property defines the channel that Satlink will use to make the self timed transmission Num Vals This property defines the number of values to include in the self timed transmission This value is used only in the BIN INT transmission format to set the number of values to send for each sensor e g if set to 32 and if 4 sensors are sending data then a total of 128 data values are sent Other formats may use the NUM VALUES defined in the self timed blocks entered into the setup The number entered here will also set the default value when placing a self timed block into the setup Format Support for several standard formats is included The supported formats are SHEF format conforms to NESDIS Standard Decimal format specifications The format is ASCII and readable by persons without the aid of a computer SHEF Fixed is a special version of the SHEF format where numbers are fixed to seven decimal points Receive sites that handle messages with variable length data can use this format Bin Int is a binary interleaved format identical to the 8210 binary transmission format The data are in the 6 bit pseudo binary format required by NESDIS Bin NonInt is a binary non interleaved format This format also uses the 6 bit pseudo binary format but allows different amounts of data to be sent for each sensor T
242. ile and schedule basic programs See the Xpert Basic SLL User s Manual for more information Coms SSP CL Used to configure SSP and Command Line communications e g communications with Xconnect PCBase Xterm Hyperterminal etc This section is not used with most extra sll s that use com ports unless the documentation for that sll says to use a specific connection in the Coms setup Note See Chapter 7 for coms pinouts and jumper settings EZSetup Used to define simple single input measurements Sensor measurements Measurements defined here can be measured or averaged on a regular interval have a slope and offset applied be displayed on the front panel be transmitted via Satlink or modem and be used to identify alarm conditions Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Graphical Setup Used to define both simple and complex measurements Measurements can have one or more inputs cascading into one or more outputs Special processing blocks can be used to implement complex calculations including polynomial interpolation table f x y and others See the Processing section in Appendix A for descriptions of all possible blocks V O Modules Used to view address and serial numbers of I O modules connected to the system The 9210 has three modules built into it AIO1 DIO1 and DSP1 Note If you connect any external I O modules to th
243. illed with the new file and shut down the system If the 9210 contains a storage card USB or SD then when the button labeled UP is pressed you will be able to select one of USB Card or SD Card as a destination Press the Export button to see the following dialog Format Comma Delimited 7 Download Since last export 7 This dialog will define what the exported log file should look like The Format options are Comma delimited Tab delimited and Fixed Column The comma delimited format works well with spreadsheets The Tab Delimited and Fixed Column formats can work well when printing The Download options are defined as follows Since last export When this option is selected the system exports only data that is more than the time of the last log export If the log has never been exported the system exports the entire log Start time to end When this option is selected the system exports only the data time that has a timestamp between the dates and times specified in Start Time and End Time Start time to end log When this option is selected the system exports only the data that has a timestamp between the times specified in Start Time Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com and the end of the log Start log toend time When this option is selected the system exports only the data that has a times
244. ime out applies only to remote command line login She has been granted access rights to the Command line and Gui Franco has been placed in the Setup user group and hence is allowed to change the setup upgrade the unit transfer files etc He may leave the unit inactive for up to 10 minutes before his session will timeout He has been granted access rights to the Command line Gui and he may access the unit via TCP IP LAN Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Edit Users Retrieval Setup New Eat Delete Close Pressing New or Edit brings up a user properties window This window has blanks for user name password user group access rights and a timeout If no password is desired for that user simply leave the password spaces blank The user group determines what sort of access the user is allowed Normally either Retrieval and Setup access are selectable but Custom groups may also be enabled by certain SLLs or Basic Programs A timeout period may be selected for the user to determine how much time with no activity must pass in order to automatically log out the user Starting with 9210 firmware v3 2 Access Rights may also be assigned These allow the user to be restricted to accessing only the Command Line TCP IP SSP or GUI capabilities of the unit depending upon what s checked For example if you wish
245. in the transmission Measurement data is always four digits followed by a space 0 padded All values are multiplied by a 100 No decimal point is used for measurement data Range of transmitted data is 0 to 9999 numbers out of range are transmitted as 0000 or 9999 This means that the sensor data should be between 0 and 99 99 before formatting If the user elects to append battery voltage see page 61 one of the two will be appended o If the transmission satellite is Japan MTSAT GMS or Meteosat MSG only one line of battery voltage information will be added It will take this format 13 5 lt CR gt lt LF gt Three digits and a decimal point are always used It is the battery voltage prior to the transmission o For all other transmission types two lines of battery voltage information will be added Both lines take the same format 12 5 lt CR gt lt LF gt three digits of battery voltage and a decimal point The first line is the battery voltage prior to this transmission The second line is the battery voltage during the last transmission This is an example transmission 010570F2 108183053 0250 0250 0250 0250 2231 2232 2233 2234 312 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 12 2 12 1 1 On the first line 010570F2 represents the hexadecimal satellite ID 108 is the Julian Day for the year 2005 that is April 18
246. in a zipped archive and typically has a name similar to Xpert2 vxX X X X SCzip SC in this case is meant to signify storage card Once downloaded unzip the archive onto an SD or USB card installed in your PC 85 Alternatively if the SD or USB card is not installed in your PC but is instead installed in the Xlite you may choose to 86 Unzip the archive to your PC 87 Use the command line interface to create the same directory structure on the storage card as exists in the unzipped archive 88 Copy the contents of each unzipped archive directory to the corresponding storage card directory 89 Alternatively if you do not want to use a storage card and you have at least 10MB available on the Xlite flash disk you may choose to copy the unzipped archive to the Flash Disk You ll need to create the directory structure first using the command line interface in this case as well 90 Insert the storage card into the Xlite skip this step if you chose option b above 91 Select the Upgrade Kernel and or Application option from the Setup tab 92 The system will prompt you whether you want to upgrade using the upgrade found Verify the upgrade found is the one you intended and select Yes 93 If the upgrade includes the kernel true when the upgrade provides the file Xpert2 ker in the root of the upgrade archive the system will prompt whether you wish to backup the registry Answer Yes 94 The upgrade
247. in resistance DC Resistance 2 wire Set the excitation channel to match the input channel VREF 20 ohm or 100 completion C HANNEL EXCITATION CHANNEL both set to same channel RESISTOR AGND DC Resistance 3 wire Set excitation channel to be different from input channel Use a precision 20 ohm resistor or 100 and divide reading by 5 VREF WIRE EXCITATION CHANNEL 20 ohm for 100 completion CHANNEL RESISTOR z a DC Resistance 4 wire Select differential measurement Set excitation channel to be different from input channel Connect the sensor as shown below Select an odd number channel 1 3 9 and an odd number excitation channel 1 3 7 The even number pair is the next higher number so in the example below if the channel selected is 1 then the EVEN channel is 2 The same thing applies for 138 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com the excitation channel if the excitation channel selected is 3 then the EVEN excitation channel is 4 WIRE ___ VREF Even excitation pair Selected excitation channel 1 20 ohm for 100 completion WIRE RESISTOR 2 Selected odd Excitation Channel Even Channel Pair Selected Channel 1 Selected odd Channel wre L aoo AC Resistance 2 wire Set excitation channel to match input channel S
248. ing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com DQAP Quality Controlled Average Inputs Input Outputs Average Computes the quality controlled average mean value of the samples taken during the Duration STD Computes the quality controlled standard deviation of the samples taken during the Duration Count Outputs the number of samples that were collected The number of samples used in the output average is the Count minus the Outliers Outliers Outputs the number of samples that were greater than three standard deviations from the initial sample mean Description The DQAP block is a special modification of the Average block The Average block is a Measure block that can output the maximum minimum average standard deviation and sample count from a series of data points sampled from a sensor The DQAP block also computes the average and outputs it along with the standard deviation and sample count The difference is in the way the average and standard deviation are computed The DQAP block makes use of statistical quality control theory to improve the accuracy of the reported mean and standard deviation The improvement is obtained by computing the mean and standard deviation it two passes In the first pass the mean and standard deviation are determined by the usual process of simply using the collect samples as is After t
249. ing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Analog ADC Inputs lt none gt Outputs AJOData Wiring This section discusses the many different ways to use the ADC block from a wiring perspective Excitation Many sensors are resistive or ratio metric in nature and need an excitation voltage There is one programmable excitation output Vex and multiple Vref outputs The 2 5V reference Vref is always on during analog measurements and is the excitation that should normally be used If there is a need for a reference voltage other than 2 5V then the Vex excitation can be used by checking the Excitation On box and selecting the appropriate voltage The excitation channel box specifies the analog input channel to which the excitation will be connected to allow the Xlite to measure the excitation NOTE DO NOT USE CHANNELS ABOVE 8 FOR EXCITATION Voltage Single Ended Connect the sensor s Vout to any analog channel CH1 CH10 Voltage Differential Connect the sensor s V V to any pair of analog Channels CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 through CH9 CH10 The channel being measured is the positive connection meaning that to measure CH2 with respect to CH1 CH1 being the V connection select 2 for the Chan and be sure to check the Differential box Current 4 20 ma Connect the sensor to 12 SW and the selected input channel Add a 20 ohm completion resist
250. ing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 155 Rl CS107 Temperature Sensor CS107Temp Inputs lt none gt Outputs Temp Wiring Connect the Thermistor black wire to the selected signal channel of the analog module CH1 CHxx Connect a precision 100K 0 1 resistor between CHx above and the selected excitation channel CH1 CH8 NOTE DO NOT USE CHANNELS ABOVE 8 FOR EXCITATION Connect a wire between Vref and the selected excitation channel Connect the Thermistor red to GND Do not connect the purple AG to anything Keep it insulated so it will not contact anything Connect the clear shield to GND Description This block measures a CS 107 temperature probe The CS 107 uses a thermistor to measure temperature in air soil or water over the range of 35 to 50C with an accuracy of about 0 5C The 9210 measures the CS 107 using its special double voltage reading where it measures its excitation voltage in addition to the signal voltage The nominal excitation voltage is 5 volts After making the measurement the temperature is computed as follows R VM 100000 VX VM Where R is the resistance of the thermistor VM is the measured excitation voltage and VX is the measured signal voltage X 800000 R this converts the resistance to a format compatible with the published conversion polynomial Temp a b X c X d X e X f X Whe
251. input blocks Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com T e RH AirTemp AT RH BEIEnc BinIn z M lt a wizard J 1 Scroll up or down to find the input block labeled RMYoung For now leave the checkbox next to Use Wizard checked and click OK Now the main setup display will look like this F zoom Dg wire F Add Exit RM Youn MeasureLog By using the Wizard we can see that not only has the RMYoung sensor block has been added to the setup screen but a measure block and log block as well with connections The exact blocks that are automatically added with the Wizard are customizable with the Wizard button in the Add Input window above Adding Additional Blocks Looking carefully we see that only one of the outputs from the RMYoung block will be sampled and logged with this arrangement Zooming in on this block indicates it is the wind speed output Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com RM Young Measure To also sample and log wind speed we need to create another instance of the measurement and log blocks and connect them to the wind direction output of the RMYoung block To do this first click the RMYoung icon click Select Output and then from the slide out menu click Dir for the direction output
252. internal circuitry is actually providing a path to ground through a 100ohm resistor when turned on binary 1 and pulled up through internal pull up resistors when turned off binary 0 see INPUTS section if using channel 7 or 8 for details The maximum current draw is 70mA trying to sink more current than this will cause damage to the channel 266 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com ADD ON ANALOG I O MODULE 8080 0003 The 8080 0003 Analog I O Module ADC can be added onto the 9210 to expand its analog input capability The module has six analog I O lines an output that can be switched to ground and switched and unswitched 12 volt outputs The analog lines are capable of being inputs and outputs simultaneously giving the user tremendous flexibility in setup As an example the simple resistance measurement is made by exciting the input the resistor is connected to and measuring the current and voltage on that input line just as would be done using a conventional multimeter Features Six inputs configurable as 6 single ended channels or 3 differential inputs or a combination of single ended and differential inputs All channels feature self excitation and built in voltage current and resistance sensing Input gain settings 1 16 Up to 6 4 20ma sensor interface 24 bit analog to digital converter Continuous self calibration Vout excitation
253. ion Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Random Parameter block 241 Random Properties 52 Random Test 55 Rate 52 53 recording status Xlite 22 XLite 73 Refresh button 56 71 remote exe 286 Reset button 44 56 Reset FS button 56 resistance measurements 138 139 142 Right Digits 310 RM Young Wind Sensor block 181 RndGroup block 239 ROC Alarm 199 RS232 modules specifications 279 S sample duration 201 208 interval 201 208 satellite ID 49 Satlink description 280 installation 126 27 properties 49 random properties 52 random test 55 self timed properties 50 self timed test 54 Status 56 schedule interval 201 208 time 201 208 SDI AquaTrak block 184 SDI 12 See Also Digital I O Modules XLite Digital Module commands 62 SDI 12 block 183 SDIAqua block 184 SDK 282 284 SE8500 block 185 Self Test 56 Self Timed Parameter block 242 Self Timed properties 50 Self Timed Test 54 SendTag block 249 sensor blocks See Also blocks Air Temperature 134 Air Temperature Relative Humidity 136 Analog 136 42 Barometric Pressure 143 BEI Absolute Encoder 144 Binary Input 145 Binary Input All Channels 147 Bridge Resistance 149 CapRain 150 Constant 152 Counter 154 CS107 Temperature Sensor 156 Frequency 158 Fuel Moisture 160 GetTag 161 Gill Wind 162 Internal Battery 167 168 Platinum RTD 169 170 172 175 178 Quadrature Shaft Encoder 180 R M Young Wind 181 S
254. ion Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com USING COM PORTS Overview The 9210 has four RS232 COM ports Com ports can be used for communications devices and serial sensors with sensor specific setup blocks The units are configured from the factory to provide 5 volts out on COM3 pin 9 this allows a Sutron 9210 Voice modem to be connected with one serial cable to communicate and provide power without the need to open the unit Pin nine of all ports are user configurable for Ring In RD 5 Vdc out or 12 Vdc out input power On the 9210 COM1 is a modified DCE Female COM 2 3 and 4 are a DTE Male Com 1 has pins 1 and 9 modified as inputs normal DCE use these pins as outputs DCE ports are connected to a PC using a M F DB 9 straight thru cable The DTE ports can be wired to modems and Satlink using straight cables Pin out information COM 1 Modified DCE Female DCE Signal Name Direction 1 CD IN modified 2 RD OUT TX IN 4 DTR IN GND DSR OUT RTS IN CTS OUT RI IN modified COM2 4 DTE Male DTE Signal Name Direction 1 CD IN 2 RD IN 3 TX OUT 4 DTR OUT 5 GND 126 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 6 DSR IN T RTS OUT 8 CTS IN 9 Set by jumpers to RI 5V or 12V Jumper Settings The following t
255. ion to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Inserting a Block Do wire Add gt Exit ir Select Input gt SolRad Select Output gt Clear selection Delete Delete Right Rename To insert a block into a chain of blocks simply select a block for the new block to go in front of So for the example above to insert a display block before the measure of the RMYoung select measure then insert Notice the Input if a block with multiple inputs is selected this would show all available inputs in the case of measure only one input is available so click the Input The Select Category box will be displayed for this example select MISC and then select DISPLAY and click OK F zoom Do wire Add Exit The display is now inserted in front of the measure block Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com F zoom Dg wire Add gt Exit SS D SolRad Log Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com CHAPTER 5 EXAMPLE SETUPS 100 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com EZSETUP FOR A STREAM GAUGING STATION Setting up a stream gauging station with a shaft encoder is
256. ion to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com URL Machine name or IP address to send a message to Leaving an entry blank will cause it to be skipped Type Type of message to send SSP selects an SSP message The Xlite waits for an OpAck packet to be received to confirm reception Computer selects a text message with a prompt to press ENTER to confirm reception Data also selects a text message but it doesn t wait for confirmation and assumes it has been delivered correctly if the TCPIP stack does not report an error making the connection and sending the message Tx Normal Rate Selects an interval at which a message will be sent when the system is in the NORMAL state entering 00 00 00 will disable this feature Tx Alarm Rate Selects an interval at which a message will be sent when the system is in the ALARM state entering 00 00 00 will disable this feature Send to All If checked messages will be sent to all 3 URLs If left unchecked then each URL is tried in order until a message has been delivered Disable Alerts If checked this will disable alert messages to be sent via TCPIP but not Tx Normal or Tx Alarm messages Alert messages occur when a sensor transitions in to or out of the alarm state Options The options button brings up further options that may be enabled for each URL TCPIP Options 1 User Name MYBASEID ie Password poen i leave blank if login is not required
257. ions both transmissions and incoming message processing GPRS232 sIl This SLL provides a general purpose RS 232 communications block intended to enable measurement of a variety of RS 232 sensors IECModbus sll This SLL extends the capabilities of the modbus sll to work with a device built by Applied Systems Engineering to interface to an TEC 104 network IMD sll This SLL implements custom reporting functionality required by IMD Tridium sll This SLL adds support for Iridium cell modem communications both transmissions and incoming message processing LCRAPLCDriver sll The purpose of this SLL is to connect a serial input PLC to one of the COM ports The PLC is used to provide remote output of the headwater and tailwater levels in reservoirs LCRASerialDisplay sll The purpose of this SLL is to connect a two line Adaptive Alpha display to one of the COM ports The purpose of the display is to provide remote output of the headwater and tailwater levels in reservoirs ManualEntry sll This SLL adds a block that allows the user to enter observed data measurements manually Modbus sll The purpose of this SLL is to add the ability to communicate via modbus to the Xpert 9210 For more information see the document Xpert Modbus SLL User Manual available separately NIFC sll The purpose of this SLL is to provide the necessary blocks to connect sensors used in Fire Weather applications
258. ire F Add gt Exit Sensor Name Stage a Precision right digits k 236 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com TELEMETRY BLOCKS Coms Tag Inputs Data Outputs Data Description This block identifies or tags data to be shown on the Data tab The Coms Tag block also tags information to be included in SSP communications messages When another station requests current data alarm data get tag send tag or eval tag these are common SSP requests the 9210 provides the data from the Coms tags Therefore you control the data that is included in the responses to these data requests by attaching a Coms tag to the desired data NOTE This tag is case sensitive therefore it should always be entered in UPPERCASE letters to avoid confusion 99 66 The Prefix and Suffix phrases are only used in speech voice modem messages If you do not see choices for the prefix and suffix the speech files have not been loaded into your 9210 The Right Digits property controls the precision of the tagged data but only when the check box is checked Coms Tag Properties x Name PRECIP B Prefix Precptaton 7 V Right Digits GUI Placement If the block is connected to an Alarm block the Data tab will also show alarm information for the tagged data point In order to
259. it digits and each digit is placed in one byte of data The number 64 ASCII is added to each digit to make it fall within the range of displayable ASCII characters The only exception is that 127 ASCII lt DEL gt is sent as 63 ASCII Example 1 Encoding the number 10 in 1 byte Since 10 will fit in 6 bits we only have to add 64 which would yield 74 So the number 10 would appear as ASCII 74 or the letter J Example 2 Encoding the number 12345 in 3 bytes First we have to convert 12345 into binary in 6 bit pieces 12345 base 10 11 000000 111001 base 2 Now we can convert each piece back to base 10 11 000000 111001 base 2 3 0 57 Finally we add 64 to each piece and convert to ASCII 67 64 121 ASCII C y Example 3 Encoding the number 12345 in 3 bytes First we have to convert 12345 into two s complement 18 bit binary 12345 base 10 111100 111111 000111 base 2 Now we can convert each piece back to base 10 111100 111111 000111 base 2 60 63 7 Finally we add 64 to each piece and convert to ASCII since the second piece is 63 we leave it alone 124 63 71 ASCII 1 G Example 4 Decoding the 3 byte string SW This is just like encoding except we follow the steps backward First we convert all the characters to ASCII decimal codes ASCIL SW 64 83 87 Now we subtract 64 from each piece and convert to 6 bit binary 0 19 23 000000 010011 010111 Finally we combine all the bits to for
260. ive to the device on which the file sits the 9210 or PC Process List Folder The virtual files under the Process List virtual directory give important details on what programs are running in the 9210 The files are virtual in that they do not exist physically as files on the 9210 The information is organized in this fashion to make it easier to view and transfer for analysis A sample Process list is shown below Note that it can take 10 seconds or more for the system to produce the Process List PC Files CAWINNT Profiles don Desktop El Pert Files Process List lt DIR gt lt DIR gt lt DIR gt 01 23 2003 11 03 32 lt DIR gt 01 23 2003 11 09 32 xpert ssf 2474 12 31 1999 21 43 06 device exe 17 CO7FCCBAA 67200 43 578s filesys exe 1 207CDC26 432 1 252s gwes exe 9 007438F 2 60140 5 920s NK EXE 4 807CEFE 2 0 8 703s remote exe 6 20725144 32776 16 579s taskman exe 2 0072F94E 816 3 293s xpert exe 12 4070B686 246620 202 440 gt l Seral Delete gt lt Run Sel All Delete Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com The format of the process information is name threads address size and time Where name is the file name of the process running threads is the count of threads running address is the where in memory the program is running size is the number of bytes used by th
261. k like this Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com flash disk remote exe com1 115200 flash disk xpert exe SDI COM4 Once the autoexec bat has been modified reboot the system Now when SDI 12 sensors are configured in the setup the system will communicate out the RS 485 port on the B terminal strip labeled RS485 A RS485 B OPT COM4 NOTE Once the 9210 has been configured this way ALL SDI 12 sensors will use the RS 485 port for communicating The RS485SDI sll cannot be used in this configuration when SDI has been redirected to COM4 Using the RS485SDI SLL Use this option when you don t want to redirect the default SDI port for example if you want to use both RS485 SDI sensors and standard SDI sensors at the same time To use the RS485SDI sll use XTerm to download RS485SDL sll from the Extra SLLs directory on the installation disk and reboot the unit Then add one or more RS485SDI setup blocks to the setup and configure them with the appropriate addresses and commands The RS485SDI SLL only supports SDI on RS485 COM4 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Chapter 3 Operating the 9210 LOGGING IN User Access After connecting with Xterm two choices of access are available Retrieval and Setup Each succee
262. ked check the ST to send this sensor in a Self Timed transmission leave default of 2 right digits Since digital channel one on the built in digital module cannot be used with a Quadrature shaft encoder change the channel to 3 Note If an external 8080 0002 were used then channel 1 would be valid Click the MORE button to get to the details of the QuadSE properties See Appendix A to see all the options available for this built in sensor block For this setup leave the defaults Click the DSP button to see the properties for the display It is possible to log a different amount of precision than is displayed on the front panel the default value used here comes from the Rt Digits set on the main Sensor Configuration page For this setup leave the defaults Click the ST button to see the properties for the self timed transmission Notice that all the fields are filled in with details previously entered These details include the Label From Sensor Configuration Data Time Interval From the EZSetup Measurement schedule Num Values From the Self Timed tree under Satlink and an auto numbering Sequence This is the first sensor configured so it is 1 Since the transmit format was previously left at the default of SHEF the Num Values for this sensor are configured here it is possible to send a different amount of values per sensor Had BIN INT binary interleaved been selected this field would display the Num Values set in the Self Timed
263. l Module and Channel properties control when and how the sensor is powered Power to the sensor can either be switched or constant The following table describes connections and behavior for the different values of PwrCtrl PwrCtrl Connections and Behavior AIO SW12 Connect sensor V to the SW12 terminal of the desired AIO module For 9210B this can be either the terminal marked SW D 12 on the top of the unit or one of the SWBATT terminals on a connected AIO module if any When connecting to the terminal on the top of 9210B set Module to 1 When connecting to an external AIO module set Module to the number of the connected module DIO SW12 Connect sensor V to the SW 12 terminal of the desired DIO module For 9210B this can be either the terminal marked SW D 12 on the top of the unit or one of the SWBATT terminals on a connected DIO module if any When connecting to the terminal on the top of 9210B set Module to 1 When connecting to an external DIO module set Module to the number of the connected module DIO CHAN This option is used when connecting sensor power to an external relay controlled by a 9210B digital output channel Connect sensor V to the power supply terminal of the relay Connect the relay control signal to the DIO module output channel Set Module to the number of the DIO module 176 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 280
264. l only see around 2 25volts on channels 7 and 8 with nothing connected The threshold for detecting a binary 1 vs a binary 0 is at 2 5 volts Therefore Channel 7 and 8 may not be at a 1 with nothing connected and it may not change its state when you ground it unless an external pull up resistor between channel 7 or 8 to 5 or 12 if connected device can handle it is added This will make these channels act more like the other channels This will affect any sensor with an open collector arrangement or a simple mechanical switch Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 265 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Channel cannot be used as a digital status input or tipping bucket input because of the divide by 8 circuit on the channel Digital filters The inputs can be low pass filtered before being applied to counters Shaft encoders are not filtered The digital filters are up down counters that count between 0 and a user defined threshold value Each input line s filter can have a different threshold value The input to a filter is one of the eight input lines the output feeds a 32 bit counter The filter counts up at each sample interval when its input is a one and down when its input is a zero The counter will not count up if it is at its upper threshold and it won t count down when its count is zero The output of the of the filter only changes state when the counter reaches zero or
265. l when the input data is a min or max point from the min max block When this is the case the data point will be collected regardless of the offset and interval property values and will be formatted with its own label offset and interval fields despite the value of num values This allows the timestamp of the incoming data to be determined at runtime and for it to be formatted with an accurate offset field Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 245 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 246 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com OUTPUT BLOCKS Binary Out BinOut Inputs BinIn Outputs BinOut Description This block is used to control one Digital I O Module channel s output switch The switch is either activated on or inactive off When activated the switch connects 100 ohms between the channel I O pin and ground To configure the block select the module number the channel number and whether or not the output logic should be inverted The reset power up state of the digital I O module is that all the output switches are off The output switch will also turn off anytime that recording is turned off Note Do not use channel or channel 8 for an output For more on how Digital I O Module channels can be used as outputs see the Appendix C for 1 O Modules Non inverted Output
266. led AVG on the Sensor Configuration screen Once the setup is completed go to the main tab and press START recording The SSP log file does not exist Press OK to create it Before leaving the setup tab a special log file must be created SSP log it is only special because this is where EZSetup places all sensors and this is where communications interfaces look to get TAG data Had this log file been created already this warning message would not have appeared Since the system has detected this log file does not exist it has asked to create one For this example setup click OK and create the default size SSP LOG file for now See Chapter 3 Log Files for more details on this Now that the SSP log file is created go to the MAIN tab and press START recording That s it The system is recording data and is going to transmit it on the GOES transmitter Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 105 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com GRAPHICAL SETUP TO COMPUTE DAILY MIN MAX For this example a 0 5 VDC level sensor with a 10ft range is used The last measured value daily minimum maximum time of minimum and time of maximum are displayed on the front LCD and logged It is a good idea to first draw out in a notebook the desired flow of data at first simply write down what data needs collected and if it is just logged or displayed or both Then look through the manu
267. lock but before any active blocks Display block In order for the Display block to enable front panel calibration for a sensor block the Display block must be connected directly to the sensor block Any passive non active block with more than 1 input e g XYFunct and Bool blocks in order to ensure this kind of block operates on data measured in the same frame and to avoid certain side effects that come from active blocks executing along split paths that rejoin like logging twice place the measure block AFTER the block having the multiple inputs See Appendix A for constraints of other blocks Block Properties We now know a lot about what is happening with our example setup but not everything We don t yet know for example the units the barometric pressure setup is going to return its data in or how often the solar radiation is going to be sampled or what log file either sensor will be saved in For this information we need to look at block properties To view the property window for a block click the icon for the block once and then select Edit Properties from the menu that appears Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Peel Oy wire Add gt Exit gt Select Ged gt Clear selection SelfTime Delete Delete Right Rename If we do this for the BP sensor block the following block properties window c
268. locks Active blocks always have a darker thicker border so they are easier to recognize Active blocks typically ignore the call to execute and push pulls from other active blocks This helps to ensure the system is as determinant as it can be i e this helps to ensure you can figure out who s going to execute and when In the example below the first Measure block signals the Const block to execute and then pushes the result into the second Measure block and the lower Log block L2 The data is logged to L2 but since Measure blocks are active and thus ignore pushes and pulls the data is not logged to L3 When the second Measure block executes it signals the first Measure block to execute and then pushes the result to L3 When the Measure block is signaled he simply returns the last known value for Const instead of measuring anew again since active blocks ignore push pull requests Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com XTerm COM1 115200 BEE File Transfer Set Clock Const Measurg Measure L3 _Cornect_ Upgrade Status IV Web Server I Auto Update Block Placement Some setup blocks require specific placements to work properly Here are some examples ComsTag block in order for a ComsTag block to be able to retrieve a new live value from an input sensor the ComsTag block must be placed after the sensor b
269. m For an interpolation table larger than a dozen entries or so it might be faster to generate it on a PC with Notepad for example and then upload it to the 9210 Files should be created in comma separate format such as the below example 10 22 11 55 12 481 20 999 15 0 40 01 The extension of the file should be changed to tbl before uploading 210 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Georgia Pacific Sampler GPSmpl Inputs DigIn Outputs DigOut Description This block samples the input digital at a user set interval When the input transitions from low 0 to high 1 increment sampler count and save the time of the event Then delay for n seconds user set and then force measurements of PH1 T1 PH2 and T2 PH1 PH2 T1 and T2 will be set up using standard blocks by tying a COMS TAG to the blocks that make the measurement and convert the value to the desired units When the measurements are complete append the following record to storage card filename csv in CSV format Date time edge detected function splcnt phl tl ph2 t2 Example 08 27 02 14 03 10 GPSmpl 1 125 5 62 25 19 9 73 28 81 Use 2 right digits for ph1 tl ph2 and t2 If the file does not exist because a new card has been inserted create it If there is a problem creating opening or writing to the file send a warning message t
270. m one 18 bit two s complement number and convert to base 10 000000010011010111 1239 310 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com ASCII COLUMN FORMAT The ASCII Column format is another means of encoding transmission data A message formatted with this method would look like this lt CRLF gt Meas1_Data 1 Meas2_Data 1 MeasN_Data 1 lt CRLF gt Meas1_Data 2 Meas2_Data 2 MeasN_Data 2 lt CRLF gt Meas1_Data n Meas2_Data n MeasN_Data n lt CRLF gt e lt CRLF gt is a carriage return line feed e Meas1_Data MeasN_Data are the data from the active measurements included in the transmission e All the data on one line are for the same time A space separates the values The newest data is sent first n is the number of values included in the transmission as set by the user The format for any value is ASCII with the right digits set by the user No decimal point is shown if the value is zero Add a minus sign in front of the value if the value is negative There are no leading zeroes If the value is missing two forward slashes are transmitted instead A typical message will appear as follows 41 79 60 99 12 99 12 43 20 8 08 7 1 195 2 41 79 60 99 12 99 12 43 1 20 8 08 7 1 195 2 41 79 60 99 12 99 12 43 2 20 8 08 7 1 195 2 Normally the DCP will be set up so all the sensors are collected at uniform times If t
271. mined to be invalid the unit will set the date to 1 1 1984 A unit that sets its date to 1984 needs to have its internal battery checked and most likely replaced To replace the battery in the Xlite remove the four screws holding the end panel the one with the DB9s to the extrusion Slide the end panel away from the extrusion taking with it the top panel and circuit boards Remove the top panel from the end panel by removing the two nuts holding the DB9 to the panel Use a small screwdriver to help lift the battery out of the holder Then slide the new battery into the holder Cleaning Instructions The 9210 can be cleaned using common mild window cleaning products Do not spray the cleaner directly on the 9210 Instead spray the cleaner on to a clean cloth and then wipe the case clean Never spray cleaner directly on the terminal strips or on the wiring Fuses There are no replaceable fuses in the 9210 The 9210 does use a number of self resetting fuses to help protect the unit from damage when lines coming from the 9210 are shorted You may optionally use a fuse in the cable you connect to provide the 9210 with power This fuse should be rated for at least two amps Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 131 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Appendix A Setup Blocks 132 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800
272. module test Cancel i Run External loop backs connected The system expects the following Null modem cable connecting COM2 and COM3 Null modem cable connecting COM4 to COMS see Header B Connection Table below SD Card read write test Make sure an SD card is inserted when running this test USB Drive read write test Make sure a USB thumb drive is inserted when running this test Power consumption test All test runs begin with this test The system puts itself into deep sleep for one minute so that the user can measure power consumption Note this test only runs for up to 5 consecutive iterations Xlite display button test The system prompts the user to press the three buttons on the Xlite display Xlite I O module test The system performs various tests on its I O modules This test suite requires the Xlite s I O modules be connected as follows Header A Connection Table Analog Connection signal Chl Connect to middle of 10 Kohm and 10Kohm divider from Vref to GND Ch2 1 M to chl Ch3 100 K to ch 4 Ch4 Connect to Vref Ch5 Connect to GND Ch6 100 K to ch 5 Ch7 Connect to ch 8 Ch8 Connect to GND Ch9 1 Mtoch 10 Ch10 Connect to VEX Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Header B Connection Table Digital Connection signal In
273. mpiled and linked using eVC 4 0 whenever you upgrade to a new version of 9210B firmware This must be done with the version of the SDK that matches the version of 9210B firmware 282 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com OVERVIEW 9210 speech files are binary data files containing audio data in Rockwell 4 bit ADPCM 7200hz mono format These files are headerless meaning they have no information describing the content of the file just sample data Users can create these files using one of several aftermarket programs for the PC One such program is Vox Studio by Xentec This program allows the user to record speech using a microphone connected to the PC and save it in the appropriate format Rockwell 4 bit ADPCM 7200hz mono The file can then be loaded into the 9210 using Xterm into the corresponding language subdirectory under flash disk speech e g English Spanish etc and used by selecting it in a ComsTag dialog just as you would any other speech file Note You will need to save the file with a unique name and with the extension vox so that the 9210 will display the file for selection The program Vox Studio by Xentec is available for download at http www xentec be download download html Note the unregistered version of this program limits the length of files to 5 seconds As of this writing a fee of 399 is required to
274. mpt The P option enables a partial upgrade for situations where just some of the files are being changed Step 2 the deletion of files is skipped This option can be used to download a new version of Remote or to add some new SLL files or BAS files VER Displays the build date Remote was created YMODEM file list ZIP With no options specified the YMODEM command will receive files using the Ymodem protocol and store them on the 9210 If the file being transferred has a ZIP extension then it will be automatically expanded and the contents stored in the current folder typically Flash Disk The command may be used to send files using the Y modem 294 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com protocol by supplying a file name or a file list A file list is simply a list of files to send delimited by spaces use quotes around files containing spaces ZIP may be used when sending files to cause the files to be compressed in to a ZIP archive before being transferred The name of the archive will be the same as the first file in the list with a ZIP extension A transfer can be aborted by pressing ESC 3 times The command prompt supports a 10 line command recall capability invoked by pressing UP ARROW to scroll back through old commands or DOWN ARROW to scroll to newer commands Most all c
275. n Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Features Eight digital I O lines CMOS level inputs Six bi directional two input only Up to eight counters frequency inputs with programmable alarm Seven that count leading edge trailing edge or both edges of input pulse One channel of frequency input up to 8 kHz Up to three quadrature shaft encoder inputs requires two inputs per sensor with programmable alarm Two switchable threshold inputs compatible with R M Young wind sensor mo Inputs ae Interval Microseconds Pull up voltage 0 15 Volts Resistance 80 125 2 Current 70 mA Inputs When programmed as an input each line can act as a digitally filtered counter clock or a shaft encoder input do not use channels 1 2 for a shaft encoder Shaft encoders require two input lines hence users can have up to three shaft encoders eight counters or a combination of the two When a run command is received sampling of the inputs starts The Digital I O reads the inputs when it gets a run command and uses these values for the initial state of the filter Input states are OV binary 0 and gt 2 5V binary 1 Channels 7 and 8 are different from channels 1 6 because of their ability to work with low level signals 150 mv threshold high sensitivity or high level signals 2 5V threshold low sensitivity Channels 1 6 have a 100K pull up to 5 through a diode Channels 7 and 8 have a Imeg Ohm pull up to 2 5V As a result you wil
276. n re add it making sure to set the com port setting to COM6 in the process Event Driven Sensors The vast majority of sensors measure when told to i e according to the measurement schedule you define The exception to this rule occurs when using a sensor with an Event option checked like BinIn Every time an Event occurs the entire set of sensors defined under the measurement schedule will be measured For example if you had an EZSetup measurement schedule with the BinIn block Event checked and an sdi 12 sensor every time the BinIn detected a change of state the SDI 12 sensor would also be measured Graphical Setup The Graphical Setup branch of the Setup tab is used to manage the portion of the system s setup that has been defined by interconnecting graphical blocks where each block represents a function such as sensor measure or log This method of setup should be used to define sensors Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com that can t be setup using the EZSetup Measurements This would include sensors that need to have a polynomial interpolation table or any other special processing done to them See the section in Appendix A that covers Processing blocks to see all the available processing See Chapter 4 Setup Diagrams for detailed descriptions of how to set up sensors in this way Main Setup Sensors Data Log Status
277. name of the station If there are more than 24 lines of output the display will pause with a More prompt until enter is pressed to continue or ESC to abort The C option will cause the output to be continuous without pause until the end is reached or ESC is pressed The alarm status of each tag is displayed More than one alarm condition may be displayed The following codes are common OK not in alarm A in alert transmitting high limit exceeded L low limit exceeded D rate of change exceeded SHUTDOWN Causes the 9210 app to exit so that Xpert exe DLLs and SLLs may be upgraded a SMS cmd The SMS command allows commands normally issued via SMS text message to be issued at the command line If cmd is omitted the current state of the GPRS modem is displayed example 292 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Flash Disk gt SMS GPR2 Standby On next task SelfTimed at 17 30 05 NextST 17 30 05 LastAlarm 16 39 15 LastST 17 15 05 SMS2 Standby Otherwise cmd is processed as follows STAP url port Perform a shoulder tap by opening a GPRS connection to either the default command server or the specified url and port REDIR url port Open a GPRS connection to the default redirector server or the specified url and port SETPIP url Set the PrimaryIP for GPRS connec
278. nce or thermistor resistance measurements from an Analog I O Module One analog input can be setup with each Analog block Reading the information on the Analog I O Module in Appendix C I O Modules will help with the understanding of this powerful block 140 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Analog Input Properties AIO Mod F 7 Meas Type Chan 3 7 Filter Notch Settling Time H o o ATTA HATHA Exc Chan Units Exc Volts Offset Differential Slope Cancel The block scales the outputs according to the values of Slope and Offset using the equation output reading slope offset The user can change the units for all the outputs by changing the Units field to the desired value The block supports calibration from the Sensors tab and the Xlite front panel display For the calibration the user will enter the current value sensor The system will then adjust the offset so the desired value is obtained To setup a sensor with the Analog block first select the Analog I O module to use Then select what is to be measured under Measurement Voltage This is for performing standard analog voltage measurements similar to what could be done with the Voltmeter block It requires one input channel for a single ended measurement or an input channel pair for a differential measurement Current 4 20mA This is for making c
279. nd CH9 Input channel 9 9 or 10 CANNOT BE USED FOR EXCITATION CH10 Input channel 10 9 or 10 CANNOT BE USED FOR EXCITATION AGND Analog Ground VEX PWR IN GND PWR IN 12 input numbers in parenthesis are for differential measurements Features Ten inputs configurable as 10 single ended channels or 5 differential inputs or a combination of single ended and differential inputs 16 bit resolution Slow mode Gain 1 Maximum Sample rate All channels once per second fast mode Continuous self calibration One excitation voltage 2 5V 262 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Multiple sampling rates and digital filtering Capability to internally read the battery voltage External Bridge Completion resistor needed for resistance measurements External Sense resistor needed for current measurements Min Typ Max Units S O Analog Input Measurement Range Single ended Measurement Range Differential Voltage Input Range Resolution 0 5 16 Absolute Error 7 X AES 40 to 60 C 0 1 FS Ratiometric Error Note Each of the differential input terminals must stay within the voltage input range The differential range is with respect to the other member of the differential pair Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 263 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com
280. nedueaigestovsuunevnesnesyperseundiedbees 8 Standard Me mis c ieena e n eE e ra O ES EEE ESEE A O EE O rE AE EEE ESE N 8 Common Optional Items s areeiro See eao on EEE A E EEAS E O EEE EEE EEEE EE 8 Other Optional Items e eenei toe A a ORS E s Sab ASEE EEEE SE EE S E EEEE 8 INITIAL CHECKOUT oei e aeea eeaeee t eoa EO EEEE Ta PRET E NEES ENEE aE EEAO ENEE EAE EE 9 Powering Up es oreinen ih E eE a EEO ae E A OR Reo E ASEO Ses E E EE 9 Verify Xlite Display Works c is iscsi reorit reee eene ao oS EEEE Eee EEO Ee AOE O AEE EESO E E E E ii 9 Adjust the Contrast Optional sssrinin eines onroro En ronse EEEE eo ORSR EEE OEE SE EES AE E aSK ees 9 Verify X Term Works oa eseese eooo ee EE EEEE EO EE AS OEE AEE AES E E 9 Verify VO Modules Work einni rore ea Rakesh teeta cede ena E ra S hk ASEO EEE E OE EE EES AO E OES ee SS 9 Optional SEL LAD taryecverssscsteosesvsseesdpsepescehieskvacascevcesieasasadonsevscusebs sags ES Ko E Ee E aS ORE NS RE EEEE i E DS ESEN 10 PREPARING FOR SET UP is scisecesccetesestssepcupssesnveatvavasvecuceueestestess evecncvdtvivesiguvseheevagetodteivevnessevegn de seventonsevedsdsccdstauedesevnees 14 Amalyze the SY Stem NE eE EES EEE EE ETE EEEE E 14 Choosing the Right a d 0X0 ee AEAEE ERE EEEE AE EEE EE E 14 Howto Selecta Completion Resistor mheir ane aS SS cosas Ea ESEE a N IRE OES ReneS PEN EEB EE SRS 15 Usmg SDIr I2Z overt the RS 48S Port r a e o erre as ee eeno E OE e I AREE EEEa E EE I EPEE ES ESES 16 Re directin gs SDI to COMA a cc
281. nefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 171 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SENR Net Radiometer Sensors NetRad Inputs lt none gt Outputs NetRad ShortRad Up ShortRadDown LongRad Up LongRadDown Wiring Three sensor types are supported and the wiring differs for each Kipp amp Zonen NR Lite 2 For single ended operation connect the sensor s V to any analog input channel CH1 CH10 and V to AGND For differential operation connect V and V to an adjacent input channel pair e g 1 and 2 3 and 4 etc and check the Differential checkbox Kipp amp Zonen CNR 2 For single ended operation connect the two V signals to any two input channels CH1 CH10 and V to AGND For differential operation connect NetWaveShort V and V to an adjacent input channel pair and connect NetWaveLong V and V to an adjacent input channel pair an adjacent input channel pair starts with an odd channel e g 1 and 2 3 and 4 etc Be sure to check the Differential checkbox Kipp amp Zonen CNR 4 For single ended operation connect the four V signals to any four analog input channels CH1 CH10 and V to AGND For differential operation connect Pyrano and Pyrgeo pairs to adjacent input channel pairs an adjacent input channel pair starts with an odd channel e g 1 and 2 3 and 4 etc Be sure to check the Differential checkbox Connect the V and V the
282. nfiguration dialog the dialog allows the user to select the output parameter to use see Parameter in the dialog below Sensor Configuration Name ws fe Sensor RMYoung 7 More Cancel M v Log C Avg Dips sav DIST Oea Dee com rac Opm rt vigits 2 f value UNKNO modue Slope ft chame T Offset boo A Parameter Speed_ v When you want to measure more than one output of a multi output sensor you must set up a separate sensor entry for each output to be measured When each output is set up properly the system makes only one measurement of the sensor as opposed to a separate measurement for each output This is especially important for sensors that take a significant time to measure imagine taking 5 separate measurements to obtain 5 parameters from an SDI sensor that takes 30 seconds to measure In addition for some sensors it may be important to ensure parameters were measured at the same time Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com To ensure only one measurement is made for all outputs of a single sensor the I O device configuration for each sensor entry representing a separate output must be the same The I O device configuration consists of different parameters for different types of sensors If the sensor reads an analog input then the analog input s module and channel mus
283. ng the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Satlink Status Satlink keeps a detailed status of its present and past operations The 9210 will display this information in the Satlink Status dialog Satlink Status DISABLED Tx succeeded 0 Tx failed 0 Oo Tx failed due to GPS 0 iy Start GPs Clear Reset Fs Close The Refresh button is used to update the status data displayed The Start GPS button is used to manually start a GPS Sync session note Satlink typically manages GPS sync for you The Clear button is used to command Satlink to clear its status counters and error messages The Reset FS button is used to command Satlink to reset its failsafe Press Close to close the dialog Self test The Self test branch in the Setup tab is used to manage the self test routines built into the software Self test runs at startup or when the RUN button is pressed in the dialog When it runs a file named test_results txt is created as a place to preserve the test results As long as this file exists in flash disk the self test routines will run each time the system starts and will continue running until stopped by the user The self test routines prompt for user input or acknowledgment at several points in the test If there is no user input the tests will repeat automatically At the end of each test cycle the system prompts to repeat the tests or exi
284. ng the Send button makes test transmissions Before pressing Send Satlink must be set up with valid information on both the Satlink dialog and Satlink random dialogs Test transmissions should only be made on special test channels or with the Satlink connected to a dummy load Otherwise the transmission may interfere with other stations The test message that will be sent is displayed in the text box to the left of the send button Change the message by selecting custom and then changing the message using the control If the setup has been entered this dialog will display the Current Message that would be transmitted if a random message were sent Use the control next to Group to select which random group to see formatted Along with the message the dialog displays the number of characters in the message and the amount of time that would be needed to make the transmissions These will be useful things to examine to help make sure the set up is correct To see the detailed status from the transmitter press the Status button Pressing the Reset button will send a command to the Satlink to reset reboot This might be necessary in the rare case where the Satlink has a problem that can only be cleared by reset but no one is at the station to cycle power Random Test Send Message Custom C DEFGHIKLMNOP QRS TY oy Current Message The setup does not define a message for the Group 2 Chars O Secs 0 0 Bringi
285. ng time has arrived Measure Properties E Time loo 00 00 sel Interval po 15 00 E Cancel al 212 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Min Max Minimum Maximum MinMax Inputs Input Outputs Min MinTime Number of seconds into current day Count Max MaxTime Number of seconds into current day RMaxVal Description This block outputs its data set at the time and interval defined by the user The block examines the data received prior to its scheduled interval in order to determine its outputs the maximum value received the minimum value received the time of maximum value the time of minimum value and the number of values received The number from the time outputs is determined by the number of seconds since 00 00 00 of the current day e g a time of 3600 would be 01 00 00 The block also outputs RMaxVal which is the value of an optional related item at the time the maximum occurred This related item is a point in the setup tagged by a ComsTag block The name of the tag must appear in the Rel max val field of the properties dialog If no tag appears in this field or if the name is invalid then RMaxVal is output as 0 This block is commonly placed after a Measure block that is sampling a sensor on a schedule or directly after a sensor block setup in Event mode The Start Time is an
286. nge since the last measured value the software concludes that the gauge has emptied and adds 5 slope to the sensor offset The value reported by the block is always reading offset Note You must get data from the CapRain block every 10 to 15 minutes so it can track the emptying The maximum rain rate that can be handled by measurements every 10 minutes is 12 inches hour and the maximum rate handled by measurements every 15 minutes is 8 inches hour The block supports the calibration to a use entered current value When the calibration function is run the system prompts for the current level It then uses the current level and the current reading to automatically set the offset The calibration function should not be done when the system is emptying the gauge or while the gauge output is changing Enter the slope in the units that you desire The slope for inches would be 0 5 2 5inches Svolts The slope for mm would be 10 50mm 5 The offset should normally be O for a new site with an empty gauge As explained above the offset can also be computed to force the gauge to a specific value The units should be set to in or mm as determined by the slope 150 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com h CapRain Properties Analog I O Module Input Channel Cancel Slope n Offset bo Units fin B Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Dat
287. nsor Name Unknown Sn Precision right digits 2 Cancel At the top of this properties window is a drop down menu with all the log files that have been created in the system including an entry that will create a new log This drop down box identifies the log to which this setup block will store data The default Sensor Name can be changed to identify the source of data in the log this name is used in the Log tab as well as in imported data files Changing this label is especially important in cases where there is more than one of the same types of sensor The Precision indicates to what precision the data wind speed in our example will be logged The value specified should be less than or equal to the sensor s actual precision Changing the properties of the other measure block and log block in our setup for sampling and logging wind direction would be done similarly Full descriptions of purposes and settings for each setup block can be found in Appendix A Setup Blocks Changing the Block Label The label displayed underneath the block in the setup diagram can be changed by selecting Rename from the pop up menu that appears after clicking the setup block Use this to help identify specific blocks in the setup In addition this name appears in SETUP and Sensors F zoom Dg wire F Add Exit S ts Edit _Edit Properties Insert Select Input gt Select Output gt Clear selection
288. nt Measurement Example Example Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 271 ADD ON ANALOG I O MODULE 8080 0007 The 8080 0007 Analog I O Module ADC can be added onto the 9210 to expand its analog input capability The module has ten analog I O lines an excitation voltage switched battery output and built in transient protection Features Ten inputs configurable as 10 single ended channels or 5 differential inputs or a combination of single ended and differential inputs 16 bit resolution Input gain settings for increased resolution for low level signals Single Ended 0 5 V 78 mV 19 5 mV ADC Block Voltage HiGain x128 Differential 2 5V 78 mV 19 5 mV ADC Block Voltage HiGain x128 Continuous self calibration One switched battery sensor power output Industrial temperature range operation 40 to 60 C Multiple sampling rates and digital filtering Viewing the card from the front the plug assignments are as follows E a ae 10 G Vre SwBa l TAR 5 5 ACE 9 9 f 10 G Ground SwBat switched battery out 12V nominal Vref 2 5V excitation voltage only on when the module is measuring Differential channel pairs are 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 The higher voltage line goes to the measured channel Transient Protection Installation Note The two rear 6 32 mounting screws provide the earth
289. o bits to change in binary but only one in Greycode Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 147 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Decimal Binary Greycode 0 000 000 1 001 001 2 010 011 3 011 010 4 100 110 5 101 111 6 110 101 7 111 100 The Bits value defines how many bits to convert from six to eight If less than eight bits are being converted then set LSB Channel to the channel of the least significant bit 148 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Ke Bridge Resistance Bridge Inputs lt none gt Outputs Output Wiring Wire to the 9210 as shown below NOTE DO NOT USE CHANNELS ABOVE 8 FOR EXCITATION wast e YREF EXCITATION CHANNEL Even Channel Pair Selected odd Channel Selected Channel 1 AGND Description This block reads a bridge type resistance sensor These sensors typically require an excitation of 2 to 5 volts and a full scale output of 10 to 100 mV To make this measurement the 9210 makes a single ended measurement of the reference voltage and a differential measurement of the input voltage The equation applied to the measured voltages is as follows Output Slope Vi Vx Offset The user set properties of the Bridge block are shown below Note that the input is a differential me
290. o the report warning If the digital input stays at high 1 for more than 5 minutes write a warning message to the report warning Init splcnt to O when recording is turned on GPSmpl Properties Interval foo o0 05 fel Cancel Delay Ss bo fel File ePlogcsv e Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com ha Measure Measure Inputs Input Outputs Output Description Measure blocks are used to create a sampling schedule for sensor blocks The only time a Measure block or similar is not needed after a sensor block is when the sensor block is set to output data based on a specified change on the sensor input Event mode Enter values for the Time and the Interval The interval is how often the data from the sensor should be sampled The time is a synchronization time not an start time In the example below the sensor will be sampled every fifteen minutes synchronized to the hour If Time had been set to 00 01 00 the sensor would be sampled every fifteen minutes with a one minute offset if sampling was started at 4 00pm samples would be taken at 4 16p 4 31p 4 46p etc Sensor blocks configured in Event mode do not need to be hooked up to Measure blocks but they can be if desired Doing so will result in data being generated either because of a specified change in the sensor input or because the next scheduled sampli
291. ocks by way of Record ID Hence if there are two LogRec blocks in the system with the same name you will see two entries for the name in the drop down list but selecting either one adds the field to both records The Sequence property defines the order in which this field will appear in the logged record When you press the change button the system initializes the change dialog with the next available sequence number for the current Record ID Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 231 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Right Digits specifies the number of places to the right of the decimal point the value logged should have Note that this applies only to numeric data If the value being logged is non numeric a string this property is ignored The Format string property defines what the formatted output will look like in the logged record The drop down list provides several different formats to choose from however you can specify a custom format string by clicking on the change button next to the list The format string combines formatting tags with literal characters Formatting tags are always of the format lt tag name gt The format tags currently supported are lt name gt lt val gt lt units gt and lt qual gt Whenever the name tag is encountered during formatting it is replaced with the name of the fi
292. odic self calibration procedure involving an onboard heating element HFPO1 For single ended operation connect the sensor s V to any analog input channel CH1 CH10 and V to AGND For differential operation connect V and V to an adjacent input channel pair e g 1 and 2 3 and 4 etc and check the Differential checkbox HFPOISC Connect as shown in the diagram below Battery Htr DIO Chan Htr AIO Chan Battery Heater Compl Res 10 ohm typ AIO Chan Sensor AIO Chan or AGND Description The HeatFlux block is used to measure heat flux via a Hukesflux HFPO1 or HFPOISC heat flux sensor The following dialog is used to configure the sensor for measurement 164 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Model HFPOLSC v k AIO Module f 7 Cancel AIO Channel 3 7 Differential Sensitivity 1 0 a Select the type of heat flux sensor in Model and specify the analog I O module and channel in AIO Module and AIO Channel Check the Differential checkbox if the sensor has been wired for differential measurement Enter Sensitivity from the manufacturer s cal sheet Calibration Press the Cal button to configure model HFP01SC for calibration HeatFlux Calibrate Interval h J6 Duration m 3 Eo B Compl Resistor fe Cancel Rself Htr DIO Mod Chan a
293. of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Appendix E Software Development Kit SDK OVERVIEW The 9210B Software Development Kit SDK enables developers to create Sutron Link Libraries SLLs that extend 9210B s functionality according to the developer s unique needs The SDK is most often used to create libraries containing custom setup blocks property pages tabs on the main screen and Setup entries branches in the Setup tab tree but may also be used to create libraries that manipulate ports files peripherals and any other entity accessible through standard Windows CE operating system API calls The SDK may be downloaded from Sutron s website at http www sutron com downloads XpertSDK htm The SDK is intended for use with Microsoft eMbedded Visual C 4 0 eVC which at the time of this writing is available at no charge from Microsoft This toolset contains the compiler linker and operating system libraries necessary to develop for the 9210B platform It may be ordered on CD from Microsoft in which case a modest shipping charge applies or downloaded from http www microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilyID 1dacdb3d 50d1 41b2 a107 fa75ae960856 amp displaylang en Sutron assumes that any developer using the tools is already knowledgeable concerning C and basic Windows programming Please note that custom SLLs must be rebuilt co
294. of these procedures and then displays the name of the first with the prompt press to Cal Pressing SELECT will start the calibration procedure pressing lt and gt will select other calibration procedures Calibration generally involves entering a value into the 9210 To do this use the lt and gt keys to enter a value As an example to calibrate a shaft encoder the system will prompt 000012 34 Edit Cur Lv An underline cursor will be under the To change the value use the gt or lt keys to move the cursor to the digit to change Press SELECT and the cursor will change to a block Then use the gt and lt keys to change the digit When finished changing the digit press again The cursor will automatically go to the next digit Repeat the process to change other digits Note sign can be changed but not the decimal point After the value is correct move the cursor past the end of the number The system will then prompt Cur Lvl 000010 85 lt OK gt lt CANCEL gt Notice that the flashing cursor will be in the OK Use the lt or gt to change the cursor to select either OK or CANCEL and press SELECT To exit the calibration routines use the lt and gt keys to select Exit Cal Exit and press SELECT Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com The tipping bucket calibration includ
295. offset time For example if the start time below was set to 00 05 00 a measurement would happen at 20 00 35 00 50 00 05 00 etc MinMax Properties Start Time 00 00 00 kl Interval 00 15 00 ae Rel max val wor i Cancel Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 213 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Moving Average MovingAverage Inputs Input Outputs Average STD Description This block computes a moving average for the input value with each new sample This differs from the normal Average block that computes the average only at the end of the scheduled interval It can be used to compute an average speed over a two minute window with the average being updated every second The screen that follows shows a 10 minute average with the samples being collected every 30 seconds and output of the average every 30 seconds When the block runs the output data will be flagged as bad until 1 2 of the required number of samples have been collected The checkbox labeled circular input can be used on wind direction sensors where the output is 0 360 degrees With this box checked the average will properly compute the average direction even when the sensor changes through 360 degrees The Schedule fields are used to control when the software reinitializes its computations The process of re initialization eliminates computational errors that would other
296. omes up revealing the pressure units to be sampled the SDI address the averaging time and the temperature options F zoom Dg wire F Add gt Exit SDI Address P Averaging Time s f E Enable Temperature Celsius Fahrenheit Viewing the property windows for the other blocks in the setup can be viewed in a similar manner A full description of the properties for each block can be found in Appendix A Setup Blocks Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com CREATING A NEW GRAPHICAL SETUP Now that we have seen an example graphical setup let s see what it take to create a small one from scratch From the Setup tab highlight New and select Edit This will bring up a blank setup screen F zoom Dg wire F Add gt Exit Let s say we ve just physically hooked up two sensors to our 9210 and want to add them to this new setup One is an RM Young wind sensor from which we want to log wind speed and wind direction and the other is a submersible pressure sensor from which we want to measure water depth Adding a Sensor Using the Wizard Click the Add button to add the first sensor The following screen will come up F zoom Dg wire F Add Exit Select Category This screen shows the different types of setup blocks Now click Input to bring up a list of the available
297. ommands support the Y MODEM ZIP and C options Unless stated otherwise the default filename for the output of a command will be station_command txt for a YMODEM transfer or station_command zip for a ZIP transfer When a command displays more than 24 lines of output the More prompt will be displayed The user may press space to display another 24 lines enter to display the next line or C to start displaying lines continuously without break The more mode of output may be re enabled at any time by pressing M Output may be terminated by pressing ESC The REPORT command defines message filters in Remote and the Xpert app Reporting requires extra processing that will slow operation of the unit The options can be combined For example to monitor COM2 for SSP messages watch I2C messages and observe debug messages try the command Flash Disk gt report SSP2 I2C Debug Reporting enabled and filter is set Here s a summary of what types of messages each option will display None or Off No messages SSP SSP messages from any communication port and error warning and status messages SSP messages are decoded SSP messages over TCP IP are not displayed SSPn SSP messages from the specified communication port i e SSP4 would show messages to from COM4 If SSPO is specified then SSP messages transported by TCP IP are displayed Low Error messages Medium Error and warning messages
298. on is named sitel23 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 299 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com STATUS Command Example Flash Disk gt STATUS COM1 115200 3 0 3 10 0 1 0 bob 1 is logged in Cmd Flash Disk gt status SSP STATS RX 959 TOTAL 959 BAD 0 TX 574 BAD 0 FAIL 0 RADIO2 9600 10 0 3 30 0 0 1 Unknown 0 is logged out Cmd SSP STATS RX 2027 TOTAL 2027 BAD 0 TX 1996 BAD 0 FAIL 0 VOICE3 115200 3 0 3 10 0 1 0 Unknown 0 is logged out Cmd UPGRADE Command Example Flash Disk gt UPGRADE Are you sure Yes Stopping The Xpert application has been shutdown Ready to receive YModem file s press ESC to abort ymodem send the new file or files in a zip archive Upgrade complete Restarting Xpert YMODEM Command Example The following sends a file from your PC and place it on the Xpert using the Ymodem protocol Flash Disk gt YMODEM Ready to receive YModem file s press ESC to abort The following gets the files PUMP BAS and FLUME BAS from the 9210 and transfer them to your PC using the Ymodem protocol Flash Disk gt YMODEM PUMP BAS FLUME BAS Ready to send YModem file s press ESC to abort Get all setup files from the station ZIP them up and transfer them to your PC using the Ymodem protocol Flash Disk gt YMODEM SSF ZIP Ready to send YModem file s press ESC to abort
299. on to transfer the files to the Xlite Press OK to start the transfer and wait for the transfer to complete 116 When finished reboot the Xlite 117 118 119 NOTE Xpert app now contains some additional checks to ensure the correct version of ssl dll is loaded If the app detects an incorrect version it WILL NOT load that sll dll If this happens a warning message is shown on boot up and a warning message will be placed into the system log indicating what version was found and what is expected If this happens simply copy the correct version of dll sll onto the flash disk and re boot the unit 260 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Appendix C I O Modules XLITE ANALOG MODULE A TERMINAL STRIP The connections for the A terminal strip are as follows AGND Analog Ground CHI Input channel 1 1 or 2 CH2 Input channel 2 1 or 2 AGND Analog Ground CH3 Input channel 3 3 or 4 CH4 Input channel 4 3 or 4 VREF 2 5V Reference voltage AGND Analog Ground CH5 Input channel 5 5 or 6 CH6 Input channel 6 5 or 6 AGND Analog Ground VREF 2 5V Reference voltage only on during analog measurements performed by the built in AIO module AIO1 AGND Analog Ground CH7 Input channel 7 7 or 8 CH8 Input channel 8 7 or 9 AGND Analog Grou
300. onal field it will be included only if Append Lat Long is selected for random transmissions LAT LONG can be decoded into D M S format by converting the binary values to decimal and applying the following formula Degrees latitude 64 1 byte AND 63 2 Byte AND 63 180 Minutes latitude 3 byte AND 63 Seconds latitude 4 byte AND 63 Degrees longitude 64 5 byte AND 63 6 Byte AND 63 180 Minutes longitude 7 byte AND 63 Seconds longitude 8 byte AND 63 For example BAAODAXe would be decoded as Lat N 390 1 15 79 Long W 770 24 37 19 COUNTER COUNTER is a 2 byte binary encoded number which indicates the transmission number and increments after every transmission The number will be between 0 and 4095 BATTLOAD BATTLOAD is a 1 byte binary encoded number representing the battery voltage of Satlink Logger under load during the last transmission If the battery reading is zero then that is the first transmission since bootup The range of the number will be 32 to 31 and can be converted to volts by multiplying by 0 234 and adding 10 6 allowing a range of 3 1 to 18 1 volts EXAMPLE Here is a message with three active measurements each one is set to include two readings The random buffer contains the string EXT This string was given by an external device through the RS 232 port 2 Gt Gs Sx Sr i iBAAODAXe GI Battery Voltage Random Counter O Lat L
301. ong optional ee Temp 2 SSS SSS SSS Temp 1 ee a a a E Precip 2 Se ERS Precip 1 oc i lc i lc i anon lms Stage 2 a a am Stage 1 Poa ee a Delta Time 304 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 305 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SCHEDULED PSEUDOBINARY DATA FORMAT 306 The format of the transmission data is identical to the Random Pseudobinary format except that the message starts with a BLOCK IDENTIFIER B the GROUP ID is a 1 and there is no count The transmission includes data from any measurement that has the Scheduled Transmissions Include box checked The number of values to send in each message is set by the num values to Tx field lt GROUP ID gt lt OFFSET gt lt MEASUREMENT1 DATA 1 gt lt MEASUREMENT1 DATA 2 gt lt MEASUREMENT1 DATA N gt lt MEASUREMENT2 DATA 1 gt lt MEASUREMENT2 DATA 2 gt lt MEASUREMENT2 DATA N gt lt MEASUREMENT3 DATA 1 gt lt MEASUREMENT3 DATA 2 gt lt MEASUREMENT3 DATA N gt lt BATTLOAD gt lt LAT LONG gt BLOCK BLOCK IDENTIFIER is always sent as B to indicate the start IDENTIFIER of a binary data group GROUP ID GROUP ID is always sent as 1 to indicate the scheduled group OFFSET Each record is prefixed with an lt OFFSET gt
302. ontrol lines are used but the options are the same Data Modem Settings Ring to Ans Phone 1 Phone 2 Phone 3 This is the Data Modem settings screen When a alert occurs each phone number is tried in sequence starting with Phone 1 until an acknowledgement occurs Or until the Redials has been attempted on each number The redial delay causes a pause between each redial attempt The Data Modem connection support two types of alarm messages If a PC Base station is detected an SSP alarm is sent otherwise a simple text message is sent and a prompt is made asking for the alarm to be acknowledged Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com EzSetup Measurements EZSetup is used to define simple sensors based on a measurement interval Sensors configured here may be measured or averaged on a regular interval have a simple slope and offset applied displayed on the front panel transmitted via Satlink or modem and be used to identify alarm conditions It is possible to configure an entire station using only this section for sensors if no special processing is needed Measurements that are set up in EzSetup work in parallel with measurements set up in the Graphical Setup Hence one popular practice is to set up simple sensor configurations in EzSetup and more complicated sensor configurations in Graphical Setup Main
303. or Note you can increase the accuracy minimize errors introduced through the leads and connections by using a 100 or 120 ohm completion resistor However if you do you will need to enter the correct resistor value in the resistance field available by deselecting the 8080 0003 block NOTE An alternative measurement technique would be to use a higher value resistor and make a VOLTAGE SINGLE ENDED type measurement instead of 4 20mA which is how the measurement was performed with the 8210 data logger Just convert the resulting voltage into a measurement of the current output and take into account the low and high end of the sensor output E G A 4 20 mA sensor using a 249 9 ohm resistor would develop about a to 5 V dc output Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 137 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SW D 12 4 20 mA Sensor 420 CHANNEL 20 or 100 Ohm Resistor AGND DC Resistance Resistance measurements always require excitation on and a selection for the excitation voltage The excitation channel may be different from the measurement channel for three and four wire measurements You may need to use a precision completion resistor connected as shown Note you can increase the accuracy by using a 100 or 120 ohm completion resistor However if you do you will need to multiply the result by 5 for 100 ohm or 6 for 120 ohm to compensate for the increase
304. or another The system must not have more than one type of module with the same number I E If a system has two analog modules both modules cannot be module number one but it is possible to have a digital module one and an analog module one Reseting I O Modules Pressing Reset will reboot the I2C bus it is similar to disconnecting and reconnecting the modules This is only needed if a module that is connected does not show up in this list LAN Settings The LAN Settings branch of the Setup tab enables you to control power to the LAN ethernet To display the LAN Settings dialog select the LAN Settings entry and press the Edit button The following dialog displays Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Current State fon Auto can save some power over On when LAN cable is normally unplugged LAN is in use by ser Settings View Config The Lan Configuration buttons On Auto and Off determine the state of the LAN when the 9210 first boots On causes the LAN to be turned on at boot The LAN stays on until explicitly turned off Auto turns the LAN on only when something is connected to the ethernet jack Auto is typically only set when you plan to connect your PC or laptop directly to the 9210 which requires a special ethernet crossover cable see below When Auto is selected and a device is not connected to
305. ottom of the screen Using subroutines see Call and Return commands it s possible to create a single phrase that can be spoken in multiple languages The key is to select the language with the Language command and then Call the bi multi lingual phrase For this to work the vox speech files must be given the same name across the languages Return Returns from a subroutine by branching back after the last Call command If the Call command wasn t used then control passes to the Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com beginning of the phrase Pause Delay the speech command for the specified number of seconds resolution down to milliseconds SpeakAlarms Cause all sensors with an attached ComTag to have their prefix phrase value suffix phrase and alarm status spoken SpeakAllTags Cause all sensors with an attached ComTag to have their prefix phrase value suffix phrase and alarm status spoken SpeakData Speak just the last measured data value of the specified sensor SpeakLiveData Force measurement and speaks just the live data value of the specified sensor SpeakLiveTag Force measurement and speaks the prefix phrase live value suffix phrase and alarm status of the specified sensor SpeakManual Speak the last data entered by the user with the InputManual command or 0 if no value has been entered SpeakNum Speak the specified number
306. output reading slope offset The user can change the units for all the outputs by changing the Units field to the desired value The block supports calibration from the Sensors page and the Xlite front panel display For the calibration the user will enter the current value sensor The system will then adjust the offset so the desired value is obtained SDI Properties Address eo H l Command Mo ps Slope i LJ Offset bc as Units fal Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 183 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SDI AquaTrak SDIAqua Inputs lt none gt Outputs Average Std Outliers Cals Quality Wiring SDI 12 port Description The SDI Aquatrak block is designed to operate with the Aquatrak 4100 series controller and sensor heads for measuring water level The Aquatrak sensor must be configured separately to specify the measurement modes and desired averaging algorithm and number of samples to take The typical configuration uses the NOS DQAP algorithm measuring 181 samples Once configured the 9210 will make measurements using the standard SDI M command or C command if Concurrent is selected Testing has shown that the Aquatrak controller tends to ignore the retries that come very quickly as part of the normal SDI 12 retry process Hence this block performs an additional retry after the user specified Retry Delay This delay sho
307. ovide a slope and offset The ADC block provides all the properties needed to make this measurement For the most accurate analog reading use the ADC block s Double Volts option and multiply the given slope by 5 Double Volts will always return a ratio of REF reading meaning it will return a value between 0 and 1 since the slope for a 5 REF assumes an output of 0 5 Multiplying the given slope by 5 will return the correctly scaled value Using Double Volts will Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com require 2 analog channels If the system is running low on analog inputs the Voltage reading could be used if you multiply the given slope by 2 since Vref is 2 5 What if you don t see a block that appears to do what you need Starting with version 2 2 the 9210 supports Xpert Basic a programming language with which you can write your own blocks and other custom processing Refer to the Xpert Basic Users Manual for more details How to Select a Completion Resistor Measurements that require a completion resistor use the resistor as a reference for the reading The accuracy needed percent accuracy Temperature Coefficient TC will depend on the accuracy needed for the specific sensor being measured Generally an accuracy of 4 times of the sensors accuracy should be used I E If the sensor were only accurate to 4 a 1 completion resis
308. p www sutron com si Binary Input All Channels BinInAllChan Inputs lt none gt Outputs DIOData Wiring Signal wire to all input channels defined in Bit Selection Note do not wire to IN HF 1 This channel has a divide by 8 circuit and will not properly read the input Channels 1 6 have 100k internal pull up resistors Therefore if open collector outputs are connected to channels 7 or 8 use an external pull up resistor to 5V prot 12 will also work Ground any available ground Description This block reads all bits defined in Bit Selection from a Digital I O module and outputs the binary or gray code value the data represents The block allows the user to select the I O module the number of bits the coding and whether or not the data needs to be inverted All Channel Binary Input Properties Digital 1 0 2 Mode Cancel Graycode Binary cancel Invert Bit Selection Bits fB H LSB Channel f H The coding options available are Binary and Greycode Binary reads the input channels as binary bits which it then converts to decimal e g LLLL HLHL 0000 1010b 10d Greycode is a coding scheme where each sequential value only differs from its predecessor by one place It is often used by absolute encoders so that slight misalignments between the reading elements will not result in widely incorrect readings Notice for example that an increase from 3 to 4 causes tw
309. panel 36 Install the card into the storage card slot Later versions of 9210 software gt 3 1 will prompt to download each log found in the system note it takes several seconds for this prompt to appear Otherwise 37 Go to the DUMP DATA menu press middle button Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com 38 Press again with cursor flashing on lt OK gt to select the desired storage card 39 The Xlite then scrolls through each log file available on the Xlite if the first one is the log file to download press with cursor flashing on lt OK gt If the setup is not the one desired press the right button to move cursor to lt CANCELS gt then press Continue this until the desired log file is found then press with cursor on lt OK gt to download that log 40 The Xlite will then ask for a download format If the first one Comma separated values is desired press otherwise press right button to move the cursor to cancel then press Repeat this until the desired format is found and then press with cursor over lt OK gt Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Chapter 4 Graphical Setup Diagrams OVERVIEW This chapter will discuss the way in which to create and modify graphical setup blocks Determining when to use the graphi
310. pe is moisture temperature connect the temperature output blue to the next higher channel Connect the sensor ground white to GND Connect the sensor power red to SW D 12V Description This block supports Sutron s 5600 0089 soil moisture temperature sensor The type box supports the following Moisture Measure moisture only Moisture temperature Measure moisture and temperature on a separate channel Moisture temp muxed Measure moisture wait 5 seconds then measure temperature on the same channel The use digital check box allows you to specify a digital channel to enable individual sensors see page 8 of the sensor manual for more details Do not use digital channel 1 The cable correct check box directs the software to apply the cable offset correction as explained on page 12 13 of the sensor manual Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 187 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Soil Moisture Properties Type Analog Mod Analog Chan Use Digital Digital Mod Digital Chan Cable Correct 188 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Soil Temperature SoilTemp Inputs lt none gt Outputs Soil Temperature Wiring The sensor is measured single ended Hence connect the sensor s V to any analog input channel CH1 CH
311. r clock or a shaft encoder input Shaft encoders require two input lines hence users can have up to four shaft encoders eight counters or a combination of the two When a run command is received sampling of the inputs starts Digital filters The inputs can be low pass filtered before being applied to counters Shaft encoders are not filtered The digital filters are up down counters that count between 0 and a user defined threshold value Each input line s filter can have a different threshold value The input to a filter is one of the eight input lines the output feeds a 32 bit counter The filter counts up at each sample interval when its input is a one and down when its input is a zero The counter will not count up if it is at its upper threshold and it won t count down when its count is zero The output of the of the filter only changes state when the counter reaches zero or its upper threshold Thus if the output state of the filter is a one it will stay a one until the counter reaches zero It will then remain zero until the counter counts up to its upper threshold Valid digital filter time constants are 1 to 255 Counters Up to eight 32 bit counters can be programmed to count on both edges or just the positive going edge of their respective inputs Since the input to the counter can be inverted under program control the counter can also be made to count on the negative going edge by inverting its input The counter alarm messa
312. rature To use channels 7 8 apply external pull up resistors if the output of the sensor is not driven If counts are in the wrong direction either reverse wires or change the rotation setting in the properties Power the sensor off 12V and GND Description This block is used to collect data from an incremental Quadrature shaft encoder through a Digital I O Module Up to three Quadrature shaft encoders may be set up on one module The signal lines from each encoder must hook up to adjacent I O module inputs starting with an odd numbered one e g 3 4 5 6 or 7 8 Select the module and channel pair number the encoder is hooked up to odd channel 3 5 or 7 Enter the wheel diameter the rotation direction that results in a positive increase to the output and the units for the block to output in The Counts per Turn drop down box allows you to select 100 256 400 and 800 counts per turn in order to support different shaft encoders The Quadrature shaft encoder block contains a calibrate procedure The calibrate procedure is used to set the reading to a user set value This is important to do whenever the 9210 is restarted or maintenance is done on the sensor The calibration procedure is run from the Sensors tab or the Calibrate menu on the front panel Quadrature Shaft Encoder Properties DIO Module 1 Channel B Ty Wheel Circumference 1Foot Other Circumference fi ss Counts per Turn 100 Bringin
313. re Temp temperature in degrees Celsius a 53 4601 b 90 807 c 83 257 d 52 283 e 16 723 f 2 211 156 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com CS 107 Temperature Analog 1 0 1 E Excit Chan 1 x Cancel Meas Chan 2 lt Units F Oc Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 157 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Frequency Freq Inputs lt none gt Outputs Freq Wiring Connect the sensor frequency output to the selected CH1 CH8 of the digital module Connect the sensor GND to GND Description This block outputs the frequency of a digital input signal First select the Digital I O Module and the channel number Note that the Xlite channel is capable of measuring frequencies up to 8 KHz All other channels have a maximum frequency of 1KHz The field Multiplier is normally left at one unless the cycles per second output of the frequency is to be changed For example to changing to cycles per minute enter 0 0167 for this field The Period mostly has to do with when the block takes instantaneous as opposed to continuous frequency readings For instantaneous readings the Frequency block takes two time count readings from the I O module at Period time apart and used these to calculate the frequency of the signal The longer the value entered for
314. re it as well as settings that will be used to make the transmission A typical dialog is shown below followed by a brief explanation of each property Self Timed Properties Enable Self Timed Append Lat Lon 7 Center in Window Append Batt Voltage Channel isi E Time 00 00 00 Num Vals po o e Rate 04 00 00 k Format SHEF o Window 00 01 00 l Type 2o00 bps Antenna More Cancel YAGI 10 1 Enable Self Timed This box must be checked for the system to make self timed transmissions This field is sent to the Satlink to configure it and uses the field to control its own scheduling Center in Window This box instructs Satlink to center each timed transmission in the transmission window Normally a transmitter has a transmission window that is larger than the length of the transmission it must make When Center in Window is selected Satlink will delay each Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com transmission so it is centered in the window The Window size is entered in the Window Property on this dialog Append Lat Lon Satlink transmitters have a GPS Global Positioning System receiver which is cable of determining its latitude and longitude This check box instructs Satlink to add the Latitude and Longitude to the end of each transmission Append Batt Voltage This check box conf
315. rect Connect LOS Radio SSP and RS485 blocks are also capable of sending alarm messages on a regular interval There can be one interval for when the system is in ALARM and another for when everything is NORMAL The Clear button on MAIN TAB is used to acknowledge an ALERT condition manually causing any alert transmissions to cease If the system is still in ALARM that condition may be cleared as well by pressing the Clear button again and the system should return to NORMAL until the next measurement occurs and any alarms are redetected If ALERT transmissions have been disabled OFF then pressing the Clear button will re enable them Main Setup Sensors Data Log Status Basic Coms SSP CL RADIOS E2Setup Measurements Graphical Setup 1 0 Modules LAN Settings Log files Satlink iy Edit PR E COMS SSP CL Setup Menu The Setup tab is used to assign the various devices to a port This is done by clicking Coms SSP CL and pressing Edit This brings up the Com Port Setup Menu as follows Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Coms SSP CL Setup Direct s1s200 C None 115200 None e fi1s200 9 voce Misawa Cancel None e 1is200 a _TCPIP None x s207 M Master None taseoo pm Pease
316. ressing lt and gt will allow you to select any of the available log files Then simply press to select the file The system will display the most recent data in the selected log Press lt to view older data and press gt to see newer data When finished viewing the log data press to exit Dump Log Data Dump Log Data will copy the data from the logs to a storage card When Dump Log Data is selected the system will prompt to insert a card if one is not already installed The system will then display the name of one of the log files with lt OK gt lt Cancel gt Press to dump the named file or use an arrow to select cancel and then press The system will prompt to select the desired output format for the file Press to select the format that is listed or use the arrow keys to select cancel and press After dumping one file the software will repeat the above process until all the log files have been processed SDI This submenu offers the ability to send SDI commands to connected SDI devices The submenu has the following items Send Command Find Sensors Show Found Sensors Exit SDI Send Command Selecting this item prompts you to enter an SDI command to send After the command has been entered the command is sent and the result of the command is displayed If the sensor responds the result from the sensor is shown otherwise an error message is displayed Find Sensors Selecting this item causes the sys
317. ringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 243 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com encoded value input data offset scale 0 5 Sensor Label Id Offset Scale Avg Air Temperature AT 0 50 0 10 0 Max Air Temperature ATMax 1 50 0 10 0 Data s integer in id 1 R312 1 2 0 0 1 0 fraction to 3 digits in id 2 Min Air Temperature ATMin 2 50 0 10 0 Soil Temperature ST 3 50 0 10 0 Data s integer in id 3 R334 3 4 0 0 1 0 fraction to 3 digits in id 4 Avg Atmospheric Pressure AP 4 600 0 2 0 Relative Humidity RH 5 0 0 10 0 Data s integer in id 5 R356 5 6 0 0 1 0 fraction to 3 digits in id 6 Net Radiation NR 6 0 0 0 25 Data s integer in id 7 R378 7 8 0 0 1 0 fraction to 3 digits in id 8 Wind Speed WS 8 0 0 10 0 Wind Direction WD 9 0 0 1 0 36 Sun Duration SunD 10 0 0 0 5 Precipitation Duration PrecipD 11 0 0 0 5 Albedometer skyward AlbIn 12 0 0 0 5 Albedometer downward AlbOut 13 0 0 0 5 Global Radiation Global 14 0 0 1 0 Instantaneous Snow Depth ISD 15 0 0 100 0 Snow Depth SD 16 0 0 100 0 Offset is the offset of the sensor s range from 0 Scale is the representable range divided by the range of the sensor If the label entered is not in the table above then it is interpreted as an integer to be used as the Id for the data An Offset of 0 and a Scale of 1 are assumed when encoding the value in this case This enables new sensor data to be included in INSAT transmission
318. ript may cause the Xlite to reboot in order to make changes If for some reason the upgrade fails the process will keep retrying and the last error will be displayed If it appears the process is not going to complete you have the option to press Cancel and abort the upgrade At this time you will be prompted if you d like to view the recent serial port history If you click yes then you can see what some of the recent messages and prompts issued by the data logger This can be helpful in determining why the upgrade failed A longer version of this history is also copied in to the clipboard If you cannot determine the source of the problem you can edit paste this information in to an email message explaining the problem and send it to Sutron Customer Service Customizing a Serial Ethernet Upgrade Users can make their own upgrade files or edit the ones provided by Sutron depending on individual needs The upgrade file is a simple ASCII file such that it can be edited with notepad exe An example upgrade file is shown below To save space the many steps required to delete all potential custom slls and to send all possible speech files have been left out The following command tells XTerm this is an Xpert2 upgrade script x Reboot Xpert2 bypassing autoexec bat b bypass Remove old programs If any other files need to be deleted befor the new files are deployed then add them to this list A typical example would be an sll file
319. rmat of the transmission data is lt LABELI gt lt OFFSET gt lt INTERVAL gt lt DATAI gt lt DATAI gt lt DATA1 gt lt LABEL2 gt lt OFFSET gt lt INTERVAL gt lt DATA2 gt lt DATA2 gt lt DATA2 gt lt LABEL N gt lt OFFSET gt lt INTERVAL gt lt DATA N gt lt DATA N gt lt DATA N gt BATTLOAD 0 lt BATTLOAD gt lt LAT LONG gt LABEL This is the Label entered in Satlink Logger in the Measurements Settings Label field The Label can be a SHEF two character parameter code such as HF for gauge height or PC for cumulative precipitation or it can be any string you enter Refer to http noaasis noaa gov DCS htmfiles schefcodes html for a list of SHEF codes commonly used OFFSET Each record is prefixed with an lt OFFSET gt which is an ASCII number indicating the number of minutes ago the most recent data was recorded Note that the number of minutes is calculated about 15 seconds prior to transmission INTERVAL INTERVAL indicates how often the measurement was made MESURE This is data collected by Satlink Logger through MENT measurements Only those measurements with the DATA Scheduled Transmissions Include box checked are included in the transmission Like the binary formats the SHEF format groups all the related data from one measurement The data is transmitted in ASCII with sign and decimal point if needed If a data value has not yet been recorded or has been era
320. rmistor leads similarly V to input channel and V to AGND for single ended V and V to an adjacent input channel pair for differential Connect the heater and ventilator grounds to GND and connect the heater and ventilator leads each to a digital channel output Description The NetRad block is used to measure one of three different net radiation sensors the Kipp amp Zonen NR Lite 2 CNR 2 and CNR 4 Each sensor differs in the components of radiation measured 172 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com The NR Lite 2 is a high output thermopile sensor that measures the sum of incoming and outgoing all wave radiation i e both short wave and long wave radiation This sum is output via the NetRad block output The other block outputs ShortRad LongRad etc are ignored The CNR 2 also measures and outputs net total radiation in NetRad but also measures and outputs net short wave radiation in ShortRad and net long wave radiation in LongRad The CNR 4 also measures and outputs net total radiation in NetRad net short wave radiation from above in ShortRadUp net short wave reflected radiation from below in ShortRadDown net long wave radiation from above in LongRadUp and net reflected long wave radiation from below in LongRadDown The following dialog is used to configure the sensor measurement Model ENR 4 7 AIO Module 1 7 C
321. s a file transfer to the 9210 will be limited by how fast the Flash Disk can be written Key This keys powers on a radio transmitter asserts DTR and RTS and can only be used when XTerm is configured to communicate with a LOS Radio UnKey This unkeys a radio transmitter drops DTR and RTS and can only be used when XTerm is configured to communicate with a LOS Radio Check Mail This checks to see if you ve received a mail message via SSP When a mail message is received you may hear a beep or the RingOut Wav file played if it s on your system If you wish to test this you can go to the Setup menu on the 9210 select Coms SSP CL press Edit press Test and click Send Mail XTerm COM2 115200 xj Rs Tx Xp C En File Transfer Set Clock rx ha fas po Connect ess po m Con il MV Web Server JV Auto Update Send Mail This will prompt for a mail message to send to an 9210 If successful Mail Delivered will be displayed Decoder This is an SSP message decoder that can be helpful for trouble shooting SSP communication problems The information displayed requires an understanding of the SSP protocol which is beyond the scope of this manual However if you experience some sort of Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 121 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com repeatable communication failure a screen capture of the Decoder window can very
322. s of version 4 11 of Satlink Satlink has not yet implemented this function Norm Rt The Normal Rate property defines how often random transmissions will be made when the unit is not in alarm The rate is specified in HH MM SS Alarm Rt The Alarm Rate property defines how often random transmissions will be made when the unit is in alarm following burst transmission s The rate is specified in HH MM SS Burst Rt The Burst Rate property defines how often the Burst random transmissions will be made These burst transmissions occur when the unit first goes into alarm The rate is specified in HH MM SS Format Several formats are supported for random transmissions Bin Int is a binary interleaved format identical to the 8210 binary transmission format The data are in the 6 bit pseudo binary format required by NESDIS Bin NonInt is a binary non interleaved format This format also uses the 6 bit pseudo binary format but allows different amounts of data to be sent for each sensor The data is not interleaved i e one sensor s data set appears together in the transmission Channel This property defines the channel that Satlink will use to make the random transmission Type This property defines the baud rate for the transmission The valid selections are 100 and 300 Burst The Burst property defines how many transmissions Satlink will make when the unit first goes into alarm This v
323. s ate aaea ee tu cea EE E EEE ua bamaea aes punssueieesdet ate 58 Append s sei r E E oni eats oes Gated E RE E E NEEE E te dev auag teers Beaty 59 UN EAEE E A E EE A EEE E EE ueteugsds gudsepsentensteer esas 59 SENSORS TAB AEE E EEEE SE ASAE EREE akc ance AIS E EEE SASAE EE S AEE ESE 61 TDIA VAa i a E E A E E E EE E A E E NER i T 63 TOG TAB a aa E EE ERa S E TEA 67 Column E1 KAE A E EE EE E E E EE E E 67 A Ria E EE E EE E A EE E E A EE E E E uecte dl toa tees 67 ELAT O nA EE E AEREA S E E SEAE EE E cee eh ae E 67 fF E E EEE eS E E a EE 67 O a a 68 LETA es EE E ER IL AA EE E A E 68 IDEA AE E EEE A EEA EE E EE E EE EAE E AEE EE 68 Selecting a Eog Fleire ee E EE EE E E S E EEEE E AES TEETE E ASS 68 Navigating the Log sa cic oeieo eie e a E basco EE E E EE S ES EE E E E ES 68 Day Day e ee ASS 68 1E ae BEERE E E E E EE E E E E E AE 68 Clearing the TOT r is ei cas E e EEE E EE E EEEE OEE E E A E EE EE E E EO EEEE EE 68 Entering a NOTE prenosen oaaae esee ee e e a a oe Na See eae E e pa e NRE esnea S N EEES 68 EX 010 u Ae OAE APOE E E EE EEN EE EE OR E DEEE TEE EEEE 69 STATUS PAB e EEEE TETN E E EE PEE TT E EETTERIIN E E EEEE T E EERE EE AT S 71 OPERATING THEDISPLAY r T Ta o deceendessetineds a a a e E raa ET E N aae aee r Sa NESES 73 Display Status yovcssecceysSeosag cadeudepestces p i ree anae E Ta E e esenp er re aa O aes R a EaR 73 Display Values seira a ei i secs thessdesdenteddocneuvees ined devseneacetipedscdevusasavededes 74 Cali Drat
324. s dialog Creating New Logs When creating a new log it might take a minute or two after pressing OK for the file to be initialized During this time nothing else can be done with the unit an hourglass is displayed during log file creation On SD cards with Gigabyte capacities creating larger log files will take MUCH longer To create a 100 megabyte 104857600 bytes as entered log file the unit will take about 7 minutes to create a 1 Gigabyte log file expect the unit to be busy for over an hour Use Flash disk filename log to store log files into internal flash Use USB Card filename log to store file onto a USB thumb drive Use SD Card filename log to store file onto an SD storage card Sizing Logs Since each logged data point takes between ten and fifteen bytes of memory a log file 60 000 bytes in size will hold between 4000 and 6000 data points or between 1 5 and 2 months of a single sensor measurement made every 15 minutes You can change the size of an existing log from the Log File Properties dialog The size can be increased without losing any data currently in the log If the size is decreased you will lose some Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com of the data in the log If you are decreasing the size of the log you may want to retrieve the data from the log so it is not lost Note the minimum log size is 2048 b
325. s given for the transmission Satlink only uses this window size if the box Center in Window is checked Random Dialog The Random Dialog allows the setting of the Random transmission properties Random transmissions are those that are made at random intervals The properties correspond to settings that will be sent to Satlink to configure it as well as settings that will be used by software to make the transmission A typical dialog is shown below followed by a brief explanation of each property Random Properties Enable Random Append Lat Lon 7 Append Quality 7 Norm Rt 12 00 00 fis Channel i51 Alarm Rt 01 00 00 Type 100 bp Burst Rt 00 01 00 ait Burst g iai Format Bin Int 7 Values f OK Cancel Enable Random This box must be checked for the system to make random transmissions This field is sent to the Satlink to configure the transmitter and uses the field to control its own scheduling Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Append Lat Lon Satlink transmitters have a GPS Global Positioning System receiver which is cable of determining its latitude and longitude This check box instructs Satlink to add the Latitude and Longitude to the end of each transmission Append Quality This check box configures Satlink to append quality data to the end of the transmission Note a
326. s to any of the 9210 RS232 ports See the section Wiring for the details of the connections There are three user set properties for the BEI Encoder Com Port Range and Offset Use Com Port to specify which RS232 port the encoder is connected to NOTE Leave the settings in the SETUP TAB COMS SSP CL set to none as this block will not be able to use the com port if Coms SSP CL is already using it Range and Offset are used to scale the reading to the proper units The equation used is Output Reading Range Offset BEI Encoder Properties Com Port iy Range 0 0 lil Bi Cancel LJ ih Offset g 144 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com IN Binary Input Binin Inputs lt none gt Outputs BinOut Wiring Signal Any digital input channel except for IN HF 1 which has a divide by 8 circuit and will not properly read the input If using channels 7 or 8 an external pull up resistor to 5V prot 12 will also work is needed Ground Any available ground Description This is a general purpose block for configuring a binary input hooked to a Digital I O module Channel is one of the eight inputs available on the module see Appendix C I O Modules A processing block such as Measure or Average is used to request data of this block unless Event is checked With Event checked the output will update on
327. s used since one line can contain many sensors Units These are the units for the measurement The units are generally set by the Sensor block in the Setup Diagram but can sometimes be determined by a Processing block This field is not used when the LogID option is used since one line can contain many sensors Date This is the date for the timestamp It is displayed in the format selected by Set Date Time in the Main tab Because of the small screen size the column for the date is hidden Use the scroll bar to see the date Selecting a Log File Use the pull down menu next to Select Log to show all the log files in the system Log files are created modified and deleted under the Setup tab To change what sensor data is placed into a certain log the properties for that log block must be modified in the Graphical Setup screen EzSetup Measurements are always placed into the SSP log Navigating the Log The log file can be navigated either with the scroll bars on the sides of the Log tab or with the buttons at the bottom of the display Day Day The buttons Day and Day can be used to jump ahead or back one day s worth of data Find The Find button can be used to search for the data logged near a certain date and time Clearing the Log Pressing this button causes contents of the log file to be erased The system will ask for confirmation before doing this Note that this erases the contents of the log file but do
328. s without having predefined labels If a different Offset and or Scale is required it can be implemented using a Polynomial block connected in line prior to the Self Timed parameter block 244 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Data Time and Interval Data Time and Data Interval are used to define which data values coming into the block should be stored for transmission For example a Data Time of 00 00 00 and a Data Interval of 00 15 00 will cause the SelfTimed Paramter block to store any data coming into the block whose timestamp matches those values i e any timestamp in the set 00 00 00 00 15 00 23 45 00 Similarly a Data Time of 00 02 59 and Data Interval of 00 06 00 will cause the block to store data whose timestamp falls in the set 00 02 59 00 08 59 00 56 59 Data Time and Data Interval are most useful for when the SelfTimed Parameter block is connected to an output that is providing data more frequently than it is being transmitted It also allows the formatter to identify data that is missing when it comes time to transmit it Num Values The SHEF SHEFFIX BIN NONINT and INSAT formats use Num Values to set the number of values of this sensor to include in the transmission NOTE Setting Num Values in the Setup tab first will provide the default value used when adding new SelfTimed blocks to the setup This can help redu
329. schedule The order in which the sensors appear is important as it determines the order in which the sensors are measured and logged Sensor Configuration A new sensor is added to a measurement schedule by selecting New Sensor and pressing Edit To edit an existing sensor select the entry and press Edit To delete a sensor select it and press Delete When creating or editing a sensor the following dialog is shown Sensor Configuration Name mand an Sensor apc 7 More Cancel M Log C avg M DSP sat ST ORs ofe Use these arrows to move quickly between all com ec Opm rt vigits BJ value JONKNO ie modue Slope fi f Channel 5 7 Offset bo el NAME The name used when logging except when Log ID is active and when displaying the sensor value in the EzSetup menu the Sensors Tab and the 9210 front panel display sensors assigned to the current measurement SENSOR Defines the sensor type to measure Click the box to see the list of all possible sensor types Note that each of these sensor types corresponds to a sensor block that can also be used in the graphical setup This means that all the descriptions for sensor blocks in Appendix A apply to the sensor type you select here Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com MORE This button brings up the
330. sed the letter M for missing data will be sent The most recent data is always sent first The number of values sent for each measurement is set on a measurement by measurement basis 308 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com BATTLOAD BATTLOAD is appended if the Append Quality box is checked on the Scheduled Tx tab lt BATTLOAD gt represents the battery voltage of Satlink Logger under load during the last transmission If the battery reading is zero then that is the first transmission since bootup LAT LONG _ This is an optional field it will be included only if Append Lat Long is selected for random transmissions The Lat Long information will be user readable For example N3901 18 48 W77024 36 91 means a latitude of North 39 degrees 1 minute 18 48 seconds and longitude of W 77 degrees 24 minutes 36 91 seconds EXAMPLE Here is a message with three active measurements each one is set to include two readings The random buffer contains the string EXT This string was given by an external device through the RS232 port Notice how much longer this message is compared to the earlier binary examples HG 0 15 10 20 10 15 PC 0 15 50 49 TA 22 1 22 0 VB 0 12 2 l l I lI VB Reading Offset time Tesne Sensor Name VB TA 2 TA 1 TAAS ReR RRES SRR Interval
331. sh a connection from the sensor to a PC and turn on power to the sensor Enter configuration mode by sending if the sensor is in continuous output mode or sending lt node gt if the sensor is in polling mode Send D3 lt CR gt to display the current configuration Set the sensors to the following parameters the manual explains how to do this WindSonic M4 01 L1 P1 B3 F1 H2 E1 162 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Set the units as desired with U the heating with H and the node address with N Send Q lt CR gt Q is for Quit when finished The setup of the 9210 to read the WindSonic is much easier Simply specify the com port the sensor is connected to the power setting and the address NOTE Leave the settings in the SETUP TAB COMS SSP CL set to none as this block will not be able to use the com port if Coms SSP CL is already using it The 9210 will output the data in whatever units are set in the WindSonic Gill Wind Properties Type windSonic Com Port coma 7 Address ko H Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 163 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Heat Flux HeatFlux Inputs lt none gt Outputs Heat Flux Sensitivity Wiring Two models of Hukesflux sensors are supported HFPO1 and HFPO1SC The latter model supports a peri
332. simple The following setup will use a 15 minute measurement interval log the data and transmit it to a GOES satellite Connect all equipment before entering the setup For this example setup hook a Satlink to COM 2 and a Quadrature shaft encoder to Digital channels 3 4 terminal B I O 3 and I O 4 Log into the system using the SETUP account access Start by setting the station name This name will identify the station and allow the setup file name to be unique Do this from the MAIN Tab by clicking the three dots next to Station Name and typing or clicking the letters on the virtual keyboard LakeTop is used in this example Station Info Date Time m 05 29 2003 11 04 47 Station name c LakeTop Go to the Setup Tab this is where the rest of the station configuration will take place Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status Coms EZSetup Measurements Graphical Setup 1 0 Modules Log files E GA FE Satlink Self test H Setup File LakeTop ssf Users Edit Select the Satlink tree by clicking on it then click the EDIT button Satlink Properties Satellite ID pooo0000 is Comm Port come 7 Initialize Satlink V Cancel Set the Satellite ID NESDIS assigned and COM port Satlink is connected to and then click OK If a message saying recording must be turned off appears click YES this will stop the system and let the rest of the se
333. ss is needed but this may need to be increased if hardware repeaters are used in the network as each hard repeater in the network needs time to warm up Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Ack Delay When the Xlite is acting as a master this is how long to wait for a response to a request aka an acknowledgement The default value is 10 seconds which is suitable for a single hop 1200 baud system It may be reduced if higher baud rates are available or increased if store and forward repeater hops are necessary Retries More precisely this is the total number of tries When an SSP request is made that requires a reply such as a GetTag the system will wait for the Ack Delay for the reply If a reply is not received then one or more retries is performed Retries is the total number of attempts to make The default value is 3 Combined with the default Ack Delay of 10 seconds this means SSP will send the same message as many as 3 times with a 10 second delay between each attempt before it will timeout and report a tx error All retry messages have the same FLAG SEQUENCE number as the original message This is used to prevent the same message from being processed twice due to a long network delay Reply Delay When the Xlite is acting as a slave this is how long the RTU will wait for a message before timing out This delay includes the time need
334. t or gt may not be on the display the operation of the buttons is intuitive and easy to use With the above prompt pressing SELECT will cause the display to exit and turn off Pressing lt or gt will cycle through the other menu choices Display Status Display Values Calibrate Setup View Log Data Dump Log Data SDI Coms Test Edit Basic Edit Satlink Exit Xlite Each of the menu choices is described in the following sections Note that other menu choices may appear when certain custom Sutron Link Libraries SLLs have been added to the Flash Disk See the manual for the custom SLL for a description its menu entries If no key is pressed within a few minutes the display turns off automatically regardless of what the user was doing at the time Any work being done by the user when this happens is lost Display Status This function displays the station name date time and recording status If the status is Running the system is recording and operating normally If the status is Stopped the system is not recording and must be restarted using either Xterm or cycle power to the unit After displaying recording status the system status page is displayed This page is the same data the is seen on the GUI interface s Status Tab Press the lt and gt keys to scroll through the status data Press the key to exit the status page
335. t The user is also given a chance to delete the test results file which will prevent the tests from being run again on the next system start The following tests are performed each time SELFTEST executes Power Consumption provides opportunity for user to measure power consumption while the system is in its deepest sleep Verify RTC Communication verifies communication with external RTC Verify Physical Memory verifies the correct amount of memory is present Verify Flash Disk verifies the correct amount of storage memory is present Verify Watch Dog verifies the watchdog timer counter is counting within range Verify COM ports verifies com port operation Verify I2C Devices verifies expected I2C devices are present Requires the presence of at least one I O module to pass Verify Display Buttons verifies the operation of the display buttons Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Verify Battery Voltage verifies battery voltage is 12V 2V Verify Xlite I O verifies I O module functions Pressing the Edit button with the SelfTest branch selected brings up the following dialog that controls what optional tests are to be run Self test Properties V External loopbacks connected V SD Card read write test V USB Drive read write test V Power consumption test 5x max M Xlite display button test V Xlite 1 0
336. t as well as GPS position LAT LON and UTC time The 9210B PB200 setup block enables you to read these parameters into the 9210B for further processing and or logging The following sections describe how to wire and configure the sensor for use with the 9210B Wiring Connect the PB200 200WX sensors to an RS232 or RS485 serial port Connect the sensor as shown in the table below PB200 Pin PB200 Pin Name Wire Color RS485 Connection RS232 Connection 1 V Red V V see PwrCtrl 2 V Black V V 3 A OUT White RS485A Tx 7 A IN Yellow RS485A Rx 8 B IN Orange RS485B N C 9 B OUT Blue RS485B N C Configuration The PB200 properties dialog shown below is used to configure operation of the PB200 block Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 175 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com PB200 Properties Com port coma 7 C RS 485 Cancel PwrCtrl pio CHAN 7 Module p 7 Mo Channel hko TH Warmup 5 feo E Inactivity s feo fad Com Port and RS 485 Use the Com Port property to select the port on which you ve connected the PB200 200WX sensor If you ve connected the sensor to an RS485 port then check the RS 485 option note COM4 may be either configured to either RS232 or RS485 on the 9210B by default while ports COM6 COM9 are available as RS485 by factory option Power Control The PwrCtr
337. t be the same If the sensor reads a com port to obtain its input then the com port must be the same For SDI 12 sensors the SDI 12 address and command must be the same Note the I O device configuration must be set the same when creating the sensor entry Changing the configuration to be the same after the entry has been made does not result in linking any outputs In the example below the Dir and Speed outputs of the RMYoung sensor are linked One measurement of the sensor will be made every 15 minutes to obtain both values Dir and Speed The same is the case for the GillWind sensor on COM4 However the GillWind sensor on COMS does not have its outputs linked This would happen if for example the Speed sensor entry was created with the selection of COM7 and then changed to COM6 to match the Dir entry amp 01 00 15 00 Next 00 00 00 amp RMYoung AI0 1 Ch 1 01 WD Dir 02 WS Speed GillWind COM4 03 WD Dir 04 WS Speed 05 Dir COM6 06 Speed COM6 Once outputs are linked a change to one will affect all linked outputs Using the above as an example if you select the GillWind Dir entry and change its com port to COM3 it will change for the Speed setting as well Once an output has been linked you must delete the entry to unlink it Hence to fix the fact that the Speed output of the GillWind sensor on COM6 is not linked to the Dir output you would first delete the Speed entry and the
338. t is sometimes referred to as the address e 07 is the year 07 means 2007 e 141 is a three digit julian day of the year January Ist is Julian Day one and February Ist is Julian Day 32 This number is always three digits 0 padded e 162408 is the time of day 16 24 08 16 is 4 PM military time 24 is the number of minutes and 08 the number of seconds e Gis the Failure Code 1 It can be G Good message Message received with parity errors W Message received on wrong channel D Message received on multiple channels duplicate A Message received with address error s correctable T Message received late early time error U Unexpected message M Missing message N PDT entry for this platform is not complete oOoo0o0o000000O Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 313 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com e 40 is EIRP or received signal strength implied EIRP assuming that the pilot is a 47 dBm reference Signal strength is output as two ASCII digits ranging between 32 and 57 decimal The nominal operating range is 44 to 49 dBm e 2 is the Frequency Offset The first byte is an ASCII plus or minus sign the second byte is an ASCII number zero 0 through nine 9 or the ASCH character A The number indicates the amount in increments of 50 Hz The character A represents 500 Hz which is the worst case frequency error that the DAMS units can acq
339. tamp between the start of the log and the time specified in End Time Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com STATUS TAB The status tab displays detailed status information The data displayed includes the status on each I2C module any communication modules and the system in general To update the status menu press the Refresh button Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status Recent Status 10 18 08 59 Stat User Anonymous logged 10 18 08 59 Stat Running 10 18 08 59 Stat Self test Nothing to do 10 18 08 59 Stat Com Status Waiting v gt 10 18 08 59 Stat Com Status Started Options About Exit App Select the Options button to access status reporting options The Status Options allows the user to configure where status and debug messages should be sent Note that status messages are automatically stored in the system log Com Status Waiting M Send status messages to COM1 V Send debug messages to COM1 _ Send debug messages to system log H Cancel Press the About button to access version information copyright information and the unit serial number Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com xX xpert ver 3 2 0 4 Sutron Corp Copyright C 2008 S N
340. tation if needed Shutdown The shutdown option may be used to initiate a shutdown of main application of the RTU ex Xpert exe One purpose for shutting down the main application would be if you wanted to transfer a new copy of an SLL to the unit without performing a full upgrade If you don t allow enough time for the application to fully shutdown you will receive an error when you try to transfer the file over Reboot The reboot option may be used to gracefully shutdown the unit and reboot it This is always preferred over just removing power For instance the system will startup much quicker if the log files have been closed out normally and don t need to be rescanned FireWalls If you have Windows Firewall enabled like most PCs do these days you will need to add an exception for Xterm exe in order for it to support all of its networking features If you use a different type of firewall you may need to add an explicit access rule for some of the following service ports that are used by Xterm or the 9210 HOSTED SERVICE PORT PROTOCOL BY DESCRIPTION GUI 52732 TCP 9210 Used by Xterm to perform and log dumps and detect that Xterm the 9210 application is running Xterm also hosts this port in order to support proxy connections Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com
341. tebe gaa gu septeres tovteads dean S EA Soyo Gates 128 CHAPTER 8 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING csssscssssssccssssssccssssccssssscccscssscccsssecescssseecs 129 COMMON MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING ssssscscccecsessnsececececsenssececeeeesenesesecececeeseseaeceeseeesenneaeseeeeeees 130 SKip autoexec Date se i eae aed ARG ee Ss a eae eh ee ee ed 130 Unitmissing functionality is 3 823 ee ee he ee ae he ee T 130 Xterm has a White screen or Black Screen ccceseeesssssesesssssesecscesscecscsvecseeseessscsesescsssesesessseeessseeseesseeseeeeeeees 130 Adjust the contrasts es Ste siete tee ee ee A de Ae oe ei 130 Replace the Internal Battery every 5 years ee ee cece cesecssecnsecseecaeeeaeeeseeeeceseeeeeesecsecaecsaecsaecsaecaaeeaeseneseaeees 131 Cleaning Instructions ii 25s sescisg eeo reos es Bel le aide eed nh athens ates CEER E Mice ARG vacate coteae 131 FUSES isvecede E Reach E cobs tec keene Se Seen ceca A a tea an a ce le cet ee hs ens acetic eta eile bi seh igs 131 APPENDIX A SETUP BLOCKS wicccsssssscsssesescoichieccsssosecssbssvsesesescecesbecsesesteasesusscesesssscbdesonssbdscosscoseseoscdesssdectucsssen 132 INTRODUCTIONS 23345 EEEE A E E E hed aia Se eh eg ated Ae ee i LS hs 133 SENSOR BEOGKS E slate EE E E E E Mista ets atacand Oe A eee Pa 134 Air Temperature Sensor AirTemp 00 cece ceseceecseecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesseesecsaecsaecsaecsaecsaecaeseaeeeeeseeseeseeseenaees 134 Alo LEH Air Temperature
342. tem to search for connected sensors by querying each address for a sensor Once all addresses are queried a list of address found is displayed Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Show Found Sensors Selecting this item will display the list of sensor addresses that were found during the last Find Sensors operation Coms Test This submenu offers the ability to view the status of and test SSP communication ports A port can be tested only if you have first set up the port in the Coms SSP CL entry on the Setup tab You will first be prompted to select a port to test COM1 to COM9 and then you will be presented with a submenu with the following items Show SSP Stats Clear Stats Check Mail Send Mail Key Unkey Exit Coms Test Show SSP Stats This option will flash receive and transmit message counts on the screen for 5 seconds RX 100 102 1 TX 100 100 0 The 3 RX counts are as follows Rx Good The number of SSP messages received that were address to this station The SSP station ID is the same as the Station Name defined on the Main page Rx Total Total number of messages received including ones not addressed to the station Rx Bad Bad messages May indicate that the message itself wasn t assembled correctly as TCP IP messages are error corrected and CRC errors should not occur at the SSP level The 3 TX counts
343. ter is assigning IP addresses Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 291 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com reliably REPORT mode Set status reporting to on off none ssp 0 9 low medium high i2c all debug more below SET sensor value data Sets the current value of a tag to the specified data For tags with multiple possible values the value number may be specified 1 n Data may be an integer a floating point number or a double quoted string SHOW sensor list The SHOW command by itself will display the current value for SENSORI TAG every sensor and tag that does not have a U quality in the CSV YMODEM system in a tabular report Sensors are the input blocks in the C system Tags include any intermediate or final value in the setup marked with a ComsTag a custom tag created with Basic or a Field Variable Specifying a sensor list will cause only those sensors and tags to be displayed sensors and tags can have the same name SENSOR shows only sensors TAG shows only tags CSV will use a comma separated and quoted format that can be imported in to a spreadsheet CSV will also show more decimal places by default only 3 places are shown to help keep columns aligned YMODEM will cause the report to be transferred using the Ymodem protocol as lt sitename gt _show TXT where lt sitename gt is the
344. that is left to do is to change the properties of each block as desired Clicking the block and then clicking Edit Properties can bring up the properties window of a block Doing this for the RMYoung sensor block brings up the following window Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com RM Young Sensor Direction Analog 1 0 Module 1 v Input Channel 1 v Excitation Channel e T Speed Units Cancel Detailed information on the different fields in this block can be found in Appendix A Setup Blocks For now just change the units to from mph to Knots and click OK Processing Block Example Now click the top measure sensor block and select Edit Properties Measure Properties E Time foo 05 00 Interval p 20 00 1 Cancel This is where we enter the start time offset and the sampling interval The measure block is used when samples are desired at a fixed regular interval We set up this block to measure wind speed every twenty minutes with a five minute offset from the top of the hour e g at 05 00 25 00 45 00 every hour Log Block Example Finally click the top the log block to view its properties Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Log Properties Log Name Flash Disk TEST log 7 Se
345. the and buttons Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Specify Date Time This value is currently highlighted Use keypad or Date Year Month Day Hour Min Sec Time to change the value Use these to highlight the value to the left or right Station Name The station name is the general purpose identifier for the station It can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters This name does not need to be the same as the GOES METEOSAT identifier but is used when connecting into a SSP system as the slave station name When communicating to another station or base station PCBASE XCONNECT this name is case sensitive therefore this name should always be entered in UPPERCASE letters to avoid confusion NOTE If the station name is changed power must be cycled for SSP communications to use the new name When the 9210 is started it will try to load a setup file with the same name as the station name Station Status The Station Status box indicates both the recording and alarms states and contains buttons to affect those states The recording status box indicates the current state of recording i e whether measurements are being made and logged This box also indicates whether transmissions are enabled when recording is on When recording is off the status box reads OFF and the button to its right is l
346. the average time has expired The average time expires when the next scheduled Measurement Interval is to start or the sampling window defined by the Sampling Interval and Samples to Average is exceeded MEASUREMENT INTERVAL Specifies how often the measurement is performed MEASUREMENT TIME Specifies when the measurement is performed This is can be viewed as an offset into the measurement interval and will typically be 00 00 00 as shown above Setting it to 00 05 00 would cause the measurments to occur at 5 minutes 20 minutes 35 minutes and 50 minutes past the hour In other words at 00 05 00 and every 15 minutes thereafter SAMPLING INTERVAL For sensors with averaging enabled the sampling interval specifies the timing between samples Note This should be at least as long as the time required to take the samples If not the Samples to Average takes on a new meaning described below SAMPLES TO AVERAGE Specifies how many samples to take in averaging a sensor Note The sampling interval along with the samples to average defines a sampling window over which the samples will be taken Sixty samples taken at a one second interval defines a sixty second sampling window In situations where the sampling interval is shorter than the time required to take the samples the unit will take consecutive samples for the duration defined by the sampling window In other words if an SDI 12 sensor that took 2 seconds was being measured by the above
347. the World 297 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Total Physical 7725056 Available Physical 3833856 Total Virtual 33554432 Available Virtual 29163520 Number of resets 110 I2C STATISTICS RX 22 Error 0 Fail 0 Tx 31 Error 0 Fail 0 NAK 0 TIMEOUT 0 COLLISN 0 OVRFLOW 0 BUSERR 0 RXERROR 0 SLAVETX 0 CHKSUM 0 STOP 0 BUSBUSY 0 RESTART 0 BADCHAN 0 Network Configuration lt DNS Servers 192 168 168 Ethernet adapter CS8900A1 IP Address a s a s 192 168 168 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 168 1 MAIL Command Example Flash Disk gt MAIL Mailbox for COM2 10 26 2005 16 23 53 Mail from BASE Remember to cal the 4 20 input 10 26 2005 16 23 18 Mail from BASE This is a test mail message Flash Disk gt MAIL 2 BASE All taken care of I m leaving the site now Mail delivered MEASURE SHOW Command Example The following measures all sensors and tags Flash Disk gt MEASURE SENSOR BATVAL Battery 12 781 G V BATVAL Temp 28 767 G C STAGE T23 G fE AIRTEMP Temp 78 32 GF AIRTEMP Humid 2532 G 5 TAG STAGE 1 23 GHA AIRTEMP 78 32 G OK Show just the AIRTEMP tag Flash Disk gt SHOW AIRTEMP TAG ATRTEMP 78 32 G OK
348. the ethernet port the system draws only about mA more power than if the state was set to Off The LAN is in use by area displays the list of elements that have requested the LAN to be on This area will show User when the LAN Configuration setting is On Modbus when a modbus process has requested the LAN to be on and so on Press the View Config button to view details IP address DNS server etc about the current connection When you press the Settings button the system will ask whether you want to run the Network Wizard which will ask several questions and then set LAN settings based on your answers If you answer No to running the wizard you instead are prompted with a dialog from which you can manually configure network properties Network Properties Obtain an IP address via DHCP Specify an IP address IP Address 169 254 1 2 ii Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 pi Default Gateway 7 i Cancel Name Servers Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com The Network Properties dialog is used to specify how the 9210 gets an IP address Typically when the 9210 is connected to a network that provides DHCP services select Obtain an IP address via DHCP If DHCP services are not available or if you desire a static IP address for other reasons select Specify an IP address and enter the IP addr
349. ties specify what data to included in the transmission how many data values and the order of the data NOTE The settings for the transmission format are in the Setup tab under Satlink Self Timed From there you can select one of the allowed formats including SHEF SHEFFIX BIN INT BIN NONINT NOS and INSAT The transmission routines use this selected format and the information in this block to properly format the data x Self Timed Properties Label JAT Data Time 00 00 00 s it vee Data Interval 00 01 00 Num Yalues Ae Sequence mull Jse calc time Cancel s Aw Label The Label field has multiple uses depending on the transmission format selected For SHEF and SHEFFIX formats the value in label is included in the transmission as the sensor ID for the value The common SHEF IDs are normally simple two letter codes for each sensor such as GH for gauge height PR for precipitation and so on For BIN INT and BIN NONINT formats Label is not used as sensor labels are not included in these format transmissions For NOS the label is used to identify to the formatter the different sensors that must be included in the message You must put the proper labels for each sensor or the formatter will not be able to locate the sensor to transmit it The labels are as follows Station Datum DAT 242 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800
350. ting solar radiation data If the input value is less than this threshold the data will be ignored Some sensors have a slightly negative or positive output value in low light conditions The AccThrshld allows you to ignore this data in the calculation The Sunshine calculation computes the amount of time that the input is greater than the hour threshold hr thrshld The calculation is simply If sample gt hr thrshld then HrAccum HrAccum smpl_ intvl 3600 smpl_ intvl in seconds Hr Thrshld is typically set to 120 watts m2 as set by the WMO If your input is in other units your threshold value will probably be different from 120 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 219 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SolRad Accumulator Properties Time ol fi i Interval ae Cancel Smp Intvl Acc Thrshid Hr Thrshid Units 220 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Vector Average VectAvg Inputs Speed Outputs Mean Speed Scalar This is the scalar wind speed not taking direction into account The scalar average of 10mph for an hour and 20mph for an hour is 15mph regardless of changing direction Mean Magnitude Unit This is the vector average of the wind speed using a unit vector The mean magnitude unit of Smph at 0 for 1 hour and 100mph at 180 for 1
351. tion The labeling on the 9210 is opposite of the RS 485 standard No harm will be caused by reversing the data lines but there will be no communication When no SDI 12 communication is occurring no device is driving the data lines but once the port has been opened for the initial communication the 9210 applies a slight bias current to maintain the idle condition If the sensor is expecting a stronger idle bias then that could be provided with external resistors Stronger biasing can be achieved by placing a 100K resistor from the 9210 s RS485B terminal to GND and another 100K resistor from the 9210 s RS485A terminal to PROT 12 There are two ways to use SDI 12 communications over RS 485 1 the standard SDI port can be redirected to an RS485 port typically COM4 the default is COMS or 2 by using the RS485SDI sll supports RS485 on COM4 only NOTE In either case the com port settings in the Coms SSP CL section of setup should be left as none The Coms SSP CL entry is strictly for configuring SSP and Command Line communication devices Redirecting SDI to COM4 Use this option when you do not want to use the RS485SDI sll and you do not need SDI over BOTH the standard SDI port COMS and an RS485 port COM4 supports RS485 you may also have purchased an RS485 option on another COM port To redirect SDI to COM4 the XPERT EXE program must be run with the SDI COM4 command line parameter To do this edit the autoexec bat to loo
352. tion name T MasterID ID to use in SSP message when sending an alarm HSx Force hardware RTS CTS handshaking on on port x Use this to enable handshaking on a device mode which normally has it disabled ie RADIO or SSP HSx Force hardware RTS CTS handshaking off on port x Use this to disable handshaking on a device mode which normally has it enabled ie COM MODEM VOICE DTRx Force DTR to be enabled all the time on port x when used in conjunction with a port in SSP or COM modes In SSP mode DTR is asserted whenever data is transmitted and in COM mode DTR is asserted whenever a connection is made This switch has no effect on RADIO mode where DTR is used to key the transmitter or MODEM or VOICE mode where DTR is used to hangup the phone DTRx Force DTR to be disabled all the time on port x when used in conjunction Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 287 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com with a port in SSP or COM modes AUTOLOGO Causes command prompt sessions to automatically login as the user name N AUTO with no password This can be used to limit access to the system or to allow a custom command parser full control of the session DEBUG Disables resetting of unit by the software watchdog so it doesn t interfere with debugging code NOCOMI1 Causes a session on COMI not to be started so COM1 may
353. tions SETSIP url Set the SecondaryIP for GPRS connections SETMP port Set or show the TCP port to be used for GPRS messages SETCP port Set or show the default TCP port to be used for GPRS command sessions SETRP port Set or show the default TCP port to be used for GPRS Redirector sessions HELP Displays this list STATION name The STATION command will display station s name If a name is passed to the command then the station name will be set and the change will take effect immediately STATUS clear Display and or clear com port status STOP name Stops a process forcibly TASKS Displays tasks and heap usage TIME hh mm ss Displays or sets the time TYPE file C Display a file to the screen If the file is longer than 24 lines the display will pause with a More prompt until enter is pressed to continue or anything else to abort The C option will cause the output to be continuous without pause until the end is reached or ESC is pressed OLDUPGRADE When running Windows Remote exe this command exits and upgrades to a new version of Remote downloaded to the Flash Disk folder When running Flash Disk Remote exe this command exits and Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 293 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com downgrades to the original version in Windows In either case command line settings are ret
354. to 300mA across the rated temperature range The fuse is a self resetting type that will automatically pass power through when the overload short circuit has been removed Switched power settings The switched power can be set to 5 volts or 12 volts input power This switched power is turned on when the com port is opened and turned off when the com port is closed If it is desired to provide a switched power then the software must open the com port when communications need to take place and leave them enabled until the response is received 128 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Chapter 8 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 129 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com COMMON MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING Skip autoexec bat If a unit does not appear to be running the 9210 app blank screen or communicating with a PC then it is possible that the autoexec bat file has become corrupted or modified incorrectly Follow these steps to skip the autoexec bat file Connect a PC running a terminal program to COM and apply power to the unit After the terminal displays Press Ctrl C to skip execution of Autoexec bat press CTRL key and C lt CTRL C gt hold until message displays Bypassing flash disk Autoexec bat Once the unit has finish
355. to access the GUI via Xterm over a network you d enable GUI and TCP IP If you wish to access the command line via telnet over the network you d enable Command Line and TCP IP If you want to permit automatic data collection from XConnect you d need to enable SSP and perhaps TCP IP If you wish to place the 9210 on a public network such as the internet it s recommended that additional security be utilized such as an external VPN Firewall virtual private network that would provide encrypted and secure communications Edit User User Name Password Confirm User Group Retrieval Access Rights V command Line 4 M TCP IP Timeout p mir Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SENSORS TAB The Sensors tab shows all the sensors that have been added to the system the sensor addresses the last data value sampled from each sensor and the quality of these last sampled values The page is automatically refreshed every 5 seconds Note that just because a sensor has been physically attached to the system does not mean the system software is aware it is there Adding a new sensor or other input to the system is done through the Setup tab Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status IntBat IBat 13 522624 Q G ITemp 86 160644 Q G Meas Meas alll Cal Prop SDI Live Measurem
356. to the World 119 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Then check to make sure no other program is using the modem and that the correct com port is selected If Xterm gives this dialog A Unable to dial the XPert Please check phone number and modem connection First check that the phone number has been entered correctly enter 1 and area code if needed Then use HyperTerminal or other terminal program and connect to the com port the modem is on Issue an AT amp F command and see OK if you do not see an OK then the modem is not working or is not on that comport If you get the OK then issue an AT amp FV1 amp W command to the modem then close the terminal program and try Xterm again Status and Rx Tx Xp Err indicators XTerm features four status indicators Rx Flashes when a message is received Tx Flashes when a message is sent Xp Is lit when XTerm has detected that the 9210 application is running and that communications necessary for a log dump has occurred Err Flashes when a message is received that has errors If you see this often then your serial cable may be suffering from crosstalk be wary of very thin serial cables designed to be used for a pc mouse as these are designed for low baud rates or your PC may not be capable of keeping up with 115 2K baud serial communication You could try a slower baud rate 57 6K baud or a different com port USB serial ports may have more probl
357. tor is sufficient For a 0 1 accurate sensor at least a 0 025 accurate resistor is needed HOWEVER since the cost of these resistors increase drastically as the accuracy increases only the accuracy needed should be used So even if the sensor is accurate to 0 1 if the only requirement were to be accurate to 4 0 use a 1 completion resistor Sutron sells three completion resistors all with Sppm TC or better and an initial accuracy of 0 01 as follows Part Number Resistance 1113 1244 100 OHM 1113 1242 1 Kohm 1113 1243 10 Kohm The TC should be selected for the temperature range needed generally a 25ppm or 5ppm TC will suffice To improve the accuracy of the reading or if using a resistor other than specified like using a 100 ohm in place of a 20 ohm the completion resistor can be calibrated and a slope computed by following this procedure The ohmmeter should have an accuracy that is at least 4 times needed as stated above 1 Using an accurate ohmmeter measure the resistor and note the actual reading 2 Calculate a correction factor by dividing the expected reading by the actual reading e g Expected 20 using a 100 reading exactly 100 20 100 0 2000 Expected 20 using a 20 reading 20 52 20 20 52 0 9747 3 To get from the RAW electrical reading back to a physical unit multiply the given or calculated slope times the correction factor to get a new Corrected Slope For example using a 4 20mA output s
358. tron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Offset such that future readings will equal the entered value Simply set the offset back to 0 to undo this RT DIGITS Sets the number of right digits used when displaying and logging the sensor SLOPE OFFSET The current slope and offset assigned to the sensor MODULE CHANNEL PORT ADDR These settings mirror those found in the sensor configuration dialog The setting will appear only when the selected sensor type supports the property For example when the sensor type is ADC the Module and Channel properties are shown in the Sensor Configuration dialog as well as on the dialog that appears once More is clicked Note Most sensors have many more important settings than can be shown on the EzSetup Sensor Configuration dialog The additional settings are accessed by pressing More PARAMETER Appears when a sensor has more then one possible output For instance an AT RH sensor has both an air temperature and a relative humidity output Select the one to measure Multi Output Sensors Several sensors have more than one output parameter to select for measurement For example the SDI 12 sensor offers output parameters 1 through 20 the RMYoung and GillWind sensors offer output parameters Speed and Dir and the Counter sensor provides Count DeltaCount and Freq output parameters When a sensor with multiple outputs is selected in the Sensor Co
359. tron com B default ssf English Cancel Up Name default ssf L z The Up button is used to move up one level in the directory tree structure Use it to get to a USB storage device displayed as USB Card or to an SD storage card displayed as SD Card To change the filename for the setup file being saved click the change button and using the virtual keypad to enter the desired name of the file Append The Append option is used to append blocks from another setup file to the current one Note that only blocks are appended No other settings from the setup file selected are imported e g Satlink settings remain unchanged after appending a new setup file Note The system saves the setup file as changes are made so that it is never necessary to perform an explicit save and hence there is no Save option Users The Users branch of the setup tab is used to manage the list of user login accounts to the system Pressing Edit with this branch selected brings up a window with all the users accounts that have been added so far it will be blank if none have yet been added From here an account can be added modified or deleted The columns provide a summary of the settings including the name group timeout and the access rights that have been permitted In the screen below Susan has been placed in the data Retrieval user group She may leave the unit inactive for 1 minute before it will t
360. tup continue When it asks to restart recording click NO Recording doesn t need to start until the entire setup is completed Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 101 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Click the plus next to the Satlink tree then select the Self Timed branch and click the EDIT button From here enter all the parameter of the transmission as assigned by NESDIS For this example use a hour rate at a 00 00 00 time offset and send 8 data values Also set the window centering to on and set the window to 15 seconds Self Timed Properties Enable Self Timed V Append Lat Lon Center in Window V Append Quality 7 Channel fis1 Time fo0 00 00 J Num Vals Bo Ea Rate 01 00 00 Es Format SHEF Window 00 00 15 E Type 200 bps 7 OK Cancel Since this setup is not going to use alarms no more information is needed for the Satlink setup If alarms were to be defined the RANDOM tree would be the place to set that information Measuring a shaft encoder every 15 minute on a fixed interval is easily accomplished using the new EZSetup tree of the SETUP Tab First define the measurement interval then add the sensor and configure it Main Setup Sensors Log Data Status Measurement Schedule Coms Measurement Interval 00 15 00 aa eS ee Measurement Time foo 00 00 ve New
361. turns to the Label DTMF 2 top menu with BRANCH AckAlarms USER 0 DTMF 3 will hang up SpeakPhrase Alarm the phone SpeakPhrase Acknowledge Label DTMF ANY say that if SpeakPhrase Thank you any other DTMF is pressed Pause 1 0 return to the top menu Branch USER 1 Label DTMF 3 SpeakPhrase Thank you SpeakPhrase Please call again Hangup Label DTMF ANY Branch USER 1 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com LOS Radio SSP and RS 485 Settings LOS Radio Settings Tx Normal Rate 00 00 00 f f Tx Alarm Rate 00 00 00 es Disable Alerts 00 00 00 will disable a Tx This is the LOS Radio settings screen There are only three settings here The Tx Normal Rate is the rate at which alarms are transmitted when no sensors are in alarm and the Tx Alarm Rate which is the rate used when a sensor is in alarm They can be set to 00 00 00 to inhibit timed alarm transmissions Disable Alerts may be checked to prevent messages to be sent out the port when the system enters the alert state The LOS Radio only supports sending alarms to PC Base Stations using SSP Sutron Standard Protocol The SSP and RS 485 options are very similar to the LOS Radio option The primary difference being that SSP assumes a direct SSP Only serial connection between two devices and RS 485 assumes there is an RS 485 connection The difference is in how the c
362. ug These updates are typically made available as downloads on the Sutron website www sutron com downloads software htm If your system is performing up to your expectations you may not want to update your firmware since there is always some risk of introducing a new problem into the system If you are unsure whether to update your system and would like to know more about the contents of a particular firmware update what it adds and what it fixes contact Sutron Customer Service and request the engineering bulletin for the update When new firmware is released the user upgrades in one of two ways Serial Ethernet Upgrade Serial cable connected to COM1 on the Xlite and optionally ethernet cable connected to DHCP enabled network Storage Card Upgrade SD or USB flash drive does not upgrade loader nor micro monitor WHEN UPGRADING TO v3 8 OR HIGHER FROM v3 7 OR LOWER YOU MUST UPGRADE THE LOADER SEE Upgrade the Boot Loader BELOW AFTER UPGRADING THE LOADER UPGRADE THE APPLICATION AND KERNEL DO NOT DOWNGRADE TO v3 7 FROM A VERSION HIGHER THAN v3 7 WITHOUT OFFLOADING YOUR DATA FIRST DOWNGRADING TO v3 7 FROM A HIGHER VERSION WILL RESULT IN A LOSS OF DATA ON FLASH DISK SD CARDS ARE SUPPORTED SDHC CARDS ARE NOT YET SUPPORTED Serial Ethernet Upgrade The Upgrade button on the right side of the XTerm window is used to start a software upgrade using COM1 The steps to perform this kind of upgrade are as follows
363. uire The nominal operating range for frequency offset is 250 Hz 5 e Nis the Modulation Index It can be o N for normal desired o L for low o H for high e Nis the Data Quality It can be o N Normal error rate better than 1 X 10 6 o F Fair error rate between 1 X 10 4 and 1 X 10 6 o P Poor error rate worse than 1 X 10 4 195 is the transmission channel E is the spacecraft It can be E for east or W for west FF is the uplink carrier status 00062 means that 62 bytes of non header data were received There is a space after 62 and before SATLINK It is the quality flag quote 0x22 Clock updated since last TX space 0x20 Clock not updated since last TX b 0x62 Clock updated Pseudo Binary 0x60 Clock not updated Pseudo Binary B 0x42 Clock updated BINARY 0x40 Clock not updated BINARY 314 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com APPENDIX I DIMENSIONS Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 315 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com XLITE DATA LOGGER Dimensions are shown in inches c 5530 235 900 2 000 305 p gt I 3 Ol LEF SELE
364. uld be set to 2000 minimally when Concurrent is selected and set to 3000 minimally when Concurrent is not selected SDI Aquatrak SDI Address fo v le Retry Delay ms 2 000 fe Concurrent Cmd V Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com SE8500 SE8500 Inputs lt none gt Outputs Output Wiring The SE8500 can connect to any of the 9210 serial ports The SE8500 wires to the 6461 1239 termination board as follows Color Name Pin 6461 1239 Red 12 6 BLK GND 5 White TXD 3 Green RXD 2 Descri ption This block measures a SE8500 configured for serial output It can also work with an SE8500 connected to a wireless link The properties allow setting the Com Port range offset address and units NOTE Leave the settings in the SETUP TAB COMS SSP CL set to none as this block will not be able to use the com port if Coms SSP CL is already using it Address specifies which address the SE8500 is set to Typically address is 0 Other valid addresses are 1 9 A F After the value is read from the SE8500 it is scaled as follows Value reading range offset Range is typically 0 01 because the SE8500 multiples its value by 100 before sending it However you can select a different range value if desired SE8500 Properties Com Port coms 7 l Range hooo Offset booo C
365. under control of Remote then the existing port settings are always used This includes hardware handshaking If you try to communicate with a port with hardware handshaking enabled and CTS is low preventing transmission then the message CTS LOW is displayed Pressing ESC twice followed by a will show the status of the control lines H high L Low pressing again any number of times will update the current status of those lines pressing any other key will stop checking the status of the lines and return to passthru mode RD dir Remove a directory REBOOT Reboots the 9210 RECORDING onloff The RECORDING command will display the current recording status If on is specified then recording is turned on likewise off will turn recording off RELEASE adapter Releases DHCP leases on network adapters or the specific adapter if specified The adapter index can be retrieved and the current lease viewed with the IPCONFIG ALL command DHCP leases are usually managed automatically but this command can be used to verify that a connected router is assigning IP addresses reliably REN old new Rename a file RENEW adapter Renews DHCP leases on network adapters or the specific adapter if specified The adapter index can be retrieved and the current lease viewed with the IPCONFIG ALL command DHCP leases are usually managed automatically but this command can be used to verify that a connected rou
366. uration 208 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Ei Interpolate Interpolate Inputs InterIn Outputs InterOut Description The Interpolate block is used to apply a table lookup function to a data stream This is useful in instances when applying a polynomial function would be too difficult For values not in the entered table the output is interpolated from adjoining table entries based on the selected Method The outputted signal can be labeled with new units by clicking the Units button Interpolate Properties Data Edit File Method Linear Units Cancel To load edit or save the file to interpolate from click the Edit File button The following window will come up F Interpolate Data File Cancel Load Save Clear All Remove Pair Edit Pair L Insert Pair To start creating a new table use Insert Pair to enter pairs of values The values will automatically sort according to the values in the X column Any XY pair can be edited or deleted by clicking on that pair and clicking Edit Pair or Remove Pair To erase all the entries in the table click Clear All To save the file or load a previously saved file click Load or Save Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 209 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron co
367. urrent measurements in the range of 0 to 20ma It requires one input channel for a single ended measurement or an input channel pair for a differential measurement The dialog changes slightly when this measurement type is selected Analog Input Properties AIO Mod F 7 Meas Type F 7 Filter Notch Settling Time We oOo z x pery oO M Units fo fai Offset Differential 7 Slope T1 HHAH Cancel F i When measuring using an Xpert AIO module make sure 8080 0003 is checked Otherwise specify the resistor value in Resistance Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 141 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com DC resistance To measure resistance set up an excitation channel and hook the device or medium to be measured between this channel and ground The I O module will do a voltage over current calculation to determine the resistance The excitation voltage should be set to a value appropriate to the approximate resistance being measured DC resistance uses a built in precision 20 ohm resistor as the reference for the resistance measurement An external 20 ohm bridge completion resistor must be used AC resistance If this is selected the I O module will take two measurements for every measurement value the block outputs The first measurement is done using the voltage specified by the excitation voltage and the second with this volt
368. ut data units If x and y inputs have the same units these units will be retained through to the output Block Placement XYFunct output should be connected to the input of a measure or other scheduled block If you were to connect it after a measure multiple entries would go into the log and the most current data would not be used for both X and Y inputs By placing the measure onto the output the system will get input data at the same time from both inputs XY Function Properties x wo y Cancel Oxy Units Ox y Oxy O1 x 5E8500 228 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com LOGGING BLOCKS Log Inputs Input Outputs Output Description This block is used to funnel a data stream into a log file Generally one log block is needed for each signal of each sensor that needs to be logged For example if temperature and humidity from a AT RH block needs to be logged one log block is needed for each The different log blocks in the system can log to the same log file different log files or anything in between Log Properties Log Name Flash Disk SSP LOG x Sensor Name HGAvg f Precision right digits 2 H Log scheduled time From the Log Name drop down menu select the log file the data is to be stored to If the log you wish to use does not yet exist select the New Log
369. warning when the setup is saved Group lets you assign which random group you are defining the alarm properties for Label defines the string that will be added to the random transmission to identify the group Typically label is a single character such as 2 or 3 e g group number This field can be any length but only the first 3 characters are used in the transmit message A line is placed into the sensors tab for each random group block in the setup This line is provided as a way to see the current alarm status of the different groups If a random group line is selected and measured or if Measure All is pressed then the random group s will pull and evaluate their data This can result in one or both of the following conditions If the random group were placed into the setup after a log block this would send the data pulled into the log with the time stamp of when it was measured If it is desired to not have this data go into the log the random group should be placed before the log block This will also evaluate alarm data before the next measurement This would be useful when a user is at a site and knows that an event occurred that should trigger an alarm transmission before the next measurement interval Time and Interval Time and Interval are used to filter the data to transmit from the data collected by the random parameter blocks it is not the time and interval of the random transmission A time of 00 00 00 an
370. wise occur In the following example the moving average would reinitialize its computations every 12 hours synchronized to midnight Moving Average Properties 00 00 00 a Cancel 12 00 00 P Circular E Input Interval Duration 00 10 00 214 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com rl Polynomial Poly Inputs PolyIn Outputs PolyOut Description The Polynomial block is an extremely flexible generate purpose processing block that can apply a polynomial function in any part of the Setup Diagram data stream The orders of the desired equation up to 5 order are entered next to kO through k5 If the units to be outputted from this block are different from those of the signal that were inputted those new units can be entered via Units Polynomial Properties Evaluate kOe L x k2 472 21 k 445 op LE eE ub ilJ sp ILA ebk ild 6p ILA A good use of this block is to generate meaningful values from an unsupported sensor For example say there is a humidity sensor that outputs 0 5 to 2 5 volts for 0 to 100 relative humidity different from the output of any sensors supported by the AT RH sensor block The following equation could be determined y 50x 25 which would convert the sensor voltage to a relative humidity value ranging from 0 to 100 that could be logged or transmitted To
371. ww sutron com PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The 9210 data acquisition platform is based on a 32 bit microprocessor running the Microsoft Windows CE operating system All models have a built in 10 channel 16 bit A D 8 channel digital 3 RS232 ports 1 RS232 RS485 port SDI 12 port and an I C port For data retrieval simply connect a PC modem satellite transmitter and or cell phone In addition every unit comes with a minimum of thirty two megabytes of flash disk for data and program storage and thirty two megabytes of RAM for program execution All units support expanding storage up to 2GB via the SD card slot Power should be supplied from an external battery of 10 16 VDC All the functionality can be accessed through a PC or Pocket PC All the operations necessary to operate the unit can be done via the graphical interface on the PC PocketPC In addition the built in LCD allows for viewing data and simple calibration and adjustment 9210 Xlite with Integrated Display and I O modules 2x20 Backlit LCD Display Menu and Data Entry keys a B Terminal Strip 8 Channel Digital I O RS485 SDI 12 A Terminal Strip 10 Channel Analog Input DC Power Connection Earth Connection 4 RS232 Ports PC Bus to I O Modules SD Card USB Ethernet Mounting holes 9210B Front Endplate 4 Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Models Sever
372. ype selected Select a soil type of User Defined to enter your own coefficients Block Placement The CS625WCR block should typically come BEFORE the measure or average or other active block that executes it This ensures the block operates on data from the same measurement frame and avoids odd side effects that come from active blocks operating on split paths that recombine Bringing the Benefits of Real Time Data Collection to the World 205 Sutron Corporation Tel 703 406 2800 http www sutron com Dew Point DewPt Inputs temper ature humidity Outputs dew point Description This block computes dew point from temperature and humidity The temperature input may have units of either Celsius or Fahrenheit the units field of the incoming data is used to determine which is in effect The humidity input is expected to be a percentage The dew point output is expressed in the same units as the incoming temperature The block has no user set properties Dew point is computed according to the WMO Guide to Meteorological Instruments and Methods Observation WMO No 8 seventh edition 2006 Block Placement The Dew Point block should typically come BEFORE the measure or average or other active block that executes it This ensures the block operates on data from the same measurement frame and avoids odd side effects that come from active blocks operating on split paths that recombine 206 Bring
373. ytes The maximum log size is the lesser of 1 2 billion bytes or 2 the free space available on the storage medium minus a small safety buffer 32k for storage cards 192k for Flash Disk Export Log Options Pressing the Expt Opt button on the Log File Properties dialog brings up the following dialog used to define options related to exporting a log file Export Log Options Use val for bad data M Include station header Print NOTE Log Records Print RecordID before date M Include field header _ Include units header i Cancel When Use val for bad data is checked all data marked with Bad quality B is replaced with the supplied value on export When Include station header is checked the export will contain a header containing the station name This makes it easy to identify which station the export came from When Print NOTE is checked log notes will be exported and displayed in log tab with NOTE in the sensor field and the note text in the data field By default this option is not checked meaning NOTE is not printed and the note text is displayed in the sensor field When Print RecordID before date is checked the RecordID field for all log records if any is printed before the date and time When Include field header is checked the exported file contains a header describing the format of each log record field if any When

9210B Xlite Data Logger

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents